Jennifer D.
What is the function of the RatioCC module?
The RatioCC is a control module type located in the Control Extended Library. It is designed for arithmetics and signal handling, and is intended to be used for building advanced control loops.
ABB AC 800M Version 5.0 Compact Control Builder User manual
Below you will find brief information for Compact Control Builder AC 800M Version 5.0. Compact Control Builder AC 800M Version 5.0 is a software suite for ABB's AC800M control system. It provides extended control software, including binary and analog handling. The software allows for the creation of re-usable automation solutions, such as control loops and other analog control functions using Control libraries.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Industrial
IT
Compact Control Builder AC 800M
Version 5.0
Extended Control Software
Binary and Analog Handling
Industrial
IT
Compact Control Builder AC 800M
Version 5.0
Extended Control Software
Binary and Analog Handling
NOTICE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low
Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC.
TRADEMARKS
Copyright ©
2003-2006 by ABB.
All rights reserved.
Release:
Document number:
June 2006
3BSE041488R101
All rights to copyrights and trademarks reside with their respective owners.
3BSE041488R101
TABLE OF CONTENTS
About This Book
Section 1 - Introduction
Section 2 - Libraries
5
6
Section 3 - Standard Libraries
Ready-Made Objects, Templates and Building Stones........................................ 37
Where to Find Information About Standard Library Types................................. 39
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 - Analog Process Control
Functions and Other Libraries Used for Analog Control.....................................65
Remarks on the Design of Control Loops............................................................98
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template) .................114
3BSE041488R101 7
8
3BSE041488R101
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 - Binary Process Control
Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects) .............................................216
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) .........................220
Use Standard Library Types to Create Self-defined Types ................................241
Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type ....................................................254
Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode ........................................................262
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts...................................................266
Section 6 - Synchronized Control
9
10
Section 7 - Surveillance
Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic............................................. 311
Appendix A - Customized Online Help
Online Help Files for User-defined Libraries with Hardware and Non-standard hardware
Appendix B - Library Objects Overview
3BSE041488R101
INDEX
3BSE041488R101 11
12 3BSE041488R101
About This Book
General
This manual describes how to create re-usable automation solutions using the ABB standard libraries that are supplied with Compact Control Builder. It is a continuation of the two manuals Basic Control Software, Introduction and
Configuration, and Application Programming, Introduction and Design, which describes basic configuration and programming functions that are accessed through the Project Explorer interface.
The libraries described in this manual conform to the IEC 61131-3 Programming
Languages standard, except for control modules, which are not supported by this standard.
This manual is organized in the following sections:
•
, a short introduction to the contents of the manual.
•
, which describes the concepts behind using libraries when developing automation solutions.
•
, which contains a general description of the libraries delivered with the system, how to use them, and their common properties.
•
Section 4, Analog Process Control , which describe how to create control loops
and other analog control functions using the Control libraries.
•
Section 5, Binary Process Control , which describes how to create binary
control solutions using the Process Object and Signal Object libraries.
•
Section 6, Synchronized Control
, which describes how to create start and stop sequences for different automation solutions using the Group Start Library.
•
, which describes the Signal and Vote Loop Concept.
3BSE041488R101 13
14
Document Conventions About This Book
Document Conventions
Microsoft Windows conventions are normally used for the standard presentation of material when entering text, key sequences, prompts, messages, menu items, screen elements, etc.
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons
This publication includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate to point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to point out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as follows:
Electrical Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.
injury.
Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.
Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use a certain function
Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
fully comply with all Warning and Caution notices.
3BSE041488R101
About This Book Terminology
Terminology
The following is a list of terms associated with Compact Control Builder. You should be familiar with these terms before reading this manual. The list contains terms and abbreviations that are unique to ABB, or have a usage or definition that is different from standard industry usage.
Term/Acronym
(M)
Application
Description
(M) is used to refer to function block type and a control module type with similar functionality, for example,
MotorBi(M).
Applications contain program code to be compiled and downloaded for execution in a controller. Applications are displayed in Project Explorer.
MMS
Control Builder A programming tool with a compiler for control software.
Control Builder is accessed through the Project Explorer interface.
Control Module (Type) A program unit that supports object-oriented data flow programming. Control modules offer free-layout graphical programming, code sorting and static parameter connections. Control module instances are created from control module types.
Industrial
IT
ABB’s vision for enterprise automation.
Interaction Window A graphical interface used by the programmer to interact with an object. Available for many library types.
OPC/DA
Manufacturing Message Specification, a standard for messages used in industrial communication.
An application programming interface defined by the standardization group OPC Foundation. The standard defines how to access large amounts of real-time data between applications. The OPC standard interface is used between automation/control applications, field systems/devices and business/office application.
3BSE041488R101 15
16
Terminology
Term/Acronym
Process Object
Project Explorer
Type
About This Book
Description
A process concept/equipment e.g. valve, motor, conveyor or tank.
The Control Builder interface. Used to create, navigate and configure libraries, applications and hardware.
A type solution that is defined in a library or locally, in an application. A type is used to create instances, which inherit the properties of the type.
3BSE041488R101
Section 1 Introduction
Extended Control Software
This manual describes Extended Control Software. The word extended comes from the fact that standard libraries that are not integrated with or based on AC 800M firmware can be seen as extensions to Compact Control Builder, and to AC 800M control software, see
.
Basic (closely integrated with firmware
Extended (not dependent on firmware)
IEC 61131-3 code
AC 800M firmware
Batch Control Group
Start
Process
Object
A&E
Comm.
Basic
System
Figure 1. Basic and extended control software - standard libraries (some support libraries have been left out).
3BSE041488R101 17
18
Libraries and Types Section 1 Introduction
Functions and types belonging to the Basic part of the system are described in the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
This manual contains the following sections and supporting appendixces.
•
Section 2, Libraries discusses what to consider when planning your own library
structure, and how to use the standard libraries that are installed with Compact
Control Builder.
•
Section 3, Standard Libraries , contains an overview of the AC 800M standard
libraries. It also explains the use of templates.
•
Section 4, Analog Process Control
, describes the types of the Control libraries, and how to build control loops using these.
•
Section 5, Binary Process Control
, describes the types of the Process Object libraries, and how to build process object control solutions using these.
•
Section 6, Synchronized Control , gives a short introduction to the Group Start
library.
•
Section 7, Surveillance , describes the Signal and Vote Loop Concept.
•
Appendix A, Customized Online Help
, describes the requirements for creating help for your own libraries and applications.
•
Appendix B, Library Objects Overview
, gives an overview of all library objects.
Libraries and Types
A library is a collection of type solutions, which can be connected to applications and other libraries, so that they can create instances from those types. However, the
Library>Hardware folder, in Project Explorer, contains libraries with hardware types, which can be connected to controllers only. Libraries and types are discussed
in detail in Section 2, Libraries .
Throughout this manual, there are two library categories:
Standard libraries are installed with Compact Control Builder. User-defined libraries are libraries that you create with the purpose of storing your own type solutions, so that you can re-use them.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries
Introduction
This section describes the library concept, as implemented in the Compact Control
Builder. The description is split into the following parts:
• An introduction (this part), which introduces some important concepts and discusses things such as what a type is, what a library is, different kinds of types and their intended use, and when it is suitable to use type solutions and libraries.
•
Advantages When Using Libraries and Types on page 25 is a summary of the
advantages of using types and libraries as a basis for all your automation system development.
•
Building Complex Solutions With Types on page 27 describes the three
different basic ways of building automation solutions using types from the standard libraries. This part covers important concepts such as templates.
•
Library Management on page 30 discusses how to plan your library structure
and maintain your libraries over a longer period of time, including version handling. This part also discusses some risks and potential problems that you have to be aware of.
•
Library Command Summary on page 34 lists useful actions and commands
when working with libraries.
3BSE041488R101 19
Types and Libraries Section 2 Libraries
Types and Libraries
A library is a collection of types, which can be connected to applications and other libraries, so that they can create instances from those types. However a library in the
Hardware folder contains a hardware type(s), which can be connected to controller(s) only, that is, it is controller (s) only that can create instances of hardware types. Before we discuss what a library is, it is necessary to define what a type is.
For a detailed discussion of types and objects, see the manual Basic Control
Software, Introduction and Configuration.
Types Defined in Applications and Libraries
A type is a solution to a typical automation problem, small as well as big. A type can be a simple counter, or a complete control loop. Types can be defined in an application, or in a library.
Types may contain instances of other types. These instances are often referred to as formal instances. Note that you can use types from another library when building types, as long as you connect this library to your application and/or library.
A type is used to create instances, in an object-oriented manner. Each instance points to the type it is based on, which means that when an instance is executed, it is really the code stored in the type that is executed, but variables and other data is instance-specific.
The fact that it is the same code that executes in all instances is, as a matter of fact, the point of the whole type concept, for two reasons:
• Instances (often called objects) inherit the properties from their type. This allows re-use and makes your automation solution flexible, since the behavior of large numbers of instances can be changed by changing the type.
This means that changes made to a type affect all instances. This is a very important concept!
20 3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Types and Libraries
• The memory consumption for each instance is smaller, compared to the memory needed to execute the type itself. For example, a MotorUni function block type consumes about 65 kB, while each additional instance only needs another 12 kB.
There is good reason to consider the above when selecting when to use type solutions and which types to use. If you create types on a very high level, you might run into problems when you want to change something for a particular object, due to the fact that this change will affect other objects of the same type.
This can partly be solved by including copies of certain types, which can then be changed without affecting the corresponding part of other types. However, the price for copying certain types is increased memory consumption, as well as an increased risk of problems when upgrading types and libraries.
Hardware Types
Hardware types represent the physical hardware units and communication protocols that can be added to AC 800M. It can be a CPU unit, a communication interface or an I/O unit (see
Hardware Overview on page 47). Hardware types can be defined in
libraries only.
There are some advantages by organizing hardware types in libraries:
• It is easy to upgrade to newer system versions and to let a new version of a hardware type coexist with an older version (but in different versions of the library).
• New library versions can be delivered and inserted to the system.
• Only used hardware types, in controller configuration(s), allocate memory in the system.
A hardware type contains a hardware definition file, that is, the source code of the hardware unit. Changing and replacing a type in a library may affect all instances of the hardware unit. For example, changing a hardware type of a I/O unit that is used in more than one positions in a controller, affects all positions there the I/O unit is used in the hardware tree (I/O connections and parameters may be incorrect).
This means that changes made to a hardware type affect all instances.
3BSE041488R101 21
22
Types and Libraries Section 2 Libraries
When replacing a hardware type, the user is requested to either replace or to check the affected hardware units in the hardware configuration editor (recommended).
Libraries
A library is a collection of types. Libraries are presented as objects in Project
Explorer (
)
Figure 2. Libraries in Project Explorer.
For a library to show up in Project Explorer, it has to have been added to the
Libraries folder of the project (see Figure 2 ). Right-click the Libraries/Hardware
folder and select Insert Library.
For a summary of useful library commands, see
Library Management on page 30.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Types and Libraries
A library in Libraries folder may contains the following (see Figure 3 ):
• Data types,
• Function block types,
• Control module types,
• Project constants.
Figure 3. Contents of a library in the Libraries folder.
3BSE041488R101 23
Types and Libraries
A library in the Hardware folder may contains (see
• Hardware types (*.hwd files)
• Device capability description files (for example*.gsd files)
Section 2 Libraries
24
Figure 4. Contents of a library in the Hardware folder.
If you want to use a type from a library, it has to be connected to the application, library or controller (libraries with hardware types) in which you want to use the type.
Right-click the Connected Libraries folder for the application, library or controller in question, and select Connect Library. You can now select a library from the list.
If the library does not show up in the list, it has to be added to the Libraries folder of the project, see above.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Advantages When Using Libraries and Types
Advantages When Using Libraries and Types
The advantage of using type solutions in your automation system is enhanced further if you organize your types in libraries. This is especially true if your organization is big and develops automation solutions for a number of plants and processes. The two following subsections provide a summary of the advantages of using types and libraries.
Type Solutions
Whenever an automation solution contains a large number of similar objects, which perform similar function, but in different locations or contexts, there is reason to consider using type solutions.
This is one of the most important decisions you have to make before you start programming your automation solution: “Which types do I need?”
Some things to consider are:
• Which parts of my plant are likely to change? Typically, something might be added to a production line, or another production line might be added.
• Which objects can be said to be variations on a theme, that is, can be seen as instances of a certain type solution? Typically, this would be objects such as motors, tanks, valves.
• Which objects does my process contain that correspond to types already contained in the standard libraries that are installed with Compact Control
Builder? If you can identify such objects, you only have to configure them for use in your particular environment, most of the programming work is already done.
• In which situations could it happen that one object changes, while all other similar objects remain the same?
• Standard libraries might be upgraded, as well as your self-defined ones. Type and library upgrades might cause problems in running applications.
3BSE041488R101 25
26
Libraries Section 2 Libraries
If you plan your types carefully, you will benefit from it in a number of ways:
• Re-usable solutions save development time, as well as memory.
• Well-tested type solutions will increase the reliability of your automation system. It is also easier to test a system that is based on type solutions.
• You can change the type in one place and it will have effect on all instances, instead of having to make the same change for many (maybe thousands of) identical objects.
Libraries
Once you have decided on which types to use in your automation solution, you should also consider how to organize them. Well-defined libraries give you the following advantages:
• All automation engineers within your organization will have access to the same type solutions. This will save development time and result in consistent automation systems.
• The knowledge of experienced programmers and specialists can be packaged and distributed to all automation engineers through libraries.
• A common standard can be implemented via the libraries, for example, a name standard.
• Complex solutions can be built with a high degree of control by using library hierarchies.
• A large number of applications can be updated by simply updating a library.
• Version control of standard libraries makes it possible to upgrade some applications, but leave others unchanged.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Building Complex Solutions With Types
Building Complex Solutions With Types
As mentioned in the introduction to this section, there are two basic ways to build automation solutions from the types in the standard libraries:
• Use ready-made types that only have to be configured and connected to the environment.
• Use template types that are modified to fit the process requirements. Using a template might also require adding functions by using other objects from the
standard libraries or by writing code. See Templates on page 51.
When you cannot find a ready-made type or a template that fits your needs, then you must build your own solution. A complex type or application-specific solution can be built using a number of types from the standard libraries as building stones, together with your own types. In some cases, the best thing might be to use a template and then add functions to it.
A good example of a Complex solution where types from the standard libraries are used as building stones is a cascade control loop.
The cascade loop in Figure 5 is a good example of a complex solution. A similar
cascade loop can be found in the Control Solution library.
Master
Level
AI
Slave
AO
AI
Figure 5. Cascade loop built from control modules.
The cascade loop contains two control modules of type PidCC, one used as master, and one used as slave (
). The input consists of two AnalogInCC control modules and one Level6CC control module. The output consists of an
AnalogOutCC control module.
3BSE041488R101 27
Building Complex Solutions With Types Section 2 Libraries
28
Figure 6. Cascade loop in Compact Control Builder.
The heart of all automation solution is the actual control of the process and/or equipment. These types you find in the Control, the Process Object and Supervision libraries. However, there are a number of supporting libraries, which can be used to create specific solutions for part of the system, or to add functions by using other function blocks or control modules:
•
Signal Handling
Signal handling types are found in the Basic and Signal libraries, but also inside the Control and Process object libraries. It might, for example, be necessary to add a selector if there are several input signals to choose from.
Other examples of signal handling objects that might be added are limiters and filters, if input signals sometimes are outside the desired range or contain undesired components.
•
Alarm and Event Handling
The Alarm and Event library contains a number of types that can be used to add to alarm and event handling. These types can interact with existing alarms, or be added as a separate alarm function.
•
Communication
Objects from the Communication libraries can be added to establish communication with other applications, or even other controllers.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Building Complex Solutions With Types
In addition to the types in the standard libraries, you can also define your own types, both on a higher level and low-level objects.
Most low-level objects are already available to you as types, in the Basic library and via system firmware functions. Make sure that you check if there already is a type or function that fulfills your needs before starting to design your own types.
An application can be based on a mix of types from standard libraries, self-defined types from your own libraries, and locally defined types. See
for an example.
User Library X
Library A
Type A1
Type A2
Type A3
Type X1
Type X2
X21 (based on B1)
X22(based on B2)
X23 (based on C2)
Application Y (connected to Library A and User Library X)
Type Y1 (locally defined in application)
YObject1 (instance) (based on Type A3)
YObject2 (instance) (based on Type A3)
YObject3 (instance) (based on Type Y1)
YObject4 (instance) (based on Type X2)
Library A
User Library X
Library B
Library C
Figure 7. Building complex solutions based on standard libraries, self-defined libraries, and locally defined types.
3BSE041488R101 29
30
Library Management Section 2 Libraries
Library Management
When working with libraries, it is important to be aware of how libraries are version handled, how libraries are connected, and what happens if a certain library is changed.
It is not possible to change library version of a library in the Libraries folder.
However, library versions of libraries in the Hardware folder can be changed.
See also the manual Library Objects Style Guide, Introduction and Design,
(3BSE042835Rxxxx).
The following important rules apply:
• Libraries may exist in different versions in the same project. Different versions of libraries with hardware types may coexist in a controller, but it is not possible to connect libraries with different versions to the same application.
If you try to connect multiple versions of a library to an application, a warning dialog will be displayed, stating which library and which versions that cause the problem. Please note that multiple versions might occur through dependencies.
layers.
• Libraries in the Libraries folder may depend on each other in a number of
Do not interconnect libraries unless it is absolutely necessary. There is always a risk of upgrade problems if there are many dependencies between libraries.
• Circular dependencies of libraries in that are used in applications are not allowed. Compact Control Builder checks and will warn you if you try to connect a library that create circular dependencies.
• Standard libraries cannot be changed by the user. This applies to both the library itself and the types inside.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Tips and Recommendations
• Self-defined libraries have three possible development states:
– Open,
– Closed,
– Released.
• It is not possible to change a library with status Released. Make sure that a spare copy of the self-defined library is saved on local disc before changing to status Release.
• If a self-defined library has the status Open, it can be changed to Closed or
Released.
• If a self-defined library has the status Closed, it can be changed to Open or
Released.
Tips and Recommendations
The following list contains tips and recommendations intended to help you build an effective library structure and make good use of the standard libraries:
• All new libraries should have the suffix ‘Lib’, for example, ‘TankLib’.
• Libraries with hardware types should contain the suffix ‘HwLib’, for example,
‘S800ModulebusHwLib’.
• Libraries belonging to the same family should have a common prefix to their name, for example, ‘TankBasicLib’, ‘TankExtendedLib’.
•
You can password protect your libraries, see Library Command Summary on page 34.
• All type names should follow the Control Builder naming standard and the
IEC61131-3 standard.
For detailed information on naming conventions, see the manual Application
Programming, Introduction and Design.
• Short names are more important for function blocks, since there is less space to show names in the Function Block Diagram (FBD) editor.
• When naming parameters, do not use very long names. This might have undesired effects in graphical displays.
3BSE041488R101 31
32
Tips and Recommendations Section 2 Libraries
• Use easy-to-understand and descriptive names.
• Avoid reserved names, such as IF, THEN, ELSE. See also
• Make sure that descriptions for parameters provide the user with enough
information. Also, see Parameter Keywords on page 33.
• Hide or protect objects that you do not want the user of your libraries to modify
(or even see).
For detailed information on hiding and protecting types, see the manual Basic
Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
• When creating data types, separate between two cases:
– If a data type is closely connected to a certain type, store it in the same library as the type.
– If a data type is used in many different types, and these types are stored in several libraries, there are two alternatives: a.
Data types that are only used internally should be hidden and stored in a separate support library containing hidden types only. The name of the library should then include the word ‘Support’, for example,
‘TankSupportLib’.
b.
Data types that are used for parameters that are connected to other types and to the surrounding code should be stored in a common library containing visible types. The name of this library should then include the word ‘Basic’, for example, ‘TankBasicLib’.
• Simple function blocks and control modules that are used as formal instances
1 in several complex types, in several libraries, should be placed in a separate support library (this library then has to be connected to all libraries where these types are used).
• Document your libraries. Use the Project Documentation function, see
Where to Find Information About Standard Library Types on page 39.
1.
Formal instances are objects (instances of another type) that are located inside a type. Formal instances are executed when objects based on the type execute in applications.
3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Reserved Names
Reserved Names
In addition to names reserved for use in code (IF, etc. see online help or the manual
Application Programming, Introduction and Design), the use of the following names is also reserved
1
, and should be avoided for other purposes.
Table 1. Reserved names.
Name
Template
Core
HSI
Description
Use for templates only.
Use for Core objects only.
Use for graphics calculation objects only.
Icon Use for icons only.
Info Use for interaction windows only.
Parameter Keywords
All parameters in control module types and all IN_OUT parameters in function block types are recommended to contain an indication of its use in the
corresponding Description field. The use is indicated by keywords, see Table 2 .
They must contain at least one of the first four keywords. The keyword should be placed before the following descriptive text, see
.
Table 2. Keywords for parameters
Keyword
IN
OUT
IN(OUT)
OUT(IN)
Description (start parameter description with keyword)
The parameter is only read.
The parameter is only written.
The parameter is both read and written, but mostly read.
The parameter is both read and written, but mostly written.
1.
These names are intended for use in instance names, for example, an UniCore instance would be called Core.
3BSE041488R101 33
Library Command Summary
Keyword
NODE
EDIT
Section 2 Libraries
Table 2. Keywords for parameters (Continued)
Description (start parameter description with keyword)
Used when the parameter has a graphical connection node
(control modules only).
The value of the parameter is used the first scan after transition from Edit to Run mode without initialization. Cannot be changed online.
Figure 8. Keywords used in editor Description field.
Library Command Summary
The following table is intended as a quick guide to library management. For detailed information on how to work with libraries, see the Control Builder online help and to the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
Table 3. Library command summary.
Action Command/Procedure
Connect library to project
In Project Explorer, right-click the
Libraries/Hardware folder and select
Insert Library
Connect library to application, library or controller
In Project Explorer, right-click intended
Connected Libraries folder and select
Connect Library
Comment
The library must have been inserted to the project.
34 3BSE041488R101
Section 2 Libraries Library Command Summary
Table 3. Library command summary.
Action
Make spare copy of self-defined library
(in Libraries folder)
Command/Procedure Comment
In Project Explorer, right-click the library and select Make Spare Copy.
It is only possible to have one spare copy of each self-defined library.
Save copy of selfdefined library (in
Libraries folder)
In Project Explorer, right-click the library and select Save Copy As...
The self-defined library is saved in a file with a new name and a new directory with its source contents.
Change library state In Project Explorer, right-click the library and select Properties > State, then set the new state
If the state is Released, it is only possible changing to state Open.
In this case the index revision number is increased with one.
Make sure that a spare copy of the self-defined library (in
Libraries folder) is saved on local disc before changing to status
Release.
Set protection for library
In Project Explorer, right-click the library and select Properties > Protection, then enter a password
If the library already is password protected, you must enter the old password before changing it.
Disconnect library from library, application or controller
Remove library
In Project Explorer, go to the Connected
Libraries folder, select the library and press Delete
If there are objects that use types from this library, a warning dialog is shown
In Project Explorer, go to the Libraries folder, select the library and press
Delete
If there are applications or libraries that depend on this library, a warning dialog is shown
3BSE041488R101 35
36
Library Command Summary Section 2 Libraries
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries
Introduction
• This section describes the standard AC 800M libraries, that is, the AC 800M libraries that are installed with Compact Control Builder.This part of the section, the Introduction, describes the different types in the standard libraries, including ready-made types, templates, and types intended to be used as building-stones in complex solutions.
•
Library Overview on page 42 gives an overview of all standard libraries, with a
short description of each.
•
Hardware Overview on page 47 gives an overview of all libraries with
hardware types.
•
Templates on page 51 describes the template concept, and how to use template
objects and libraries to create re-usable and flexible solutions.
The library concept and how to build and manage a library structure for your organization is described in
.
Ready-Made Objects, Templates and Building Stones
Standard AC 800M libraries contain:
• Ready-made objects that simply have to be connected to your environment to work. Typical examples are the simple control loops in the Control libraries, and some of the motor and valve objects in the Process Object libraries. See
Standard Library Types on page 39.
3BSE041488R101 37
38
Ready-Made Objects, Templates and Building Stones Section 3 Standard Libraries
• Objects that should be seen as templates. These template types are not protected and they can therefore be copied to your application, or to your own, self-defined library. They can then be modified to fit your specific requirements.
In a template type, there are core functions that are protected. These core functions cannot be changed (with the exception of parameter connections), but you can add other functions, both by using other types from the standard libraries, and by adding code.
Typical template objects are the objects in Control loop solution library. Other objects are Uni and Bi process objects in the Process Object Extended library, which can be used to build process control objects for any uni- or bi-directional
object. See Group Start Library on page 44 and Control Libraries on page 44.
• Low-level objects that can be seen as building stones to be used for building more high-level, complex solutions. These objects can be used to add functions to an existing template, or to build a complex solution from scratch.
Typical building stones are types for signal handling, which can be added to the output and input of, for example, control loops. See
Solutions With Types on page 27.
If the standard libraries do not contain any type that fits one of your specific requirements, you have two options:
• You can build your own type, based on objects from the standard libraries. If the type is application-specific, you can define it directly in the application.
However, if it is likely that you in the future will want to use it in other applications as well, then you should create a library and store your type solution in this library. Then, all you have to do to use the type in another application is connect the library to that particular application.
Say that you discover that you want to use a type in another application, but you have defined it in an application only. Then you should simply create a library and copy the type to this library (you can, of course, also copy it to one of your existing libraries). Then you can connect the library to all applications where you want to use the type and make sure that all instances refer to the library type. You can then delete the original type definition from your application.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Standard Library Types
• You can build your own type from scratch. This is not recommended, but might be necessary if you have a process with very specific requirements. In this case, it is strongly recommended that you store your types in a self-defined library.
Standard Library Types
When using ready-made types from the standard libraries, there are a number of things that you should know:
• When connecting parameters, the minimum requirement is that you connect the parameters that do not have default values.
• Information on individual parameters is given in the description field of the connection editor.
• For more complex types, there is often additional parameter information in the corresponding online help file. Select the type and press F1 to display online help for a certain type.
• There is information for most ready-made types, both in manuals and in online help, see below.
Where to Find Information About Standard Library Types
For details on concepts, design and configuration for a specific type, there are several sources:
• How to use types from the Alarm and Event library and the Communication libraries is described in the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and
Configuration.
• The Basic library and system firmware functions are also described in Basic
Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
3BSE041488R101 39
40
Common Properties Section 3 Standard Libraries
• The other standard libraries are all described in this manual:
–
For information on the Control libraries and the Signal library, see Section
.
–
For information on the Process Object libraries, see Section 5, Binary
.
–
For information on the Group Start Library, see Section 6, Synchronized
– For information on the Signal and Vote Loop Concept, see
• All libraries have a corresponding help file. Each object has context-sensitive help, which is accessed by selecting a type and pressing F1.
• It is also possible to generate project documentation for a library. In project
Explorer, select the library and select File > Documentation. This will provide you with an MS Word file, containing short descriptions of all objects in the library, including a list of all parameter descriptions.
For more information on how to generate project documentation, see online help and the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
Common Properties
InteractionPar
Most function block types and control module types having an interaction window also have a parameter, called InteractionPar. This parameter is a structured data type with components where some of them have the attribute coldretain.
Things that can be done in interaction windows/faceplates can also be done via the
InteractionPar parameter from the surrounding application code. However, if no such code is implemented you should not connect the InteractionPar parameter (in the connection editor), just leave the connection field empty. The reason is to ensure that the InteractionPar is only controlled by the faceplate.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Common Properties
Consider InteractionPar as an option for connecting a local variable that can, from the application code, reach any of the components inside the InteractionPar parameter. But remember, connecting the InteractionPar to your code, means that you also take over the responsibility of handling coldretain values etc.
The main purpose of InteractionPar parameter is to manipulate values from graphics
(interaction windows and faceplates) only, thus not from code. Calling the
InteractionPar (in code) will override any inputs given by the operator. The
InteractionPar should be controlled by graphics, and only in exceptional cases from code.
ParError
ParError is a function that performs diagnostic tests inside an object in run-time mode. It is only SIL marked objects that can contain ParError. You recognize if an object contains ParError, by the output parameter ParError.
The function returns a Boolean output value if a user writes an 'out of range' value via the objects faceplate(s). For example, severity and class for alarms are wrong, or a high level input value is lower than the low level value in a level monitor module, etc. These are two common examples but basically it could test all kinds of input values.
The general idea of ParError is to provide you with a possibility to anticipate certain actions and handle them from your code. One drastic action may be to call the Error handler function and perform a controller shut-down.
However, ParError requires a lot of CPU load each time the diagnostics are executed. For that reason, all objects that contain ParError also have an input parameter EnableParError which is set to false by default. The input parameter guarantees that ParError will not be executing in non-SIL applications unless you want to (change the input parameter EnableParError to true).
3BSE041488R101 41
42
Library Overview Section 3 Standard Libraries
Library Overview
This part describes each standard library briefly. For a list of all types in a library and a short description of each type, see the
Appendix B, Library Objects Overview
.
In addition to the standard libraries, there are also firmware functions that can be used in your applications. You find these in the System folder in Project Explorer.
For a complete list of the system functions, please refer to Control Builder online help.
Basic Library
The Basic library (BasicLib) contains basic objects such as converters, counters, timers, pulse generators and edge detectors. This library is described in more detail in the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
Icon Library
The Basic library is automatically added to all control projects, via the control project template.
The Icon Library (IconLib) contains icons that are used in Control Builder graphics in most other libraries.
The Icon library is automatically added to all control projects, via the control project template.
Alarm and Event Library
The Alarm and Event library (AlarmEventLib) contains function block and control module types for setting up alarm and event handling for objects that do not have built-in handling of alarms and events. This library is described in more detail in the manual Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Signal Library
Signal Library
The Signal library (SignalLib) contains types for adding supervision, alarm handling and error handling to I/O signals. SignalLib also contains types to define different rules that make it possible to control the process to predetermined states
(vote objects). Types from this library can be used together with both binary and analog control applications.
Process Object Libraries
The Process Object libraries contain function block types and control module types for controlling motors, valves, ABB Drives and Insum Devices. Most types in these libraries are templates, that is, you can copy them to your own libraries and applications and modify them to fit your particular process (see
51). Only Core objects are protected. There are a number of Process Object
libraries:
•
Process Object Basic Library (ProcessObjBasicLib)
The Process Object Basic library contains the basic Core types that form a basis for valve and motor control objects in other Process Object libraries. It also contains two simple types with reduced functionality and lower memory consumption.
•
Process Object Extended Library (ProcessObjExtLib)
The Process Object Extended library contains a number of function block and control module types for general-purpose uni- and bi-directional control, and a number of types for valve and motor control. The types in this library can be copied to your own libraries and be used as templates.
•
Process Object Drive Library (ProcessObjDriveLib)
The Process Object Drive library contains types for building ABB Drives control and supervision.
•
Process Object INSUM Library (ProcessObjInsumLib)
The Process Object INSUM library contains types for building INSUM control and supervision.
3BSE041488R101 43
Group Start Library Section 3 Standard Libraries
Group Start Library
The Group Start Library (GroupStartLib) contains control module types used to control and supervise the start and stop of process objects.
Control Libraries
The Control libraries contain types and ready-made solutions for analog control.
See
Section 4, Analog Process Control
. There are a number of Control libraries:
•
Control Simple Library (ControlSimpleLib)
The Control Simple library contains a number of types that are intended to be used for building simple control loops.
•
Control Basic Library (ControlBasicLib)
The Control Basic library contains function block types that are ready-made
PID loops. The only thing you have to do with those function blocks is to connect them to your I/O variables.
•
Control Standard Library (ControlStandardLib)
The Control Standard library contains control module types for building control loops, both stand-alone loops and cascade loops using master and slave configurations. They can be used together with types from other Control libraries, as well as together with objects from other libraries.
• Control Extended Library (ControlExtendedLib)
The Control Extended library contains a number of control modules for arithmetics and signal handling. These types are intended to be used for building advanced control loops, together with objects from other Control libraries.
• Control Advanced Library (ControlAdvancedLib)
The Control Advanced library contains control module types intended to be used to build continuous control loops with advanced PID functions and decouple filter functions. The types from this library supports adaptive control and can be used to build dead-time control loops.
•
Control Object Library (ControlObjectLib)
The ControlObjectLib provides function blocks and control modules to define templates for using the control connection data type.
44 3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Communication Libraries
•
Control Solution Library (ControlSolutionLib)
The Control Solution library contains a number of ready-to-use control templates, for example handling cascade, feed-forward, mid-range etc. These templates are intended to be used directly in an application, as they are, but may also be copied to a self-defined library and modified, to comply an intended usage.
•
Control Fuzzy Library (ControlFuzzyLib)
The Control Fuzzy library contains types intended to be used for building fuzzy control solutions. It also contains a number of fuzzy control templates that you can copy to your own libraries, modify and use.
•
Control Support Library (ControlSupportLib)
The Control Support library is an internal library that stores types used by other
Control libraries. When the Control Support library is needed, it is automatically connected, that is, you do not have to connect it by hand.
For a description of how to build analog control solutions from the types in these
libraries (and from other types), see Section 4, Analog Process Control .
Communication Libraries
The communication libraries contain function block types for reading and writing variables from one system to another. Typical communication function block types are named using the protocol name and function, for example, COMLIRead or
INSUMConnect.
Communication is described in more detail in the manual Basic Control
Software, Introduction and Configuration.
All supported protocols are described in the manual Communication, Protocols
and Design (3BSE035982Rxxxx).
3BSE041488R101 45
46
Batch Library Section 3 Standard Libraries
There are a number of Communication libraries:
• COMLI Communication Library (COMLICommLib),
• Foundation FIELDBUS H1 Communication Library (FFH1CommLib),
• INSUM Communication Library (INSUMCommLib),
• MB300 Communication Library (MB300CommLib),
• MMS Communication Library (MMSCommLib),
• ModBus Communication Library (ModBusCommLib),
• Modem Communication Library (ModemCommLib),
• Siemens S3964 Communication Library (S3964CommLib),
• SattBus Communication Library (SattBusCommLib),
• Serial Communication Library (SerialCommLib).
Batch Library
The Batch library (BatchLib) contains control module types for batch control and for control of other discontinuous processes. It can be used together with any batch system which communicates via OPC Data Access and which supports the S88 state model for procedural elements.
The control module types in the Batch library are used for the interaction between the control application for an Equipment Procedure Element (for example, a phase or an operation) and the Batch Manager.
This library is described in more detail in Control Builder online help (select the library in Project Explorer and press F1).
The BatchAdvTemplatesLib contains functionality for Batch Handling using batch advanced control modules. Templates for these control module types are provided in this library.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Hardware Overview
Hardware Overview
This part describes each standard library with hardware types briefly. For a list of all hardware types in a library and a description of each type, see Control Builder online help.
Hardware libraries that contain Profibus CI851 or Foundation Fieldbus CI852 are merely for updating reasons, hence they should not be used in new projects.
Basic Hardware
The Basic Hardware Library (BasicHWLib) contains basic hardware types such as controller hardware (for example AC 800M), CPU units, Ethernet communication links, Com ports, ModuleBus etc.
The Basic hardware library is automatically inserted to all control projects and automatically connected to the controller, via the control project template.
PROFIBUS
The PROFIBUS hardware libraries contain PROFIBUS DP communication interfaces for the AC 800M.
• The CI851 PROFIBUS hardware library (CI851PROFIBUSHWLib) contains the communication interface for PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• The CI854 PROFIBUS hardware library (CI854PROFIBUSHwLib) contains the communication interface for PROFIBUS DP, with redundant PROFIBUS lines and DP-V1 communication.
PROFIBUS Devices
The PROFIBUS device libraries contain hardware types that can be used to configure ABB Drive hardware and ABB Process Panels.
• The ABB Drive NPBA CI851 hardware library (ABBDrvNpbaCI851HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Drive NPBA-12, using PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• The ABB Drive NPBA CI854 hardware library (ABBDrvNpbaCI854HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Drive NPBA-12, using PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
3BSE041488R101 47
Master Bus 300 Section 3 Standard Libraries
Master Bus 300
The CI855 Master Bus 300 hardware library (CI855MB300HwLib) contains the communication interface (CI855) for and other hardware types to be used when configuring Master Bus 300.
INSUM
The CI857 INSUM hardware library (CI857InsumHwLib) contains the communication interface (CI857) and other hardware types to be used when configuring INSUM.
DriveBus
• The ABB Drive RPBA CI851 hardware library (ABBDrvRpbaCI851HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Drive RPBA-01, using PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• The ABB Drive RPBA CI854 hardware library (ABBDrvRpbaCI854HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Drive RPBA-01, using PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
• The ABB Process Panel CI851 hardware library (ABBProcPnlCI851HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Process Panel, using PROFIBUS DP -V0 (CI851).
• The ABB Process Panel CI854 hardware library (ABBProcPnlCI854HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Process Panel, using PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
• The ABB Panel 800 CI851 hardware library (ABBPnl800CI851HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Panel 800, using
PROFIBUS DP -V0 (CI851).
• The ABB Panel 800 CI854 hardware library (ABBPnl800CI851HwLib) contains hardware types to be used when configuring ABB Panel 800, using
PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
The CI858 DriveBus hardware library (CI858DriveBusHwLib) contains the communication interface (CI858) and other hardware types to be used when configuring DriveBus.
48 3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries S200 I/O System
S100 I/O System
The CI856 S100 hardware library (CI856S100HwLib) contains the S100 communication interface (CI856), S100 Rack and S100 I/O units.
S200 I/O System
The S200 I/O libraries contain S200 adapter and S200 I/O units.
• S200 CI851 hardware library (S200CI851HwLib) contains S200 slave and I/O units for PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• S200 CI854 hardware library (S200CI854HwLib) contains S200 slave and I/O units for PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
Satt Rack I/O System
• CI865 Satt ControlNet hardware library (CI865SattIOHwLib) contain the
S800 I/O System
Satt ControlNet, Satt Rack IO and 200RACN.
communication interface (CI865), S200 adapters, S200 units for
The S800 I/O libraries contain S800 adapters and S800 I/O units.
• The S800 I/O Modulebus hardware library (S800ModulebusHwLib) contains the S800 I/O units for ModuleBus.
• The S800 CI830 CI851 hardware library (S800CI830CI851HwLib) contains the adapter (CI830) and S800 I/O units for PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• The S800 CI830 CI854 hardware library (S800CI830CI854HwLib) contains the adapter (CI830) and S800 I/O units for PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
• The S800 CI840 CI854 hardware library (S800CI840CI854HwLib) contains the adapter (CI840) and S800 I/O units for PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
• The S800 CI801 CI854 hardware library (S800CI801CI854HwLib) contains the adapter (CI801) and S800 I/O units for PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
3BSE041488R101 49
50
Serial Communication Section 3 Standard Libraries
S900 I/O System
The S900 I/O libraries contain field communication interfaces, adapters and S900
I/O units.
• The S900 CI851 hardware library (S900CI851HwLib) contains PROFIBUS
DP fieldbus communication interface, adapter and S900 I/O units for
PROFIBUS DP-V0 (CI851).
• The S900 CI854 hardware library (S900CI854HwLib) contains PROFIBUS
DP fieldbus communication interface, adapter and S900 I/O units for
PROFIBUS DP (CI854).
Serial Communication
The Serial Communication libraries contain a hardware types for serial communication.
• The CI853 Serial Communication hardware library (CI853SerialComHWLib) contains the communication interface for RS-232C serial.
• The Serial hardware library (SerialHWLib) contain the serial communication protocol for SerialLib.
• The COMLI hardware library (COMLIHWLib) contain the serial communication protocol for COMLI.
• The ModBus hardware library (ModBusHWLib) contain the serial communication protocol for ModBus.
• The S3964 hardware library (S3964HWLib) contain the serial communication protocol for Siemens 3964R.
Printer and Modem
The Printer hardware library (PrinterHwLib) and Modem hardware library
(ModemHwLib) contain the printer and modem protocol respectively.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1
The CI852 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 hardware library (CI852FFh1HwLib) contain the communication interface for the FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 bus
(CI852) and FF Devices.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Templates
Templates
A template is characterized by the fact that it is not protected. It is intended to be copied to one of your own libraries, and modified inside that library. For an example
The moment you copy a type to your own library, the connection to the original template type is lost. This means that your copy does not reflect updates to the template.
However, a template type often consists of a number of objects from the standard libraries. Some of those might be protected (or even hidden), while some of them can be modified to suit the requirements of a particular organization, plant, or process. This also means that sometimes standard libraries still have to be connected to your library, due to the fact that they contain sub-types used inside the template type you copied. See
For information on the execution of objects based on template types and copies of template types, see
Execution of Copied Complex Types on page 55.
To help you understand how this works, we will study a typical template type, the
Uni function block from the Process Object Extended library.
Based on the type
GroupStartObjectConn in the Basic library
Figure 9. Uni function block type, with sub types and formal instances.
3BSE041488R101 51
Templates Section 3 Standard Libraries
The Uni function block type contains the following objects (formal instances):
• GSC (based on the type GroupStartObjectConn from the Basic library),
• Faceplate (based on the type FacePlateUni from the Process Object Extended library),
• InfoPar (based on the type InfoParUni, from the Process Object Basic library),
• InfoParGroupStart (based on the type InfoParUniGroupStart, from the Process
Object Basic library),
• Pres (based on the type GroupStartIconUni),
• OEText (based on the type OETextUni from the Process Object Extended library)
• Core (based on the UniCore type from the Process Object Basic library),
• ObjectAE (based on the type ProcessObjectAE).
This means that the Uni type depends on the Basic library, the Process Object Basic library, and Process Object Extended library.
If we create our own library, TemplateLib, and copy the Uni function block type to this library, with the intention of modifying the Uni template into a uni-directional type that fits our process, it will look like
. The new function block type has been named TemplateUni
52
Figure 10. Uni, copied into a self-defined library TemplateLib. No connections to other libraries (red triangles on a number of types).
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Templates
The red error triangles on the type and sub types come from the fact that our new library, TemplateLib, is not connected to the libraries that contain some of the sub types.
If we connect those libraries to our new library, everything will be ok.We have now created a copy of Uni, which we can modify to fit our specific requirements. For an
example of how to add functions to a type, see Add Functions to Self-defined Types on page 259.
Once we are done adding to and modifying our type, we can use it in an application,
see Figure 11 . All we need to do to be able to use our new type in the application is
to connect TemplateLib to the application and create an instance (TestUni) from the
TemplateUni type.
Figure 11. TemplateUni used in an application.
Note that there is no need to connect the libraries that are connected to
TemplateLib (the reference from instances to types is there anyway). The only time this would be necessary is when a library contains a type that is used for a parameter connection to the surrounding code or to another object outside our type.
3BSE041488R101 53
54
Templates Section 3 Standard Libraries
Type A3 is copied to
User Library X, where it becomes type X2
Note that all sub types (the formal instances) retain a relation to their corresponding types. For example, a change to the OETextUni type in the Process Object Basic library will also affect the TemplateUni type, since this type contains an instance of
OETextUni.
Library A
Copy
Type A1
Type A2
Type A3
A31 (based on B1)
A32(based on B2)
A33 (based on C2)
User Library X
Type X1
Type X2
X31 (based on B1)
X32(based on B2)
X33 (based on C2)
Library B
Library C
Library B
Library C
1.User Library X will still depend on Library B and Library C, since X31 and X32 are instances of B1and B2, and X33 is an instance of C2.
2.User Library X will not depend upon Library A. Changes to A3 will not affect X2.
Figure 12. Overview of the template concept.
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Execution of Copied Complex Types
Execution of Copied Complex Types
It is important to understand what happens when you copy and modify a type that contains instances of other types (formal instances). We start with a template type from one of the standard libraries, as shown in
Code
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
Template type T1
A B C
Formal instances
Types corresponding to the
T1A T1B T1C
Figure 13. Template type with formal instances.
Each formal instance has a corresponding type. These types are normally stored in the same library as the template object, or in a connected library (of the Basic or
Support type).
formal instances
3BSE041488R101 55
56
Execution of Copied Complex Types Section 3 Standard Libraries
Call
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A
Call
T1A
B C
T1B
Call
T1C
Call
Template type T1
Instance InstT1
Figure 14. Execution of an instance of a template type with formal instances.
When an object (a formal instance) is created from this type and the formal instance is executed, what happens is the following, see
:
1.
The object (InstT1) calls the type (T1).
2.
When the type T1 is called, the code executes and calls are made to all types
(T1A, T1B and T1C) corresponding to the formal instances (A, B and C).
3.
Each type that is called (T1, T1A, T1B, T1C) executes, operating on data from the corresponding object (T1) and formal instances (T1A, T1B, T1C).
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Execution of Copied Complex Types
Code
A very interesting question is how this relation is affected by creating a copy of a
Complex template type? Also, what happens if we modify a copied type and change it by adding code or by replacing one of the formal instances?
First, we create a new type (MyT1) by copying the template type (T1), see
Template type T1
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A B C
Formal instances
Code
T1A T1B T1C
Types corresponding to the formal instances
Make a copy of T1 and name it MyT1
Template type MyT1
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A B C
Formal instances
T1A T1B T1C
Types corresponding to the formal instances
Figure 15. Copying a template type with formal instances.
When an object based on MyT1 is executed, the call is to MyT1, and not to the type
T1. However, each formal instance retains its connection to their corresponding
type. The call to MyT1 will also generate calls to T1A, T1B and T1C, see Figure 16
.
3BSE041488R101 57
58
Execution of Copied Complex Types Section 3 Standard Libraries
Call
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A
Call
T1A
B C
T1B
Call
T1C
Call
Type MyT1
Instance InstMyT1
Figure 16. Execution of an object based on a template type copy.
The purpose of copying a template type is to modify this type to fit your specific requirements. Say, for example, that we need an object that works differently from one of the formal instances. We might, for example, want to replace a valve with a valve of a different type than the original one.
If T1B is the original valve type, we simply replace it with the new valve type V2B, and connect the new type to the MyT1 type, see
3BSE041488R101
Section 3 Standard Libraries Execution of Copied Complex Types
Code
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A B C
Type MyT1
Formal instances
T1A V2B T1C
Types corresponding to the formal instances
Figure 17. Copy of template type with formal instances, modified by replacing one of the formal instances (circled in the figure).
It is of course also possible not only to replace formal instances, but also to modify your copied type by adding or removing formal instances, and by adding to the code or changing it.
When an object based on this type is executed, what happens is the following, see
1.
The object (InstMyT1) calls the type (MyT1).
2.
When the type MyT1 is called, the code executes and calls are made to all types
(T1A, V2B and T1C) corresponding to the formal instances (A, B and C).
3.
Each type that is called (T1, T1A, V2B, T1C) executes, operating on data from the corresponding instance.
3BSE041488R101 59
60
Execution of Copied Complex Types Section 3 Standard Libraries
Call
If Condition Then a:=a+1
.....
A
Call
T1A
B C
V2B
Call
T1C
Call
Type MyT1
Instance InstMyT1
Figure 18. Execution of an instance of a modified template type copy.
It is very important to understand how this works. A brief summary:
• When a copy is made of a template type, the connection to the original template type is lost.
• However, all formal instances keep their connection to their corresponding types.
• Modifications to a copy do not affect the original type.
• Modifications to the template type do not affect the copy.
• Modifications to formal instances (that is, to their corresponding types), always affect both the original template types and its copies (as long as that particular formal instance is still used in the copy).
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control
Introduction
This section describes how to use types from the Control libraries to create analog control solutions for your automation system. The section contains:
•
A description of the concept behind the Control libraries, see Concept on page
• Advice and instructions on how to implement analog control solutions using
the types in the Control libraries, see Design on page 93.
• Examples on how to implement analog control solutions using the types in the
Control libraries, see
Getting Started with ControlConnection on page 107.
• Detailed information on individual library types for signal handling, see
Advanced Functions on page 124.
For a discussion on the difference between function blocks and control modules, and how to choose between the two, see the manual Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Configuration .
Throughout this section, the word “controller” refers to a type used in control loops, for example, a PID controller.
3BSE041488R101 61
62
Concept Section 4 Analog Process Control
Concept
The Control libraries contain a number of function blocks and control modules that are designed to help you construct complex signal systems and control loops with high functionality and flexibility. Some of them can be used as is, while some of them have to be combined to suit a specific application.
The Control libraries contain the PID controllers and analog signal handling functions you need to handle analog signals and to construct control loops, both simple control loops, including cascade control loops, and very advanced ones.
This section describes the concept behind the Control libraries, split on the following sub-sections.
•
Control Libraries Overview on page 62 gives an overview of all Control
libraries.
•
Functions and Other Libraries Used for Analog Control on page 65 is a
summary of AC 800M firmware functions and functions from other libraries that can be used in connection with analog control. Here, you will find references to other parts of the manual that describe individual function and objects.
•
ControlConnection on page 65 describes the ControlConnection structured
data type, which is used to simplify communication between different control objects and their environment.
Control Libraries Overview
The Control libraries for AC 800M are standard libraries that are installed with the
Compact Control Builder. There are a number of Control libraries:
• Control Basic library,
• Control Simple library,
• Control Standard library,
• Control Extended library,
• Control Advanced library,
• Control Object library,
• Control Solution library,
• Control Fuzzy library.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Control Libraries Overview
For a short description of each of these libraries, see the following sub-sections.
The Control libraries are also supported by a number of firmware functions that are included in AC 800M firmware and in other libraries. For information on those, see
Functions and Other Libraries Used for Analog Control on page 65.
Control Basic Library
The Control Basic library contains function blocks for a number of ready-made complete control loops, simple as well as cascade, to be connected directly to I/O.
Control Simple Library
The Control Simple library contains function block types that can be used to build control loops using function blocks only. These have to be connected by the user, for forward and backward signal directions.
Control Standard Library
The Control Standard library has control module types for:
• a standard PID controller
• I/O signals
• signal conversion
• manual control
• branches, as well as supervision of levels, selections, and limitations.
Control Extended Library
The Control Extended library has control modules types for arithmetics and signal handling. Together with the Control Standard library control modules, it is possible to construct control loops with more control functions, for example, PID loops.
3BSE041488R101 63
64
Control Libraries Overview Section 4 Analog Process Control
Control Advanced Library
The Control Advanced library has a control module type for an advanced PID controller, containing all the functionality of the PID controllers in the other control libraries and decouple filter functions. In addition, the controller may be configured for continuous adaptation of controller parameters. It may also be configured as a predictive PI, that is a PPI controller, and it has a gain scheduler. There is also control modules for adding a stiction compensator function and decouple filter to an output signal.
Control Object Library
The ControlObjectLib provides function blocks and control modules to define templates for using the control connection data type. The library contains advanced multiple inputs/outputs with up to 4 inputs and outputs created as control module templates. These templates also provide manual override and bumpless transfer.
Control Solution Library
The Control Solution library (ControlSolutionLib) contains control module types for a number of ready-made complete control loop solutions. A control module solution provides a complete loop control solution with control, signal monitoring, alarm handling, cascade, feed-forward, mid-range, trending, operator graphics and also a possibility to add asset optimization functionality.
Control Fuzzy Library
The Control Fuzzy library contains control module types for definitions of fuzzy logic rules for process control, and for constructing multi-variable fuzzy controllers which are able to handle many inputs and outputs. The fuzzy controller also has the additional functions of a PID controller.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Functions and Other Libraries Used for Analog Control
Functions and Other Libraries Used for Analog Control
Functions that can be used in connection with types from the Control libraries can be found in the Compact Control Builder (AC 800M firmware functions), as well as in the Basic library (counters, timers, latches) and in the Signal library.
For more information on system functions and basic functions in other libraries, see the Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration and online help.
This manual also discusses how to use types from the Alarm and Event library to set up additional alarm and event handling, and how to set up control network communication using types from the Communication libraries.
Functions and library types that are not included in the Control libraries, but can be used for signal handling in connection with control loops, are described under
Advanced Functions on page 124.
ControlConnection
ControlConnection is a data structure which contains all signals that are sent between the objects of a signal system or control loop. Some of the signals are sent in the forward direction of the loop and some are sent backwards, such as value, status and range. The complexity of the signal systems and control loops can then be reduced considerably for the signals between the objects.
Introduction
Data is generated by a source, computed in one or several objects, and finally forwarded to a consumer of data. This is the most common kind of data flow. If each object is to operate independently, and be able to connect with the other objects, a number of conditions must be fulfilled.
Learn how to build your own control module types with ControlConnection in
Getting Started with ControlConnection
on page 107 and Creating a Control
Module with ControlConnection (CC template) on page 114.
Each object has to ask its succeeding object if it is ready to receive data and do whatever it is that the object does. The succeeding object must issue an acceptance when ready to receive data.
3BSE041488R101 65
ControlConnection Section 4 Analog Process Control
This means that the question must be computed, before it is possible to give the answer. This is achieved by using code sorting. To interconnect objects of this type, you have to use the type of parameters that simply carry data, irrespective of their direction. These type of parameters cannot have values of their own.
This is the basis for connections between the control modules in the control libraries, and the interconnecting data type called ControlConnection.
Source Handler Handler Consumer
Figure 19. The principle of the data flow between control modules.
Signal Flow between Control Modules
Simple and advanced control loops with various functions can be built from the control modules in the control libraries. A typical constellation is described in
. It consists of a number of input signal control modules, connected to calculation and controller modules, which are connected to an output signal control module.
There are two ways of sending information between control modules; via a graphical connection and via a parameter connection. Graphical connection is described in
Graphical Connection of Control Loops on page 69.
SP
PID
PID
AO
AI
Figure 20. Example of graphical connections between control modules making a control loop.
66 3BSE041488R101
.
Section 4 Analog Process Control ControlConnection
When connected to each other, the control modules have the following characteristics.
• Information is transferred between the modules, forward as well as backward in the control loop, during the same cycle of execution. This is used, for example, to achieve bumpless transfer upon a change from Manual to Auto mode, and to prevent integrator wind-up in the entire control loop.
• Signal flow without delay, in both directions, is obtained through automatic sorting of code blocks in the control modules.
• If a signal is not valid, for example < 4 mA, it is possible to consider this in succeeding control modules. Examples of this are transfer to Manual mode or setting a predetermined value on the output.
The chain of control modules in a control loop and/or during analog handling must start with a control module handling input signals, and the chain going to the right must end with a control module handling output signals.
A ControlConnection output from a control module must normally only be connected to one input in another succeeding control module.
A ControlConnection output from a control module must not be connected as a feedback to a previous control module in the chain, unless, in exceptional cases,
a State control module is connected in between. See Miscellaneous Objects on page 191.
3BSE041488R101 67
ControlConnection Section 4 Analog Process Control
When using non-graphical connections of ControlConnection parameters you must be careful not to connect one output to several inputs, except, for example, for a presentation signal of Level6Connection type, which must be parameter-connected from the Level6CC control module to several control modules. See section,
Miscellaneous Objects on page 191.
AI
Branch AO
Graphical connection
AI
MAX
AO
Figure 21. A chain of connected control modules for analog signal handling.
In the chain of connected control modules, as seen in
, the main signal flow is from left to right, as illustrated by the bold arrows in
. The main signal flow may have divergent and convergent branches. Thin vertical arrows represent operator interactions.
A
B
C
68
D
E F
Figure 22. The main signal flow between the control modules.
Information propagates during one scan, without any delay in the main signal flow.
For example, the effect of an event in control module A is perceived in control module F in the same scan.
The connected control modules are influenced by their surroundings, for example, the operator interface or the surrounding application program. The effect of such an influence propagates ,without delay in the main signal flow, to outside of the control module in which the influence occurs.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control ControlConnection
The effect of such an influence also propagates, without delay, in the opposite direction to the main signal flow, to outside of the control module in which the influence occurs. This is called backtracking (see
Backtracking on page 72). This
effect does not, however, influence the main signal flow until one scan later. For example, the effect of an influence, shown by the thin arrow on block E, propagates to F in the same scan. It also propagates to D, B and A in the same scan, but not to
C. In B, calculations are carried out on the effect before it is forwarded to A. In the next scan, the effect is used in the calculation of the main flow.
Graphical Connection of Control Loops
To create a control loop the control modules are connected to form chains by means of graphical connections from left to right, which is also the direction of the main signal flow.
Backtracking calculations are performed in all control modules in the control loop, when in Backtracking mode. The value may be transferred backward in the chain, if the chain before the backtracking-initiating control module has a member with an internal state able to collect the backtracked value. Information about the presence of such an internal state is given in the controlconnection.
A control module has an internal state when its output is determined not only by the input signal, but also by its history.
In control modules with an internal state, the output signal might be limited, for example, when a succeeding control module is in Backtracking mode or has reached a maximum or minimum value. Information on this situation is passed backwards in the control loop chain in the ControlConnection data structure. The preceding control module with an internal state then stops further increase or decrease of the signal value.
3BSE041488R101 69
70
ControlConnection Section 4 Analog Process Control
Control module in Backtracking mode or output maximum value reached
Control module with an internal state
Output increase omitted
Figure 23. Example of when a succeeding control module has reached a limit value; the preceding control module stops further integration (anti-windup).
ControlConnection Data Type
The control-loop-specific ControlConnection data type handles both forward and backward signal flow and contains information about, for example, the signal value, status, and unit, as well as the measuring range of the signal to prevent the signal from exceeding its limits (in any situation), see
.
Value & Status
Range & Unit
Value
Range & Unit
Backtracking information
Figure 24. A graphical connection of ControlConnection type with its main signal flow forward and a flow backward.
The Value component in the forward structure represents the main signal flow of the loop. The Status component contains information about the quality of the loop.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control ControlConnection
Ranges and Units
A control module limits its output signal to within the output range. When using graphical connection between control modules, signal ranges and units are generally calculated automatically, and sent forward, as well as backward, through the
ControlConnection structure data type. according to the following rules.
1.
Ranges and units from inputs and outputs propagate forward and backward in the control module chain until they reach a control module whose output range and unit can not be automatically defined using the input range. Such control modules may be a controller, an integrator, or a filter. More information may then be supplied by manual setting of range and unit for this control module output. If range and unit values are not entered, the default values 0–100% are used.
2.
If a control module receives overlapping ranges and units from the input and output directions, then the range and unit from the preceding control module are used.
AI
The AI and AO control modules start to transmit their ranges in the forward and the backward directions, respectively.
Some control modules simply allow the ranges to pass through. Other control modules calculate and suggest a range. The range can also be set by the operator.
PID
Control modules with an internal state receive the same output as the signal sent backward from the succeeding control module, unless a range and unit are entered manually.
The output range is visible in some control modules, such as PID controllers, and arithmetic modules etc., and may be changed. The range can be changed in the interaction window in Online or Test mode.
3BSE041488R101 71
72
ControlConnection Section 4 Analog Process Control
Backtracking
The behavior of a control module that has ControlConnection connections depends on which mode the succeeding control module in the chain is in. A control module in Backtracking mode when succeeding control modules indicate that they, for example, are in Manual mode. This means that integrator wind-up of a controller is prevented (see section,
Anti-Integrator Wind-Up Function on page 126) and that
bumpless transfer, for example, between Manual and Auto, is achieved (see
Bumpless Transfer on page 127).
In Control Builder, control modules are dimmed if backtracking is active.
Enter Range Value and its Unit of Measure
In control modules where it is possible to enter an output range value and its unit of measure in the interaction window, you can override the propagated or calculated default values of the range value and its unit of measure. Select and enter maximum and minimum values and their unit of measure of the output signal.
Fraction
In all interaction windows of control modules, which have a ControlConnection, you can set the fraction, which is a local variable in each control module for setting of the decimals shown in the interaction window(s).
When an I/O signal from, for example a PT100 transmitter, has a wider physical range than desired you can enter a narrower range in the AnalogInCC control module.
When signals go through a number of arithmetic calculation control modules the ranges can easily take large positive or negative values. Also, units of measure may become long compound words that are unabridged, for example in multiplications.
Therefore, it is important to set the range to acceptable values. Also, check that the unit of measure is correct and simplify it by abridgement. Do this in the last calculation control module before the signal goes to a control module that does not send range value and its unit of measure backward such as the controller, derivative, integral or piecewise linear control module types.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control ControlConnection
If a constant value, unchangeable in Online mode, is required in the calculations, use a RealToCC control module in which you set the maximum and minimum values equal to the in value given for the constant, in Offline mode.
Limitation of Controller Output
It may be necessary to limit the controller output to a narrower interval in Auto mode, for example, when you test new controller parameter settings. Limitation of the controller output then ensures that the process is not upset if the controller is poorly tuned.
Do this limitation from the parameter interaction window and the limits are only active in Auto mode. When you deselect the limitation, the limits are returned to the normal endpoints of the range. Bumpless transfer is ensured whenever the limits are changed.
ControlConnections between Applications
The module MMSToCC together with CCToMMS module must be used when transferring signals of ControlConnection between applications.
3BSE041488R101 73
Controller Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
Controller Types
This section describes controller principles and main controller functions. Advanced built-in functions and objects for signal handling are described under
A process may be of many types. The process may be rapid or slow, have dead time, involve non-linear process characteristics, have many different cases and/or conditions of operation, or depend on valve characteristics. The process may also involve viscous media, the process may be exothermic, or dependent on various calculations, etc.
The process requirements may also be to achieve a certain production quality.
Manual intervention must be carried out in a smooth, so-called bumpless way. In addition, there are information and communication demands on the operators and/or other systems regarding momentary values, alarms, data history in short and long perspectives, and the presentation of these in a clear way.
To fulfill all the process demands, many functions must be carried out by the controller. The solution may involve anything from a single controller to several controllers with internal relationships, for which the system has complete control modules and function blocks.
The core of the PID controllers in the control libraries is based on PID algorithms.
The only exception is the fuzzy controller, which has a design of its own. Additional functions are added by setting parameters, or by combining a controller with other control modules.
PID, PI, P, and PD Controllers
The basic, classical PID, PI, P, and PD controllers of ideal type are based on the control algorithms described in the section
Controller Algorithms on page 78. When
discussing these controllers as a group, the term PID controller is used.
Generally, with the aid of built-in functions, the system performs mode transfers and other changes in a bumpless way, see
Bumpless Transfer on page 127. An anti-
integrator (sometimes called reset) wind-up function is included, to prevent the output signal from drifting away, see
Anti-Integrator Wind-Up Function on page
In addition to controller algorithms and built-in functions, the standard libraries contain additional functions and types for creating almost any other controller type.
74 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Types
PPI Controller
If a process has long dead time in comparison with the process time constant, a predictive PI controller configuration, PPI (based on a simplified Otto Smith controller), can be used. The process dead-time delay is added, but the parameter values for P and I correspond to the same values as in a PI controller.
Fuzzy Controller
The fuzzy controller can handle one input and one output, as well as many inputs and many outputs. You may be able to use a fuzzy controller where PID control fails, or does not work well.
A fuzzy controller has most of the functions of a PID controller, together with the possibility of defining fuzzy logic rules for process control.
Functionality in PID Controllers
A survey of the following eight PID Controllers is presented in
.
1.
PidLoop
2.
PidLoop3P
(Function block)
(Function block)
3.
PidCascadeLoop
4.
PidCascadeLoop3P
(Function block)
(Function block)
5.
PidCC
6.
PidAdvancedCC
7.
PidSimpleReal
8.
PidSimpleCC
(Control module)
(Control module)
(Function block)
(Control module)
Table 4. Functionality in the PID Controllers
Included Function
Belongs to ControlSimpleLib
Belongs to ControlBasicLib
Belongs to ControlStandardLib
Belongs to ControlAdvancedLib
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No No No No No No Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
No No No No Yes No No No
No No No No No Yes No No
3BSE041488R101 75
Controller Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 4. Functionality in the PID Controllers (Continued)
Included Function
PID algorithm
Tunable Beta-factor
Backtracking
Setpoint Backtracking
Integrator wind-up prevention
Bumpless transfer
Tracking
Internal setpoint ramping
Offset Adjustment
Deviation alarm limits
Pv alarm limits
Limitation of output
Feedforward
P-start
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No Yes Yes No No
No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Predictive PI control
Autotuner relay
No No No No No Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Autotuner extension (step) No No No No No Yes No No
Autotuner structure and design selection No No No No Yes Yes No No
Oscillation detection
Sluggish control detection
Gain scheduler
Adaptive control
No No
No No
No No
No No
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Compensation for redundant I/O deviation on process value
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
76 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Basic Controller Principles
Basic Controller Principles
Basically, a controller has three signals, the setpoint signal (Sp), the process value signal (Pv) and the output signal. The P controller, PI controller, and PID controller are different types of analog controllers. The basic controller configuration is the P controller, where P stands for proportional.
Output
Process
Setpoint, Sp
PID controller
Process value, Pv
Figure 25. A control loop with the function block of a PID controller.
The most simple P controller may be described as follows. The controller compares the setpoint value with the process value and the difference is called the control deviation,
ε. This is amplified by G (the amplification or gain factor) and an offset signal is added to obtain a working point. See figure below. The result is the output signal.
P controller
Setpoint
Process value
+
-
ε
G = Gain factor
Adder
G *
ε
+
+
Offset
ε
= Setpoint – Process value
Output value = G *
ε
+ Offset
Figure 26. The basic P controller.
Output
3BSE041488R101 77
78
Controller Algorithms Section 4 Analog Process Control
In a PI controller, the offset is replaced by the Integral part (I part).
In a PID controller the Derivative part (D part), acting on the filtered process value, is also added to the output.
Controller Algorithms
The PID controller algorithms used are of ideal type. The controller input from the process Pv and the setpoint Sp are regularly read by the controller. A read is also called a sample, and the time between two samples is called the sampling time. The required output signal value is calculated, for each sample, by comparing samples of the input and setpoint values. The sample time is equal to the task cycle time of the current task. The process value may be filtered before it enters the derivative part of a control algorithm, by a first-order, low-pass filter. See the algorithms below, and
.
1.
The P controller has the following algorithm:
Out
=
G
× (
Sp Pv
)
Out
=
G
× (
+
Offset
2.
The PD controller has the following algorithm:
( ,
T fil
( )
+
T d
×
d t
( ) ) )
+
Offset
3.
The PI controller has the following algorithm:
Out
=
G
× ( (
β
S
)
+
⁄
i
×
∫
( )
dt
)
4.
The PID controller has the following algorithm:
Out
=
G
× ( (
β
S
)
+
i
×
∫
( )
dt
+
T d
×
d
( ,
T fil
) )
5.
The PPI controller has the following algorithm:
Out
=
G
× ( (
β
S
)
+
i
×
∫
(
i
×
∫
(
O
) )
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Algorithms
Abbreviations in the
Algorithms
Sp
Pv
G
Gain
OutRange
PvRange
β
T i
T d
T fil
FilterOf (x,y)
Out
Out(t-L)
Description
Setpoint
Process value
G is defined as:
G = Gain x (OutRange) / (PvRange)
The gain you enter in the interaction window or by code via the InteractionPar parameter.
Gain is normalized and dimensionless according to the above definition.
Thus the gain can be influenced by the settings of the ranges for the process and the output values.
The range (maximum – minimum) of the Out value
The range (maximum – minimum) of the Pv process value
Setpoint weight: 0 or 1
Integral time of the controller
Derivative time of the controller
Filter time of the low-pass filter for the derivative part
The expression x is sent through a low-pass filter.
The filter time is equal to y.
Output from the controller
Output value delayed by the dead time, L.
3BSE041488R101 79
80
Controller Algorithms Section 4 Analog Process Control
–
Pv
β∗
Sp
–
Pv
Filter G
G
d
×
d d t
(
T d
×
d d t
G
× (
β
×
Sp
–
Pv
)
Sp
–
Pv
G
i
×
∫
d t
Figure 27. The principle of an ideal PID controller.
× ⁄
i
×
∫
(
( ,
T fil
) )
Σ
Out
)
dt
β∗
Sp
–
Pv
G
Sp
–
Pv
G
i
×
∫
(
Sp Pv
)
Σ
Out(t - L)
Σ
Out
i
×
O
∫
(
i
×
∫
d t
G
× (
β
×
Sp
–
Pv
)
) )dt
Out(t)
–
1
Out(t)
Delay
Figure 28. The principle of a PPI controller.
Parameter values can be set or changed via the interaction window, or in the application. When the control deviation is within a dead zone, specified in the parameter window, the output is constant.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Algorithms
Offset Adjustment
The P and PD controller types do not have an integrator, but they have an offset instead. The offset is a tuning parameter of the controller and used to determine its working point. It is normally constant, but may be automatically adjusted if the offset adjustment function is enabled.
If offset adjustment in enabled the offset is automatically adjusted in some modes and also when the controller parameters, for example the gain or integration time, are changed. The adjustment of the offset is always done in such a way that the output of the controller becomes continuous.
Details on how the offset is adjusted are discussed in the section
Bumpless Transfer on page 127.
The offset adjustment function must be used with care! When offset is adjusted, the behavior of the controller changes. For example, the control deviation at a certain working point may change. This is, in many cases, not acceptable.
Internal Setpoint Backtracking
Internal setpoint backtracking adjusts the setpoint automatically, while in internal mode (provided that the function is enabled). The purpose is to make sure that the output of the controller is continuous at mode changes. In some cases, process value tracking is also achieved. See
Bumpless Transfer when Enabling or Disabling the
Limitation of the Output on page 130.
The adjustment is done the same way as in external mode, when a control module with backtracking capability is connected to the setpoint.
Reduced Effect of Setpoint Changes
For controllers with an integrator (PI, PID, PPI), the setpoint influence on the proportional term is governed by a setpoint weight, the beta
(β) factor, to make the output as smooth as possible. These controllers have two setpoint weight factors which are used when the setpoint is continuous or discontinuous, respectively. An abrupt, discontinuous change in the setpoint should not be allowed to have full effect on the output. The setpoint is considered to be discontinuous, for example, when the internal setpoint is selected and the operator enters a setpoint value manually, or when a preceding control module is in Manual mode.
3BSE041488R101 81
Controller Algorithms Section 4 Analog Process Control
The switching between the two setpoint weight factors is automatic, depending on whether the setpoint signal is continuous or discontinuous. The setpoint weight is in the discontinuous case by default 0 (zero). Otherwise, at continuous setpoint signals, the setpoint weight factor is by default 1 (one).
At normal usage, the controller provides the appropriate default value for the setpoint weight factors. However, in PidCC and PidAdvancedCC, these two parameters are editable. In some special cases, the user may tune the setpoint weight factor by editing these parameters to real values between the 0 and 1 limits. An example is when an externally calculated tuning is to be applied to the controller.
Internal Setpoint Ramping
Internal setpoint ramping smoothens setpoint changes for PidCC and
PidAdvancedCC. When activating this function, a target setpoint can be entered.
The ramping can be started and stopped, only if internal setpoint is selected. Once the ramping is started the setpoint will change smoothly to the targeted setpoint. The ramp increase and decrease rates can be set separately. The time to reach the target setpoint is displayed. When the target is reached, the ramping is deactivated and stopped.
The ordinary internal setpoint field can be disabled to prevent discontinuous setpoint changes. The user can then only enter setpoints as target setpoints.
If, in the meantime, the setpoint is switched to external setpoint, the ramping is stopped. The transfer to the external setpoint will be bumpless if the external setpoint is able to receive a backtracking value. The target setpoint is left unchanged. If the controller enters Backtracking mode, ramping is aborted, and backtracking starts instead.
Limitation of Controller Output
Generally, maximum and minimum values for the controller output signal are specified using the I/O connection editor. These values are the endpoints of the vertical axis in bar graph and trend curve windows for the signal. In Auto mode, the user can limit controller output to a narrower interval from the parameter window, as long as the limiting functions are enabled. An example of when it may be necessary to limit the output is when testing new controller settings.
82 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Hysteresis vs Dead Zone
The controller output may then be limited, to ensure that the process is not badly disrupted if the controller is poorly tuned. The output range may also be changed in the controller parameter window. This is usually done when there is no I/O connection editor.
Hysteresis vs Dead Zone
The concepts hysteresis and dead zone are explained as follows.
Hysteresis
To avoid frequent activations at a level, a hysteresis value can be set in some control modules, for example, when a signal is close to an alarm limit.
In
, activation is desired when a signal exceeds a high alarm level. The activated and the deactivated conditions are separated by the hysteresis below the high alarm level. Depending on the direction of the signal, the hysteresis is added to either the activated or deactivated condition.
The alarm is first deactivated and the signal increases to the high alarm level. The alarm is then activated. It remains activated until the signal falls below the hysteresis and is then deactivated. The next time the signal exceeds the high alarm level, the alarm is activated. For a low alarm level, the situation is the reverse with the hysteresis above it.
Figure 29. Activation is desired when a signal exceeds a high alarm level.
3BSE041488R101 83
84
Hysteresis vs Dead Zone Section 4 Analog Process Control
Dead Zone
To allow a signal a certain noise level without causing activation, a dead zone can be set around it in some control modules, for example, for a control deviation. A small fluctuation in the signal is then allowed. The signal is not active when it is within the dead zone. When the signal exceeds or falls below the dead zone limits the signal is active.
showing a dead zone on both sides of a desired signal value.
Figure 30. A dead zone on both sides of a desired signal value
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Fuzzy Control
Fuzzy Control
A fuzzy controller is based on fuzzy logic which is a generalization of the common
Boolean logic.
Figure 31. The fuzzy controller window.
A fuzzy controller consists of a linear part and a fuzzy logic part. The linear part has many of the functions of the PID controller, for example:
• Computation of the control deviation
ε = Setpoint – Process value and its derivative (even the second derivative),
• Computation of the derivative of the process value,
• A low-pass filter for derivative of the process value and the control deviation,
• Internal and external setpoint,
• Handling of absolute and relative alarms,
3BSE041488R101 85
86
Fuzzy Control Section 4 Analog Process Control
• An integrator with anti-integrator wind-up function,
• Manual and automatic output,
• Tracking function for the output,
• A feedforward function.
The fuzzy logic part of the controller contains the functions that define the rules for control of the process, for example:
• Computation of the degrees of membership of a number of signals to a number of fuzzy sets,
• Computation of fuzzy conditions,
• Computation of fuzzy rules,
• Computation of output membership functions for a number of controller outputs,
• Defuzzyfication of the output membership functions.
The fuzzy controller works as follows:
• One or more process values, and possibly also external setpoints, are entered into the linear part of the controller. The process values may be low-pass filtered. If no setpoint is used, the first derivative of each process value is computed. The result is made available to the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
• If setpoints are used, the control deviations,
ε = Setpoint – Process Value, and their two first derivatives are computed for each process value. These two results are also made available to the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Fuzzy Control
• The fuzzy logic part of the controller receives one or more signals from the linear part. It may receive the control deviation, the process value or their derivatives from the linear part. Each of these signals is entered into a number of input membership functions. The output from an input membership function is a signal, which assumes values between 0 and 1. This value indicates the degree of membership of the signal from the linear part to this particular membership function.
• The outputs from the input membership functions are combined into fuzzy conditions using the fuzzy operators NOT and AND. The fuzzy operator NOT is defined as NOT X = 1 – X. The fuzzy operator AND is defined as X AND Y
= Min(X,Y). The result has a value between 0 and 1.
• The fuzzy conditions may then be combined into fuzzy rules using the fuzzy operators NOT and OR. The fuzzy operator OR is defined as X OR Y =
Max(X,Y). The output from a fuzzy rule also has a value between 0 and 1 and is called the degree of satisfaction of the rule.
Figure 32. A fuzzy rule.
• The degree of satisfaction of each fuzzy rule is then used to compute the current output membership function for the rule.
• There may be a number of output membership functions associated with each output from the controller. All output membership functions associated with the same output from the controller are combined into one output membership function. This is done by computing the envelope (the maximum value of all the functions at every point) of all the membership functions.
3BSE041488R101 87
Fuzzy Control Section 4 Analog Process Control
• The resulting output membership function for a certain controller output is used to compute the value of the output. This is called defuzzyfication and is done by computing the center of gravity of the output membership function.
• The defuzzyfied outputs from the fuzzy logic part of the controller are then entered into the linear part of the controller.
• Each output may then be integrated and is limited by an anti-integrator wind-up function.
There are also functions for feedforward, output tracking and Manual mode.
The fuzzy controller also has a simulation facility. The values of the control deviation, the process value and their derivatives may be simulated. Simulation can be used to evaluate the behavior of the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
Relation to Other Libraries and Modules
The fuzzy controller is designed to operate together with the control library modules in the same way as the PID controller does. The fuzzy controller has, to a large extent, the same parameter interface as the PID controller. It should be connected to the other control modules in exactly the same way as the PID controller, i.e. using
ControlConnection data type connections.
88
Figure 33.
Typical configuration where a fuzzy controller is used as part of the control loop. A fuzzy controller operates as a master controller, the output of which is connected to the setpoint of a PidAdvancedCC.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control How to Use Fuzzy Controller Templates
How to Use Fuzzy Controller Templates
Introduction
Your copy of a template can be modified in the following ways: the number of inputs, outputs, membership functions, conditions and rules can be changed, and these items can be grouped in different ways.
The fuzzy control modules have one input and one output, but they can be configured for many inputs and many outputs.
Select the fuzzy control module which best suits your needs.
Step-by-Step Instructions for Using Templates
1.
Copy a fuzzy controller template from the library. Select a template (for example FuzzyController1CC).
2.
Paste the copied fuzzy controller in the Control Module Types in the applications folder.
3.
Rename it, for example, Own_FuzzyController1.
4.
Create a new empty control module called, for example, SM1 and take
Own_FuzzyController1 into use by the Create/Control Module command.
It is now possible to make changes to the fuzzy controller. You can change the number of inputs, outputs, membership functions, conditions or rules. These items can also be grouped in different ways.
The steps presented above describe how the user is able to make a new control module type in an application, but if the modified fuzzy controller is needed in many projects it is recommended that the user creates a module type in a new library which can then be included in many projects.
3BSE041488R101 89
Internal Data Flow of Fuzzy Controllers Section 4 Analog Process Control
Internal Data Flow of Fuzzy Controllers
The sub-modules in the fuzzy controller templates are connected as shown in the illustration below.
90
Figure 34. Sub-module connections in the fuzzy controller templates.
1.
The connection between FuzzySpPvIn and InputMembership: The
FuzzySpPvIn control module computes the control deviation EOut (Setpoint-
Process value) and its first and second derivatives. These signals are inputs to the InputMembership control modules. If a setpoint is not desired for some of the inputs FuzzyPvIn control modules are used instead of FuzzySpPvIn control modules.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Internal Data Flow of Fuzzy Controllers
2.
The connection between InputMembership and FuzzyCondition: The control module defines an input membership function for the fuzzy logic part of the controller. The output, DegreeOfMembership, should normally be connected to all FuzzyCondition control modules. If the InputMembership control module is not connected to a certain FuzzyCondition control module then the membership function can, of course, not be used in the corresponding condition.
3.
The connection between FuzzyCondition and FuzzyRule: The output parameter Condition of a number of FuzzyCondition control modules should be connected to the condition parameters of a number of FuzzyRule control modules. The fuzzy rules may then be defined from any of the connected fuzzy conditions.
4.
The connection between FuzzyRule and OutputMembership: The output parameter DegreeOfSatisfaction should be connected to the corresponding parameter of an OutputMembership control module.
5.
The connection between chained OutputMembership functions: The
OutputMembership control modules are connected in a chain. The chain must always end with a Defuzzyfication control module. The control modules of the chain are connected via the parameters InputCurve and OutputCurve.
6.
The connection between OutputMembership and Defuzzyfication: The
Defuzzyfication control module should appear as the last link in a chain of
OutputMembership control modules. The OutputMembership functions are connected to the chain via the parameter InputCurve.
7.
The connection between Defuzzyfication and FuzzyOut: The parameter Output should be connected to the Input of the FuzzyOut control module.
8.
The connection between FuzzyProgramControl and all the fuzzy logic part control modules: The Program control parameter should be connected to the corresponding parameter of all the InputMembership, FuzzyCondition,
FuzzyRule and OutputMembership control modules.
3BSE041488R101 91
92
Controller Modes Section 4 Analog Process Control
Controller Modes
A controller has a number of different working modes. The controller may be switched from one mode to another with a minimum of disturbance in the process.
The modes are listed in the table below with the lowest priority first.
Controller Mode Priority Function
Auto
Backtracking
Lowest Auto is the normal automatic control mode.
The controller output is connected to a control module chain in which at least one of the succeeding controllers is in Manual mode.
Tracking
Manual
In Auto mode, the controller output tracks a signal value from the application when the Track parameter is True, except in Manual mode, which has higher priority.
Upon changing from Auto mode to Tracking mode, or vice versa, the output is changed bumplessly, since it follows a ramp, limited by the maximum increase and decrease output ramp speed settings, until it reaches the track value.
The output signal can only be changed manually by a user in an interaction window, or via an application.
The Autotuner is started and active.
Tuning
(1)
Highest
(1) Not available in PidSimpleCC and PidSimpleReal.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Design
Design
Before using objects from the Control libraries, there are a number of choices that have to be made regarding which type of object to use for a specific purpose. The following information is designed to help you design reliable and effective analog control solutions:
•
General Design Issues on page 93 describes things to consider and choices to
be made before starting to create your analog control solutions.
For a more general discussion of design issues, see the manual Application
Programming, Introduction and Design.
•
Control Strategies on page 96 discusses what control strategy (what type of
control loop, etc.) to use for different types of processes.
•
Controller Library Types on page 99 contains an introduction to all controller
types in the Control libraries.
•
Industrial Controller Types on page 104 discusses how to build common
industrial controller applications, such as cascade controllers, using types from the Control libraries.
•
Signal Handling on page 107 gives an overview of where to find signal
handling information.
General Design Issues
Analog signal handling and building of control loop applications using objects such as system functions and function blocks will often result in high functionality and a high degree of flexibility.
However, it requires a good deal of knowledge of control loop design and of the function of the participating objects, to construct and maintain signal systems and control loops.
Function Blocks or Control Modules?
An important choice is whether to use function blocks or control modules. For an extensive discussion of this topic, see the manual Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Design.
3BSE041488R101 93
94
General Design Issues Section 4 Analog Process Control
More specifically, you have to consider the following questions:
1.
What is your general programming environment?
What has already been done?
What skills are required for present and future demands?
2.
What kind of applications are you going to make, now and in the future? Is it a.
signal handling b.
advanced or simple control loop applications c.
or a combination of these?
Table 5. Guide for choosing between function blocks and control modules.
Method
Function Blocks
Control modules for signal handling
Suitable for calculations and when the signal information forwards is sufficient. Low memory consumption.
Can be used when preceding and succeeding objects also are control modules.
in control loop applications
Suitable for control loops when the signal information forward is sufficient. Low memory consumption.
Functions best when signal information forward and backward is required.
3.
Which method is most suitable for designing a control loop?
Basically, there are four methods of designing a control loop by means of the available libraries containing control functions, control function blocks, and control modules:
– A ready-made control loop in function blocks,
– System functions and function blocks,
– Function blocks containing control modules,
– Control modules.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control General Design Issues
A good basic strategy would in many cases be:
• Start with system functions and function blocks.
• When you need more control functions in many small, isolated islands of program code, you can create function blocks that contain control modules solving the control functions. Such a local group of control modules is then executed in the function block, according to its isolated terms, and blocks out influences from other function blocks.
• If your control system grows, so that it has to be coordinated and the code must be co-sorted, then programming with control modules is recommended, for example, in the case of several distributed cascade controllers.
Control Modules and ControlConnection
In signal systems and control loops, a large amount of information is sent between different objects, both in the forward direction and backward. The main signal flow works well in normal operation. However, in exceptional situations ,there may be a need to handle, for example, the following situations.
• Integrator wind-up,
• Bumpless transfer,
• Signal quality,
• Signal measure ranges.
The complexity of such signal systems and control loops can be reduced considerably if the ControlConnection standard interface is used for signals between the objects, which then will have to be control modules. See
By means of control modules it is possible, in addition to a high functionality and flexibility, to achieve a simplicity of configuration, which makes the control loops easy to configure and maintain. The risk of making mistakes when configuring control loops is drastically reduced, which increases the reliability of the loop.
3BSE041488R101 95
96
Control Strategies Section 4 Analog Process Control
Control Strategies
When a process is to be controlled, one of the most important questions is to select a controller strategy. Control strategies can be classified into the following main groups:
• Processes with no or short dead time, see
Processes with No or Short Dead
• Processes with long dead time, see
Processes with Long Dead Time on page
• Processes that do not fit the above two descriptions, see
•
Rules of Thumb and Limitations on page 98 gives advice when using several
controllers.
Processes with No or Short Dead Time
A process with no or short dead time can be of a number of types, for which the strategy is slightly different:
•
Process with Constant Process Dynamics
For a process with constant process dynamics and short dead times, that can have constant parameters in the whole working range, which is one of the most common processes, the proper strategy is to select a PID controller. Simpler variants P, PI or PD may also be sufficient.
The process engineer’s trimming tool for PID controllers is the Autotuner, which suggests settings for the parameters of the controller.
•
Process with Changing but Predictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing but predictable process dynamics and short dead time that requires different parameters in different parts of the working range, the proper strategy is to use a PID controller with gain scheduling.
The Autotuner is used to tune the parameters in each working range.
•
Process with Changing but Unpredictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing but unpredictable process dynamics which vary slowly the proper strategy is to use an adaptive PID controller with or without gain scheduling.
The Autotuner is used to tune the initial parameters. See the section
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Control Strategies
Processes with Long Dead Time
A process with long dead time can be of a number of types, for which the strategy is slightly different:
•
Process with Constant Process Dynamics
For a process with constant process dynamics with long dead times you may select a predictive PI controller, called a PPI controller.
The PPI is started when configuring the PID controller and by selecting a maximum dead time. As a rule of thumb, a PPI controller is used when the dead time is longer than the dominating time constant in the process.
When running a PPI controller it is still possible to run Autotuner and gain scheduling.
•
Process with Changing but Predictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing but predictable process dynamics and long dead range, the proper strategy is to use a PPI controller with gain scheduling.
time, which requires different parameters in different parts of the working
Special Processes
In special processes with several input and output signals which may not be possible to control, or when the strategies above, have proved unsuccessful, you may try a fuzzy controller.
The fuzzy controller is based on fuzzy logic which is a generalization of the
common Boolean logic by something between true and false. See the section Fuzzy
3BSE041488R101 97
Remarks on the Design of Control Loops Section 4 Analog Process Control
Rules of Thumb and Limitations
If you plan to use several controllers for a process, you should consider how the number of controllers influences the choice of processor for the control system. The following factors must be weighed against each other:
• The process time constant should not be less than 100 ms.
• When the time constant for a process is such that the controllers must execute faster than every 100 ms you should give execution times some extra thought, and ensure that the controller really has the time it requires, keeping in mind the associated program code.
Remarks on the Design of Control Loops
Configuration of Control Loops
The recommended configuration strategy for creating a control loop is to connect the control modules in chains from the left to the right, which is the direction of the main signal flow. If sufficient space is not available in the Control Module Diagram window, the control module icons may be turned in other directions. Their interaction windows are not influenced.
Control modules are preferably connected by means of graphical connections. This is done in Offline mode.
Connection to Tasks
The basic strategy for connections to tasks is to have all the control modules in a control loop running in the same task. If there is a need for faster action, particularly at the end of the control loop, these control modules can be connected to a quicker task, for example, in three-position control or for the slave controller in a cascade control loop.
98 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Library Types
Backtracking
In a control loop with several PID functions, where backtracking occurs, try to locate control modules that have an internal state as late as possible in the control loop chain. Otherwise when backtracking, a control module with internal state influences any succeeding TapCC and TapRealCC control module in a faulty way.
The latter control modules would then tap off values and set levels based on the backtracked value (which is collected by the control module with an internal state) instead of a value from the preceding control module as expected.
Controller Library Types
Table 6 shows all controller types in the Control libraries.
Table 6. Controller types in the Control libraries .
Controller
Simple
Standard
Advanced
Template
(1)
Template
(1)
Library
Simple Control
Standard Control
Basic Control
Standard Control
Extended Control
Advanced Control
Control Solution
Control Object
PidSimpleReal
As Control Module Type As Function Block Type
PidSimpleCC
PidLoop
PidLoop3P
PidCascadeLoop
PidCascadeLoop3P
PidCC
BiasCC
RatioCC
PidAdvancedCC
SingleLoop
CascadeLoop
OverrideLoop
FeedforwardLoop
MidrangeLoop
Mimo22CC
Mimo41CC
Mimo44CC
FuzzyController1CC, etc.
Fuzzy Fuzzy Control
(1) Control loop templates can be used directly in an application.
3BSE041488R101 99
100
Controller Library Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
Type Name
PidSimpleReal
PidSimpleCC
Getting Information on Individual Parameters
If you want to study individual parameters for a controller type, refer to online help for the type in question. To display online help for a controller type, select it in
Project Explorer and press F1.
The corresponding online help topic will also contain an Editor button, which will open the corresponding editor, where you can see short descriptions for each parameter, as well as the corresponding data type.
It is also possible to generate project documentation for a library or part of it, by using the built-in Project Documentation function.
The Project Documentation is accessed from Project Explorer. Select a library or object and select File > Documentation. For more information on how to generate project documentation, see online help and the manual Basic Control
Software, Introduction and Configuration.
Simple Controllers
The simple controller objects work according to
Basic Controller Principles on page
Table 7. Simple controllers.
Library
Simple
Control
Standard
Control
Type
Function
Block
Control module
Description
PidSimpleReal is a simple PID controller that supports backtracking, tracking and manual control. All transitions from limiting, tracking, and
Manual mode are bumpless. Interaction graphics are also available, to support set-up and maintenance of the controller.
PidSimpleCC is a low-functionality PID controller, which is less time and memory consuming than the full-functionality versions. Interaction graphics are also available, to support set-up and maintenance of the controller. The main inputs and the output are of ControlConnection type, which means that backtracking and limiting are managed automatically.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Library Types
Standard Controllers
Standard controller types work according to
Basic Controller Principles on page 77.
Table 8. Standard controllers.
Type Name Library Type Description
PidCC PidCC is a full-function PID controller.
Standard
Control
Control module
Basic
Control
Function block
PidLoop
PidLoop3P
PidCascadeLoop
PidLoop, PidLoop3P, PidCascadeLoop, and
PidCascadeLoop3P are ready-made complete control loops that you can connect to I/O signals of RealIO type.
PidCascadeLoop3P
The controllers in these control loops can be configured as P, PI, PD, or PID controllers, with the same functions as PidCC. However, these function block types cannot be connected to other function blocks or have any function block or control module inserted into the control loop.
The PidCC control module type has the following main functions:
•
Autotuner of relay type, see Autotuning on page 133.
•
Feedforward, see Feedforward on page 132.
•
Tracking, see Backtracking on page 72.
•
Deviation alarm generation, see Deviation Alarms on page 131.
• Limitation of output, see
Limitation of Controller Output on page 82.
•
Anti-integrator wind-up, see Anti-Integrator Wind-Up Function on page 126.
•
Bumpless transfer, Bumpless Transfer on page 127.
•
Dead zone for the control deviation, Additional Control Functions on page 148.
•
Setpoint ramping, see Internal Setpoint Ramping on page 82.
• Autotuner structure selection, see
•
Automatic offset adjustment, see Offset Adjustment on page 81.
3BSE041488R101 101
102
Controller Library Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
Input
To supervise the control deviation, relative alarms can be given by two control deviation alarm limits, one for positive and one for negative deviation. Information is given for each level in two forms; as alarms and as Boolean parameters.
Code
Extended Functions with Control Modules
Controller
Output
Process
Figure 35. A control loop with all functions defined by control modules from the control libraries.
Input
Controller Function Block
Output
Figure 36. A control loop defined by a function block.
Process
Advanced Controllers
PidAdvancedCC works according to
Basic Controller Principles on page 77.
Table 9. Advanced controllers.
Type Name Library
PidAdvancedCC Advanced
Control
Type
Control module
Description
PidAdvancedCC is the most advanced controller in the Control libraries, see list below.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Controller Library Types
In addition to the main functions of PidCC, PidAdvancedCC has the following, more advanced functions:
• Configurable as a PPI (Predictive PI controller), see
• Autotuning using relay and step response methods, see
• Gain scheduling, see
• Adaptive control,
•
Oscillation detection, see Additional Control Functions on page 148.
•
Sluggish control detection, see Additional Control Functions on page 148.
PidAdvancedCC generates an event each time a parameter is changed. This means that you must be careful so that you do not flood the alarm and event servers by connecting a parameter to a variable that changes very often.
Fuzzy Controllers
A fuzzy controller may handle the case of one input and one output, as well as many inputs and many outputs. It has most of the functions of a PID controller together with the possibility of defining fuzzy logic rules for process control.
Table 10. Fuzzy controllers.
Type Name Library
FuzzyControllerX
CC
Fuzzy
Control
Type
Control module
Description
For additional information, see online help for the
Fuzzy Control library and
A fuzzy controller should not be used in cases where PID control works well. In these cases it is much easier to tune a PID controller.
3BSE041488R101 103
104
Industrial Controller Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
However, in cases where PID control fails or works poorly a fuzzy controller may be successful, for example when the process:
• is truly multi-variable, with many coupled inputs and outputs,
• has non-linearities that are difficult to handle with PID control and gain scheduling,
• is difficult to describe analytically, and operators control it manually, by experience.
For a short introduction to fuzzy control, see
Sp2
Pv2
Industrial Controller Types
Controllers regarded as common in industry can easily be constructed by means of the control modules in the Control libraries according to the typical examples below.
Cascade Controller
A cascade controller is constructed as a combination of control modules, using input and output modules, and two controller modules. Two controllers are connected in cascade; the output of one controller, called the master, is connected to the external setpoint of the other controller, called the slave.
Master
Outer controller
Out2=Sp1
Pv1
Slave
Inner controller
Out1
Process 1
Pv1
Process 2
Pv2
Inner loop
Outer loop
Figure 37. Illustration of two controller modules connected in cascade.
Two controllers connected in cascade must be tuned in the correct sequence. The inner loop should be faster than the outer loop. Ready-made function blocks are available for applications in which a fixed cascade loop is suitable.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Industrial Controller Types
Three-Position Controller
A three-position controller is constructed as a combination of control modules: a controller module, an analog input module and a three-position output module, which gives two digital output signals. Use a three-position controller when a digital output is required for an increasing, decreasing or no digital signal at all to be sent, for example, to an electrical actuator. See the section
Pulse Controller
A pulse controller is constructed as a combination of control modules: a controller module, an input module and an output module, which gives a digital output signal with a pulse width proportional to the analog controller output.
Sp
Pv
Figure 38. Pulse control with the digital pulse width output proportional to the analog output.
PID controller
Output
Pulse width
Digital
Output
Ratio Controller
A ratio controller can be constructed from a combination of control modules: input and output modules, controller modules, arithmetic modules and tap modules. The ratio between two different process values may be controlled by two or more controller modules, according to
. A RatioCC control module is then used for the ratio between the setpoints. Ratio controllers are often used for recipe handling.
3BSE041488R101 105
Industrial Controller Types Section 4 Analog Process Control
Sp1
Ratio
Pv1
Sp2
X
RatioCC
Pv2
PID controller 1
Output
PID controller 2
Output
Figure 39. Example of ratio controllers where the setpoint from the first controller is multiplied by a factor to obtain the setpoint for the second controller.
Split-Range Controller
A split-range controller is constructed as a combination of the following control modules: input and output modules, a controller module and any of the branching modules. The output from a controller is then divided into two ranges which can be set independently, and may overlap each other. An example of the use of split-range control is when two control valves are used. The valves may be of different sizes working in the same direction. The lower range is connected to the smaller valve and when it is fully open, the upper range opens the larger valve. The valves may also work in opposite directions. For example, when a tank level is to be controlled.
At lower levels, one valve opens, and at higher levels, the other valve opens.
Analog
Output
Sp
Pv
PID controller
Output
Splitrange
Analog
Output
Figure 40. Example of split-range control where the output range from the controller is divided into two branches with different ranges.
106 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Handling
Signal Handling
The Control libraries contain a number of function blocks and control modules for signal handling. There are also types for signal handling in the Basic and Signal libraries.
For a list and description of available signal handling objects, see
Control Builder online help also contains additional information on specific signal handling objects. Select the object in Project Explorer, and press F1 to display online help for a type.
Getting Started with ControlConnection
This section describes how to create a control module template that can connect to
ControlConnection, thus talk to other objects with ControlConnection.
After reading this subsection you will learn:
• The relationship between code-blocks and data flow directions.
• The concept of ControlConnection Gate modules.
• Step-by-step for creating a ControlConnection template.
What is ControlConnection?
ControlConnection is a structured data type for handling signals between control modules in both forward and backward directions. Or equally correct a very beautiful and effective structured data type from the outside, but difficult to connect inside an object!
The difficulties lie in the structure itself, which means that other control modules must fulfil the relation and condition specification for (ControlConnection) signal traffic. For that reason you are going to be introduced to the ControlConnection
Gate modules that will transform your local signals automatically to
ControlConnection.
3BSE041488R101 107
108
Dealing with Data Flow Directions Section 4 Analog Process Control
At the end of this subsection you will also learn how to create a ControlConnection template (CC template) from scratch. The template will help you overcome the most common difficulties there is by having local code reading/writing signals to/from
ControlConnection.
For a more theoretical presentation of ControlConnection, see
Dealing with Data Flow Directions
In order to process signals of ControlConnection your control module must be designed to handle data in both forward and backward directions. The best way to accomplish this is to assign one code block for each direction. Thus one code block
Forward and one code block Backward.
My created CC template
CC
code block
Forward
code block
Backward
CC
Figure 41. A control module prepared with two code blocks for handling forward and backward directions.
This guideline of having one code block for each direction, should apply to all control modules that are processing signals of Control Connection. However, there are some exceptions (as always), first object in the chain, the Source (AI object) and the last object the Sink (AO object) only needs one code block. You will learn more about this under
Code Sorting Order Backwards on page 109.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Dealing with Data Flow Directions
Code Sorting Order Forward
After establishing the need for two code-blocks (Forward and Backward) in the control module, it is time to study how the code sorting order works for
ControlConnection in general. Remember, it isn't just your two (Forward and
Backward) blocks alone that should be sorted, but all the outer code blocks as well.
However, the key is the ControlConnection's sort order mechanism which is very helpful. Provided that we have made all the necessary in/out arrangements, it will always execute forward directions before backward directions!
You will learn all about In/Out parameter connections later in Creating a Control
Module with ControlConnection (CC template) on page 114.
Forward
1
This means that ControlConnection will always start from left with the first forward
block in a chain of control modules ( Figure 42 ). Hence do not worry about your
forward code block sort order, as long as your module is positioned correctly in the control module chain it will be automatically sorted.
My created CC template
Forward code block
3
Forward
2
Forward
4
Forwar
5
Figure 42. ControlConnection will always start with forward block (1), and then execute forward block (2), your forward block (3) and then (4), (5) etc. Always!
Code Sorting Order Backwards
Next step is to learn which object that will change the data flow direction, or start passing information backwards via the backward blocks. Just as before with the forward block's code sorting order, the same principle applies for the backward blocks, but now only backwards!
There are two (predictable) things that can stop further forward executions. It is either a Sink object at the end of the chain (most common solution) or a code sorting variable in the backward block.
3BSE041488R101 109
110
Dealing with Data Flow Directions Section 4 Analog Process Control
Therefore, before building your ControlConnection module, consider if your control module should have a generic solution (continue to passing forward information through the chain) or if your module should be the end object.
Do not worry if you find the code sort mechanism a bit confusing. It does not matter
for building and working with CC templates.
Forward
1
Generic Solution with a Sink Object
A generic solution continues to passing the information to the next forward block, which means that it relies on a Sink object (AO) at the end of the chain. It is the Sink that will change the data flow direction to go backwards (
My generic CC template
Sink
7
Backward
Forward code block
2
Backward code block
6
Forward
3
5
Backward
4
Figure 43. My generic CC template object has a generic solution which simply passes information forward to the next forward object.
As you can see in
Figure 43 the Sink object contains both forward code and
backward code in one code block. The backward direction sort order starts at the end of the Sink’s common code block. The Sink is writing to the backward block, in this case No (5) in
.
End Object Solution
To build an end object means basically two things;
1.
Your forward block will be executed last among all outer forward blocks in the chain of control modules.
2.
Your backward block will be executed first among all outer backward blocks.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Dealing with Data Flow Directions
Forward
1
Building an end object solution is done by start declaring a "dummy" variable (for example CodeSortVar). Then you let the variable CodeSortVar read (in the backward code block) a value that was previously written (for example OldValue1) in the corresponding forward code block. See
.
My end CC template
Forward
2
Forward
3
Forward code block
OldValue1 (a written variable)
4
8
Backward
7
Backward
6
Backward
CodeSortVar := OldValue1
Backward code block
5
Figure 44. My end CC template object has an end solution. It stop passing information forward and begins passing information backwards to the next backward block.
The end CC template object has created a dependency between the forward block and the backward block. Since the backward block is reading the variable
(OldValue1) must the forward block be executed before the backward block. The variable OldValue1 was previously written in the forward block.
Next, you will learn about the Gate modules and how they transform local signals to
ControlConnection.
3BSE041488R101 111
112
Open the Gates to ControlConnection Section 4 Analog Process Control
Open the Gates to ControlConnection
The main difficulties of having own control modules talking ControlConnection is to fulfil the specification for ControlConnection. However, by using Gate modules you do not have to worry about that. As the name applies a Gate module check the signals that come in and out from your control module and capsulated your execute code safely between them.
An IN Gate module will for example read an In signal of ControlConnection and pass it over to one of your local variables. An OUT Gate will transform the executed code value to a ControlConnection signal.
In short, you use the Gate modules to fulfil the specification for Control Connection.
My CC template
Sink
Forward
1
Forward
2
Forward
3
In Gate Out Gate
4
7
Backward
6
Backward
5
Backward
Figure 45. My CC template object is protected by the Gate modules on both sides to ensure a secure signal traffic with ControlConnection.
There are no code-blocks illustrated in the Gate modules (see
) although they contain both forward and backward blocks. They are merely there in the background for syntax control reasons.
Ownership of the Gate Variables
When you are working with the Input Gate and the Output Gate you are going to deal with two variables for each Gate. These two variables will have different ownership, or write permission when reading and writing to your code blocks (see
).
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Open the Gates to ControlConnection
CC In
InForward
CC template
F
OutForward
In Gate Out Gate
InBackward
B
OutBackward
CC Out
Figure 46. Gate Variables writing permission.
These four local variables (InForward, InBackward, OutForward and OutBackward) are local variables that are connected to the Gate parameters Forward and Backward respectively. However, these local variables have different permissions.
From
:
• InForward which is connected to the In Gate’s Forward parameter, is own by the Gate, thus writing is not allowed in the forward code block.
• InBackward which is connected to the In Gate’s Backward parameter, is own by your control module (CC template), thus writing is allowed in backward code block.
• OutForward which is connected to the Out Gate’s Forward parameter, is own by your control module (CC template), thus writing is allowed in forward code block.
• OutBackward which is connected to the Out Gate’s Backward parameter, is own by the Gate, thus writing is not allowed in the backward code block.
There a four Gates provided for you in the standard library BasicLib, CCInputGate,
CCOutputGate, CCInputGateExtended and CCOutputGateExtended. You can learn the differences between the Gates in Control Builder online help.
3BSE041488R101 113
114
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)Section 4 Analog Process Control
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
This step-by-step example builds a control module that calculates the average value of the four latest forward values on a ControlConnection node. It only involves control module types; you cannot use function block types with ControlConnection.
Not in this example or anywhere else.
Although you can choose a single control module, it is strongly recommended that you create your CC template from a control module type. Remember that a control module type can be re-used in many applications, whereas a single control module cannot.
This example assumes that you have experience of (at least) basic Control Builder skills, involving creating and connecting new objects based on types, etc.
The instructions in this example are merely providing you with an idea of a working order. They do not always represent the exact order of events you will meet in
Control Builder (instructions handling context menus, buttons, Save before close etc. have been intentionally neglected).
Create a new CC template object
From the Project Explorer:
1.
Create a new Project with a AC 800M template and name it CCTemplate.
2.
Create a New Library and name it CCTemplateLib.
3.
Connect the BasicLib into your new CCTemplateLib.
4.
Create a new control module type and name it CCTemplate.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process ControlCreating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
3BSE041488R101
Declare parameters and variables
Open the declaration editor for the CCTemplate object.
1.
Declare an In and Out parameter of data type ControlConnection.
2.
Next, declare your local variables according to Figure 47 .
115
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)Section 4 Analog Process Control
116
Figure 47. Declared variables in the CCTemplate object.
As you can see, the Gate variables InForward, InBackward, OutForward and
OutBackward are of structured data types. It is these four local variables that will talk directly to the Gate modules. You will learn about their components when you are programming the forward and backward code blocks. The other four variables are used in the code blocks.
You can also learn the naming convention for parameters and variables in the manual Library Objects Style Guide, Introduction and Design
(3BSE042835Rxxxx).
Connecting the Gate modules
Next, create instances of the Gate modules in the CCTemplate. The Gate modules
(CCInputGate and CCOutputGate) are located in the BasicLib.
1.
Right-click CCTemplate and create an instance of CCInputGate. Name it
CCInputGate.
2.
Connect the Input Gate module according to
.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process ControlCreating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
Figure 48. CCInputGate connected to the CCTemplate module.
3.
Right-click CCTemplate and create an instance of CCOutputGate. Name it
CCOutputGate.
4.
Connect the Output Gate module according to Figure 49 .
Figure 49. CCOutputGate connected to the CCTemplate module.
After connecting the two Gate modules to the CCTemplate, the result in Project
Explorer should look like
3BSE041488R101 117
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)Section 4 Analog Process Control
118
Figure 50. The Gates to ControlConnection are connected to the CCTemplate module.
Programming Forward and Backward Code
1.
Open the Programming Editor for CCTemplate.
2.
Re-name the code block Code to Forward.
3.
Right-click the Forward tag and select Insert from context menu. A dialog will open.
4.
Accept default Languages selection (ST) and name the new code block
Backward.
5.
Select the Forward tag and write the following programming code.
Each variable of a structured data type (e.g. InForward) has a component menu attached. Open the menu by typing a dot (InForward.) directly after the variable in the code block and select the component.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process ControlCreating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
(* Handling FirstScan - Initializing old values *)
IF FirstScan THEN
OldValue1 := InForward.Value;
OldValue2 := InForward.Value;
OldValue3 := InForward.Value;
FirstScan := false;
END_IF;
(* Forward the information to the Output Gate *)
OutForward.BacktrackingPossible := InForward.BacktrackingPossible;
OutForward.Continuous := InForward.Continuous;
OutForward.Range := InForward.Range;
OutForward.Status := InForward.Status;
OutForward.Value := (InForward.Value + OldValue1 + OldValue2 +
OldValue3)/4.0;
(* Updates *)
OldValue3 := OldValue2;
OldValue2 := OldValue1;
OldValue1 := InForward.Value;
Figure 51. Programming code in the Forward code block.
3BSE041488R101 119
120
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)Section 4 Analog Process Control
6.
Select the Backward tag and write the following programming code.
(* Backward information to the Input Gate *)
InBackward.Backtrack := OutBackward.Backtrack;
InBackward.BacktrackValue := OutBackward.BacktrackValue;
InBackward.LowerLimit := OutBackward.LowerLimit;
InBackward.LowerLimitActive := OutBackward.LowerLimitActive;
InBackward.Range := OutBackward.Range;
InBackward.UpperLimit := OutBackward.UpperLimit;
InBackward.UpperLimitActive := OutBackward.UpperLimitActive;
Figure 52. Programming code in the Backward code block.
If you need the End module functionality, then add the following to your code.
Declare the CodeSortVar variable as a real with no attribute (empty field) in the declaration editorn.
Figure 53. Code added for End module functionality.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process ControlCreating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
Adding Graphical Nodes
After you are done with this subsection your CC Template will contain a name area,
two connected graphical nodes in the CMD Editor ( Figure 54 ).
Graphical nodes
Outward line in CMD Editor
Figure 54. CCTemplate in the CMD Editor.
From Project Explorer with the programming editors closed.
1.
Right-click CCTemplate module and select CMD Editor in the context menu.
2.
Select icon for Rectangle (
) and mouse-click a rectangle over the
outward line (see the outward line in Figure 54 ).
New Control Module
Text
Rectangle
Graphical Node
Figure 55. Icon menu in the CMD Editor.
3BSE041488R101 121
Creating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)Section 4 Analog Process Control
3.
Select icon for Text ( Figure 55 ) and write CCTemplate ( Figure 54 ).
Before you can add a graphical node, first declare the corresponding parameters. In this case you have already declared your parameters (In and Out) in the CCTemplate parameter editor.
Adding a graphical node is done with three (left) mouse-clicks. First click will add a node, second click will start a rectangle field (move the cursor), and third mouseclick will release the rectangle. After the third click, type in the parameter name.
4.
Select icon for Graphical Node ( Figure 55 ) and add two nodes on both sides of
your Text area (see exact location in
Figure 54 ). Type in parameter In and Out
in the rectangle.
5.
Close the CMD Editor when done. The CMD Editor should look like
.
Create an Instance of CCTemplate in the Application
Next, you will learn how to create an instance (control module) of your CCTemplate control module type in the application.
1.
Connect your CCTemplateLib to the application.
2.
Declare two global variables (InCC and OutCC of ControlConnection) in the
Application according to
.
122
Figure 56. Global variables for connecting the CCTemplate object in the application.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process ControlCreating a Control Module with ControlConnection (CC template)
3.
Open the CMD Editor in the Application and select the icon for New Control
4.
In the dialog select CCTemplateLib and then select CCTemplate as your control module type. Name your Instance to CCTemplate.
5.
OK.
6.
Left mouse-click a box to a suitable size and release left mouse-click. A connection window will open.
7.
Connect In and Out with InCC and OutCC, respectively. Save and Close.
Done!
3BSE041488R101 123
124
What next?
Section 4 Analog Process Control
What next?
After completing the CC template example, you have hopefully learned how the
Gate modules work and how to adapt the CC template to your own solutions on
ControlConnection.
However, if you need more functionalities the Control Object library contains three additional ControlConnection templates (MIMOXYCC) with more advanced functionalities.
Advanced Functions
This section describes a number of functions that are built into the types in the
Control libraries. It also describes of a number of functions and library types from other standard libraries that can be used when building control loops. The description is split on the following functional areas:
•
Anti-Integrator Wind-Up Function on page 126 describes the anti-integrator
windup function that is built into the control types.
•
Bumpless Transfer on page 127 describes the bumpless transfer function,
which is used to smoothen controller output.
•
Deviation Alarms on page 131 describes the alarm and event functions that are
built into standard and advanced controller types.
•
Feedforward on page 132 describes the feed-forward function, which is used to
accelerate controller response by adding to or subtracting from controller output.
•
Autotuning on page 133 describes how to use autotuning functions to improve
controller settings.
•
Adaptive Control on page 140 describes how to achieve adaptive control, for
complex processes.
•
Gain Scheduling on page 144 describes how to use gain scheduling to adapt
settings to predictable variations in your process.
•
Gain Scheduling versus Adaptation on page 146 discusses when to use gain
scheduling, and when to use adaptation.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Advanced Functions
•
Additional Control Functions on page 148 collects information on a number of
special functions that are offered by the Control library types, such as threeposition output, stiction compensation, oscillation detection, reduction of friction influence, and detection of sluggish control.
•
Input and Output Signal Handling on page 154 describes objects used for input
and output signal handling.
•
Supervision on page 162 describes objects used for supervision, that is, level
detectors, supervision objects, and signal objects.
•
Calculation on page 166 describes objects used for calculations of medians,
mean, and majority, as well as other mathematical calculations. The Compact
Control Builder in itself also contains a number of basic mathematical calculations, such as trigonometry, logarithms, exponentials, etc.
•
Signal Handling on page 168 describes objects used to detect changes in
signals, in order to be able to predict control actions, such as derivative objects, integrating objects, flow calculators.
•
Branch Objects on page 176 describes objects used to split signals into several
components.
•
Selector Objects on page 180 describes objects used to select one out of several
signals.
•
Limiter Objects on page 185 describes objects used to limit signals.
•
Conversion on page 188 describes objects used to convert signals from one data
type to another.
•
Miscellaneous Objects on page 191 describes some additional functions that
might be useful in control loops, for example, an object that can be used to break up control loops.
3BSE041488R101 125
General Section 4 Analog Process Control
General
All function blocks and control modules in the Control libraries have been designed to provide robust behavior over sampling time. As long as the (In) parameter Enable is true, the object will execute and the OUT value will ramp over a sampling time.
However, if the object stops executing between a numbers of scans and then start executing again, it will have calculated and compensated for the non-ramping sampling time. This means that OUT will jump to the compensated value and start ramping from that point.
Please note, OUT will not start ramping from where it was last stopped
(Enable=false) at the previous execution.
Anti-Integrator Wind-Up Function
The anti-integrator wind-up function is an internal function in the controller modules that stops the integral part in certain situations. It is used, for example, in a cascade (master/slave) configuration, when the slave is in Manual mode, to prevent the master from integrating.
Problems with integrator wind-up may occur when a controller containing an integrator is not able to bring the control deviation (Sp – Pv) to zero fast enough, compared with the integral action of the controller. The controller output would probably reach one of its limits and remain there for a while, even after the control deviation has changed sign once ,after the process value has passed the setpoint. The result would be a large overshoot and therefore a slow response.
The reason for this unfavorable behavior is that the integrator winds up to a large
(positive or negative) value when the control deviation has the same sign for a long time and the controller output reaches its limit.
When the control deviation changes its sign, it may take a long time for the integrator to wind down enough for the controller output to leave its limit.
To prevent this, integrator wind-up is limited by the anti-integrator wind-up function. A small wind-up is allowed to avoid the risk of small oscillations of the controller output, close to its limit. The size of the allowed integrator wind-up is determined by the size of the control deviation and the integration time of the controller. This is to initially achieve a fast response from a maximum (or minimum) value of the controller output.
When the anti-integrator windup is active, this is indicated in the interaction window by means of an icon that also shows the direction of the windup.
126 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Bumpless Transfer
Bumpless Transfer
Bumpless transfer means that the controller output is made as smooth as possible, even when conditions within the controller change abruptly. Examples of such changes are mode changes and parameter value changes.
Bumpless transfer may be achieved in different ways. First of all, the integrator, if one exists, of the controller is adjusted so that the output becomes as smooth as possible. For controllers without integrator, the same effect is achieved (if offset adjustment is enabled) by adjusting the offset.
If the controller has no integrator, but any of the control modules preceding the controller has an integrator, this integrator is adjusted instead. If none of these options are available, the output may be temporarily ramped to achieve smoothness.
In some cases, discontinuities in the output may be accepted.
The maximum increase and decrease ramping speed must be adapted to the process. If they are too slow, it might take a very long time before the ramp terminates. If they are too fast, the control actuator may be damaged.
Bumpless Transfer during Mode Changes
The result of changes from one mode to another is described in Table 11 , where
Auto has the lowest priority, and Tuning the highest. The numbers refer to the outcome described in the list below the table. Impossible changes are indicated with an X.
There is, however, one exception. It is not possible to go to Tuning mode when
Backtracking is requested (that is, the object would have been in Backtracking mode, were it not in Tracking or Manual mode).
3BSE041488R101 127
Bumpless Transfer Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 11. Bumpless transfer during mode changes.
From/To
Auto
Backtracking
Auto
–
3
Tracking
3
Manual
3
Tuning
6
Backtracking Tracking
4 1
–
4
4
4
1
–
1
6
Manual
2
2
2
–
6
Tuning
5
X
5
5
–
1.
The output is ramped, at the rate of change set by the parameters OutIncLim and OutDecLim, until the output tracking value (TrackValue) is reached.
2.
The manual value attains the value of the output upon the change to Manual mode.
3.
The mode change can behave in any of the following ways: a.
If the controller has an integrator (PI, PID, PPI) and the Pstart parameter is disabled, or if offset adjustment is enabled for P and PD controllers, the controller starts controlling from the value of the output, before the mode change. In this case, Pv Tracking may occur. See
Process Value Tracking on page 129.
b.
If the controller has an integrator (PI, PID, PPI) and the Pstart parameter is enabled, then the case is the same as above, but with the Pstart function added. At the instant of the mode change, Pstart internally adds a step (=
G(Sp – Pv)), to which the output is then ramped.
c.
If the controller has no integrator (P, PD), and offset adjustment is disabled, the following will occur:
If external setpoint is used and the connected control module can backtrack, or if internal setpoint is used and internal setpoint backtracking is enabled, then the setpoint will be adjusted so that the output becomes continuous.
Otherwise the output may be discontinuous.
4.
The output of the controller becomes equal to the backtracking value.
5.
Tuning starts from the current value of the output.
6.
The output returns to the value before tuning started.
128 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Bumpless Transfer
Process Value Tracking
Tracking of the process value, Pv Tracking, is an internal function in the controller that copies the process value Pv to the value sent back to an external setpoint Sp, or if enabled to the internal setpoint. Pv Tracking may occur for controllers with integrator or with offset adjustment enabled. It occurs when the controller is in
Backtracking, Tracking or Manual mode.
Output Change Rate Parameters
Two controller parameters, OutIncLim and OutDecLim, determine the output change rate of the ramp used during the mode changes described above. They are also used for the ramp, which prevents the output from changing abruptly, when output limits are narrowed.
These parameters do not limit the velocity change rate of the output in general, the change rate is only affected temporarily, in the cases described above.
If you want a general limitation on the output velocity change rate, use the
VelocityLimiterCC control module.
Bumpless Transfer during Parameter Changes
If the value of a controller parameter changes, for example the gain, the output will be continuous if the controller has an integrator, or if offset adjustment is enabled.
Otherwise the output may be discontinuous.
Bumpless Transfer during Internal and External Setpoint Changes
Bumpless transfer between internal and external setpoints is achieved in the following ways. See first
Reduced Effect of Setpoint Changes on page 81 and then
Internal Setpoint Ramping on page 82.
1.
Upon transfer to internal setpoint:
The internal setpoint value is initially set equal to the current value of the setpoint.
2.
Upon transfer to external setpoint:
If the setpoint is connected to a preceding control module with an internal state, it will be continuous. The internal state is adjusted so that the setpoint becomes continuous.
Otherwise the setpoint is in general not continuous.
3BSE041488R101 129
Bumpless Transfer Section 4 Analog Process Control
Bumpless Transfer when Enabling or Disabling the Limitation of the Output
Bumpless transfer is obtained when the limitation of the controller output is enabled or disabled in the following way. If you narrow the limits, and the controller output is outside the new limits, the output follows a ramp until it reaches the new limit, using the set change rate. See the section
Output Change Rate Parameters on page
129. When you expand the limits, controller output is continuous for a controller
with an integrator. It may be discontinuous for a controller without an integrator.
Bumpless Transfer when Forcing the I/O Signal to the Process
When the output I/O enters Forced mode it will request the controller to go into
Backtracking mode. The reaction of the controller depends on the priority of the modes for the controller, as described above.
When the output I/O leaves Forced mode it will no longer require the controller to be in Backtracking mode.
If two PidLoop function blocks are used to build a cascade loop, the bumpless transfer function does not work properly. Use the PidCascadeLoop function block instead.
Bumpless Transfer at Switchover to Redundant I/O
To get bumpless transfer of I/O signals of RealIO data type, at switchover from active to redundant I/O, a RedundantIn function block can be used. It is used in the standard control modules and function blocks using the RealIO data type as an input parameter. To achieve the bumpless transfer, RedundantIn ramps the RealIO signal by using a real input value for the change rate of the signal.
All controller types that have an in signal of the type RealIO have a built-in function block of this type. The only exception is MotorBi, MotorUni,
MotorBiM, and MotorUniM, where the RealI/O signal is used for surveillance only.
130 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Deviation Alarms
Deviation Alarms
Deviation alarms are generated by the standard and the advanced controller objects, but not by the simple ones. The control deviation is defined as the difference between the process value and the setpoint value.
An alarm condition state and a Boolean alarm condition parameter are set when the deviation is higher or lower than the positive or negative limits set. To prevent alarm flicker, a suitable time filter and degree of hysteresis are used. Before going to
Auto mode, you can set a certain start delay time, to give the controller time to tune before alarms are activated.
For information on the use of the inhibit and disable parameters for the alarm functions, see alarm and event information in the Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Configuration manual.
+ Deviation
Alarm
Deviation alarm positive
Deviation limit
Hysteresis
Deviation limit
- Deviation
Positive deviation alarm
Start delay time
Delay time
Negative deviation alarm
Start delay time
Figure 57. Overview of the controller deviation alarm limits.
3BSE041488R101 131
132
Feedforward Section 4 Analog Process Control
Feedforward
The feedforward signal is used to compensate for measurable disturbances, to achieve faster and smoother control of a process. Feedforward means that a signal is either added to or subtracted from the output signal of the controller. The feedforward signal may also be amplified or reduced.
The feedforward process accelerates the controller response by anticipating changes and acting to neutralize any disturbance, before it occurs.
Feedforward can also be used to suppress changes in the input signal that must not be allowed to influence the controller output.
Feedforward is selected as a positive (+) or a negative (–) value of FF
Gain
in the algorithm.
Out
PID
= Out from PID algorithm
+ FF
Gain
* FF
Sp
PID controller
PID algorithm
Out from PID
∑
FF
Gain
FF = Feedforward
Limitations and antiwind-up algorithm
Out
PID
Process
Pv
Pv
Figure 58. The feedforward principle in the controller.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Autotuning
Autotuning
Introduction
Autotuning is a simple way to obtain suitable controller parameters. It is recommended to use the Autotuner function, otherwise, a great deal of time can be spent in manual tuning of many controllers in large process plants. Manual tuning time can be increased even more when retuning becomes necessary, due to changes in the process conditions.
Several autotuning iterations do not improve the information from one tuning to the next iteration. However, it does increase the speed for next autotuning iteration.
You are advised to repeat autotuning a couple of times to rule out possible disturbances that might have affected the first autotuning iteration. Furthermore, if a number of controllers affect the same process, it is necessary that all controllers have been correctly autotuned and holds accepted process values while autotuning a single controller.
When the process is in steady state, start the Autotuner. It then identifies the dynamic parameters of the process automatically, and from these, the Autotuner calculates and suggests appropriate PID parameters. When autotuning is complete, the controller reverts to previous mode. It uses the old controller parameters, but suggests the new autotuned parameters, and you have the choice to apply them.
The user may also select another controller structure and design than used for calculating the controller parameters from the autotuning results. Some users want a specific controller structure, for example, a PI controller, and that the result of an autotuning should comply with this selection. Then, the autotuner recalculates the controller parameters based on the autotuning results.
Autotuning is based on a relay (ON/OFF) identification method, with feedback
measurements, as illustrated in Figure 59 . To obtain extended autotuning, it is also
possible to complete process identification by means of an automatic subsequent setpoint step. Choose between the following three autotuning methods.
3BSE041488R101 133
134
Autotuning Section 4 Analog Process Control
1.
Relay only. This normally gives acceptable controller parameters, particularly if the time needed for autotuning is critical.
2.
Setpoint step only. After you have performed autotuning with the relay method, you may, at a later time, perform setpoint step identification, when you want to compensate for dead time in the process.
3.
Relay and setpoint step. This is the complete autotuning alternative.
Perform autotuning when the process is in steady state only.
Setpoint
Process value
PID controller
PID algorithm values
Parameter
Output
Autotuner
Process
Figure 59. The principle of autotuning in a PID controller with the Autotuner function.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Autotuning
Process value
Autotuning with Relay Method
When the system is in steady state, and the Autotuner has been started, the PID controller is temporarily disconnected.
First, the Autotuner measures the noise of the process value.
Secondly, the output is generated and changed by the relay, with a hysteresis function, to implement a disturbance in the process, of a small amplitude, according to the figure below. The effect of the relay function is an ON/OFF control which, by means of a square wave signal, generates a controlled and stable oscillation in the process value. The response is observed, and the amplitude of the oscillation is automatically controlled to a minimum value by adjustment of the relay amplitude.
From the period and amplitude of the process value oscillation, suitable P, I and D parameters are calculated. The controller is then ready to operate and the PID algorithm is reintroduced into the control loop.
Autotuning oscillation
Noise measurement
Output Relay with hysteresis
Start of autotuning
Exponential increase
Figure 60. After a few periods of oscillation the time period and the process value are determined. The PID parameters are then automatically calculated.
3BSE041488R101 135
136
Autotuning Section 4 Analog Process Control
Extended Autotuning with the Setpoint Step Method
To improve the autotuning, a small setpoint step can be carried out automatically, or at your request, with the relay autotuned PID controller. Static gain, dead time and the time constant of the process are obtained from the setpoint step response, and the PID parameters can be adjusted.
Autotuning Process
Autotuning can be started with the controller in Manual or Auto mode. During the autotuning process, the Autotuner controls the output. The following two conditions must be fulfilled before starting autotuning.
• The process must be in steady state. It is not possible to start the Autotuner during a load disturbance or a setpoint change.
• It is also important that no major load disturbance occurs during the autotuning process.
• The control deviation (Sp – Pv) must be less than 5% of the actual Pv range.
When these conditions are fulfilled, you can start the Autotuner. If the process is not in a steady state, autotuning may fail. Autotuning is interrupted by a load disturbance.
During the first part of the autotuning process, the output signal is kept constant and the noise level is measured, in order to calculate the necessary oscillation amplitude.
Note that it is important to choose a shorter sampling time (task cycle time) for fast processes than for slow processes, otherwise, the period used for noise calculation will be unnecessarily long, autotuning will be less accurate, and the resulting control will be unnecessarily slow. If the process is not stationary, the Autotuner will interrupt and give a warning that the noise level is higher than the true level.
When the noise level has been calculated, the Autotuner determines the relay hysteresis, no larger than necessary, but sufficiently above the noise level. Then, the output from the relay is introduced into the loop, but no larger than the maximum relay value set. This causes the process value to oscillate around the setpoint, and the relay output amplitude is adjusted to give the desired amplitude of the process value. It may be necessary to limit the amplitude of the first output signal increase, for example, in processes with significant dead times.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Autotuning
The period and amplitude of the oscillation are determined for the process value.
Slow processes can have oscillation periods between minutes and hours, while fast processes have oscillation periods of a few seconds. When the oscillation amplitude is stable, the PID parameters are calculated. If the autotuning method selected is relay only, autotuning is complete at this point. The new parameter values may be applied. If tuning fails, the controller continues to use the old parameters.
After the relay method has been used, you may select setpoint step identification only, or relay and setpoint step identification. After the user has started a setpoint step, the process value will finally reach the new setpoint according to the figure below. When steady state is reached, the output signal is restored to its previous value. The process goes back to its initial state and autotuning is complete. The process gain, time constant and dead-time are calculated from the setpoint step response. With these process parameters identified, the Autotuner recalculates the
PID parameters obtained from the relay method. When autotuning is complete, the new parameters are shown in the interaction window. If you want to accept the
Process value suggested PID parameters, apply them before closing the interaction window.
Setpoint step
Steady state
Pv
Steady state
Output
Output restored
Figure 61. After autotuning with the relay method, a setpoint step is performed and at steady state, the output is restored to the previous value.
3BSE041488R101 137
Autotuning Section 4 Analog Process Control
The Autotuner saves the values of the noise level and the relay amplitude from the previously performed autotuning. Autotuning may then be repeated more quickly.
To start from the beginning, reset the Autotuner.
PI or PID Controller
During relay tuning, the Autotuner chooses a controller type, PID or PI, automatically. The normal Autotuner choice is a PID controller. In some cases, where processes contain integrators, for example, for level control, the Autotuner may decide to use a PI controller.
PPI Controller
If Setpoint step only, or a complete relay and Setpoint step autotuning is performed, the Autotuner compares the process dead time with the process time constant. If the dead time dominates (about twice the time constant) the Autotuner may suggest the
PPI design. A PPI controller is never chosen if autotuning is configured for relay only. The Autotuner detects the process dead-time during the setpoint step method only. However, you may manually select the PPI type to handle processes with a known dead-time, which then has to be specified.
Controller Response Speed
The choice of controller speed influences the behavior of the control loop. In certain processes, high speed is necessary and overshoots are acceptable, whereas in other cases, a slower control sequence can be accepted. In the Autotuner, it is possible to select one of three controller response speeds: Slow, Normal, or Fast, and thus determine the method of operation. Upon speed changes, the controller PID parameters are updated immediately. Apply the new parameters to accept them.
138 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Autotuning
Pre-settings
No prior information has to be supplied for successful autotuning, but some presettings can be made as follows.
• The maximum limit of the relay amplitude, expressed in engineering units, is initialized to 10% of the output range. The Autotuner automatically chooses a suitable relay amplitude, so that the parameter for maximum relay amplitude needs to be used only if too high output signal levels cause critical situations.
• The maximum limit of the setpoint step, expressed in engineering units, is initialized to 10% of the process value range. The Autotuner automatically chooses a suitable step amplitude, so that the parameter for maximum step amplitude needs to be used only if too high setpoint values cause critical situations.
• Warning time is selected, if you want a warning for excessive autotuning time.
Resetting
If you set the Reset parameter, the values of the noise level and the relay amplitude saved by the Autotuner from the previous autotuning are rejected. A new estimate of the noise level is then made. Reset is recommended when a condition of the process, such as dynamics or noise properties, has changed. It should also be used when earlier autotuning has failed.
Direct or Reverse Direction
The direction of the process gain is either direct or reverse. The default direction is reverse. This means that when the process value increases, the controller output decreases. If the direction you have set is not the same as that automatically detected by the Autotuner, a warning text will be displayed, telling you that the controller direction may be wrong.
However, in cases where the process is of extreme “non-minimum phase” type, and the process starts to respond in the wrong direction to an output step, the Autotuner will also give a warning.
3BSE041488R101 139
140
Adaptive Control Section 4 Analog Process Control
Maximum Sampling Time
When you have autotuned a controller, the Autotuner calculates a maximum sampling time and indicates it in the interaction window. This time is 1/8 of the process oscillation time. If the current sampling time (task cycle time) is longer than the calculated maximum sampling time, then you should decrease the current sampling time.
If your sampling time is too long, the suggested maximum sampling time may be shorter than the current sampling time. This means that the current sampling time is too long in relation to the signal changes the Autotuner has detected.
A suitable strategy for decreasing the sampling time is to halve the current sampling time, and autotune again, to see the new maximum sampling time given by the
Autotuner.
This method can be repeated until you reach the point where the current sampling time is shorter than or equal to the maximum sampling time.
Adaptive Control
There are many kinds of processes. Some are very simple to control, and some are far more complex, with changing dynamics. An example of a complex system is maintaining a constant value of the pH in a tank. A combination of an adaptive controller and gain scheduling gives good results in such applications.
An adaptive controller is used to continuously update controller parameters. The variations in process dynamics must, however, be slow in comparison with the time constant of the process. An adaptive controller adapts the PID and feedforward gain parameters.
The adaptation function is enabled by the operator. The operator must first perform an initial start-up autotuning. When the tuned parameters have been accepted, adaptive supervision is started by continuously monitoring the input and output signals to/from the process. Adaptation is then activated only when both signal values exhibit large enough variations. The activated adaptation function then calculates and implements new controller parameters.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Adaptive Control
Enabled, ongoing adaptation is deactivated on the following occasions.
1.
The operator disables adaptation.
2.
The Autotuner is activated.
When autotuning is complete, adaptation continues, either with the new initial tuning values, if they have been accepted, or the old ones, if no choice of tuning values was made by the operator.
3.
Upon changes to Manual mode.
4.
During backtracking.
5.
Upon output tracking.
6.
When the sampling time is too long.
7.
For a feedback adaptive controller also:
– in the case of load disturbance,
– when a PPI controller is chosen.
– when there is no integrator (I) part,
3BSE041488R101 141
142
Adaptive Control Section 4 Analog Process Control
Feedback Adaptive Controller
Feedback adaptation modifies the PID parameters of the controller. The feedback adaptive controller has the ability to continuously follow a specified point on a
Nyquist curve, as the process dynamics change. The principle of the feedback adaptive controller is shown in the following figure.
Feedback adaptive PID controller
Specification
Sp
Pv
Controller design
Estimator
Pv
BPF
Out
BPF
BP f
BP f
Out
Process
Pv
Limitations and antiwind-up
PID algorithm
Figure 62. The principle of the feedback adaptive PID controller.
After initial autotuning, feedback adaptive supervision is achieved by monitoring the band-pass-filtered PID controller Out
BPF
signal and the process value Pv
BPF
.
The user specifies Slow, Normal, or Fast response. The adaptive controller then gives the resulting PID or PI parameters.
Enabled, ongoing adaptation is deactivated when a load disturbance is detected in the Pv signal.
The reason for this is that the process value (Pv) is not relevant in relation to the Out signal from the PID controller, and would give incorrect values for PID parameters.
When the load disturbance has disappeared, adaptation supervision continues.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Adaptive Control
Pv
Sp
Feedforward Adaptive Controller
If it is possible to measure load disturbances in the process, you can use standard feedforward control. If the relation between the measured and the real load disturbance varies, you can use a feedforward adaptive controller as shown in the figure below, for example, when the flow characteristics of a pump are changed, due to fouling in the pipe system. Feedforward adaptation then modifies the feedforward gain, FF
Gain
, of the controller.
Feedforward adaptive PID controller
PID algorithm
Out from PID
BP f
Estimator
BP f
FF
Gain
∑
Out
FF
=FF
Gain
*FF
Limitations and antiwind-up
Out
FF
Process
Load disturbance
Pv
Figure 63. The principle of the feedforward adaptive PID controller.
Feedforward adaptive supervision is carried out by monitoring the process value, Pv, and the feedforward signal, FF, representing the load disturbance. This is done through the high-band-filters, BP f
. The parameter estimator is also influenced by the
PID controller Out from PID
signal. Adaptation starts when both the filtered signals are large enough.
The feedforward gain, FF
Gain
, which can be positive or negative, is continuously calculated as long as the feedforward adaptive function is active.
The signal, Out
FF
= FF
Gain
*FF, is added to the PID controller output signal
Out from PID
to compensate for the load disturbance.
3BSE041488R101 143
144
Gain Scheduling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Gain Scheduling
When your process has predictable non-linear dynamics, time variations, or demands on changes in operating conditions, you can use gain scheduling. To use the gain scheduling technique, you first have to choose a reference signal that correlates well with the changes in process dynamics. The reference signal can be:
• Pv – the process value signal
• Out – the output signal
• Sp – the setpoint signal
• Ext – an external signal
The reference signal can be divided into up to five ranges, separated by adjustable limits. The gain scheduling function is a table, containing one set of all the parameters for the PID controller for each range. One set of parameters is active when the reference signal is within the current range. When the reference signal over.
passes a value between two parameter set ranges, the next set of parameters takes
Parameter Set Ranges
As soon as you select gain scheduling in the interaction window, you are given two parameter sets to start with. If you want more parameter sets, you can insert a new one, above the one selected. The limit value is given between the ranges as half the previous range. It is possible to change the limit manually. You can delete a selected parameter set the same way. The range then includes the deleted range.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Gain Scheduling
Tuning the Parameter Sets
The Autotuner (see Autotuning on page 133) should be used to set controller
parameters in each parameter range set. A parameter set is active when the reference signal is between its range limits. Autotuning can only be performed in an active parameter set range. When the reference signal is close to a limit, autotuning may give poor results. All tuning values, including adaptive controller values, are stored in the gain scheduling table. You may also set the controller parameters manually.
A small hysteresis function is built in, to avoid frequent switching between two parameter sets when a noisy reference signal passes a limit.
Example of Inserting and Tuning Parameter Sets
The figures below show examples of inserting and tuning parameter sets.
1.
Initially, we have a single parameter set (Set 1) that is Autotuned to T1. When gain scheduling is activated, a second set (Set 2) is added above Set 1, with the same Autotuned T1. You can then select Set 2 and Autotune this to T2. The limit is by default set to half the height of the set that is divided. You can change this before autotuning the new set.
100
Set 1 Set 2 Set 2
75
T1 T2
50
T1
25
Set 1
T1
Set 1
T1
0
Procedure steps
Figure 64. Example of the procedure for gain scheduling in two sets.
3BSE041488R101 145
146
Gain Scheduling versus Adaptation Section 4 Analog Process Control
2.
You can then split Set 2 in half. Set 3 is added above Set 2, with the same autotuned T2. You can then select Set 3 and autotune this to T3. The limit is by default set to half the height of the set that was divided. You can change this before autotuning the new set.
100
Set 2 Set 3
T2
Set 3
T3
75
T2
Set 2
T2
Set 2
T2
50
Set 1
Set 1 Set 1
25
T1 T1 T1
0
Figure 65. Example of the procedure for gain scheduling in three sets.
Procedure steps
Gain Scheduling versus Adaptation
When configuring a controller, you can choose between constant controller parameters, gain scheduling, adaptation, or a combination of those, depending on the process dynamics, as follows, and according to
Process with Constant Process Dynamics
For a process with constant process dynamics, which is the most common, a controller with constant parameters can be chosen. The correct strategy is then to select a PID controller or a PPI controller if the dead time is long.
The process engineer’s trimming tool for PID and PPI controllers is the Autotuner, which suggests settings for the parameters of the controller.
As a rule of thumb, a PPI controller is used when the dead time is longer than the dominant time constant in the process.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Gain Scheduling versus Adaptation
Processes with Changing but Predictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing but predictable process dynamics, which requires different parameters in different parts of the working range, the proper strategy is to
use a PID controller or a PPI controller with gain scheduling. See the section Gain
Scheduling on page 144. Use the Autotuner to tune the parameters in each
parameter set range.
Processes with Changing and Unpredictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing but unpredictable process dynamics, which vary slowly,
the proper strategy is to use an adaptive PID controller. See the section Adaptive
Control on page 140. The Autotuner is used to tune the initial parameters. A PPI
controller is able to run gain scheduling, but not adaptation.
Processes with Changing and Partly Predictable Process Dynamics
For a process with changing, unpredictable process dynamics, which vary slowly, and partly predictable process dynamics, the proper strategy is to use a combination of adaptation and gain scheduling.
Process dynamics
Varying Constant
Use a controller with varying parameters
Unpredictable variations
Use an adaptive controller
Partly predictable variations
Predictable variations
Use gain scheduling
Use a controller with constant parameters
Use an adaptive controller and gain scheduling
Figure 66. Procedure used to decide which controller to use, adaptive control and/or gain scheduling.
3BSE041488R101 147
148
Additional Control Functions Section 4 Analog Process Control
Additional Control Functions
Three-Position Output
Three-position action from a controller with increasing, or decreasing, or no signal at all, for example, to an electrical motor actuator, is achieved by a function with two digital output signals, which are never active at the same time.
This three-position output control module is an extension of a controller, when two digital outputs are required. A comparison is made between the controller’s analog output signal and an analog signal from the control device or actuator, which gives the so-called position feedback signal.
When the difference is greater than a set dead zone, either of the two digital output signals, Increase (increment output) or Decrease (decrement output) of BoolIO
type, is activated in the following manner, see Table 12
.
Comparison
Output=Position feedback
Output>Position Feedback
Table 12. Three-position output.
Increase
False
True
Output<Position Feedback False
Decrease
False
False
True
A position feedback signal is not always available. It can, however, be estimated internally by the module, to represent the current position of the control device by the following calculation. The time during which the increasing or decreasing pulse has been active is divided by the total action time between the actuator end positions which you can declare, and then multiplied by the controller output range. The minimum output signal pulse length that you can set is the sampling time.
The dead zone is the tolerated difference between the output signal from the controller and the position feedback signal. A difference within the dead zone will not affect any digital output.
The minimum time for switching between the two output signals can be set in seconds, as short as the sampling time, or longer, depending on the actuator.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Additional Control Functions
Three-position digital output
Active
Not active
PID controller
Increase
Decrease
Active
Not active
Position feedback signal from control device or internal estimate.
Figure 67. The principle of the three-position digital output function.
Stiction Compensator
It is always important to know how a control loop will perform, because it influences the process output. Performance checks may be carried out in many ways. One method of detecting deficiencies in the process control is to detect oscillations. Oscillations above a certain amplitude and within a certain frequency range are probably caused by sticking control valves, due to too high static friction, called stiction. This phenomenon usually increases gradually during operation with fluids that are difficult to handle, for example, viscous fluids. Stiction then gives rise to oscillations of a particular character in the process control loop.
There may also be other reasons for the oscillations, for example, badly tuned control loops or oscillating load disturbances. However, in this section, only methods of detecting and minimizing stiction problems will be dealt with. Methods implemented in the PID controllers and as an add-in control module, are described in the figure below and in the succeeding sections.
If the process handles products which cause friction problems in a pneumatic control valve, an add-in function, called a stiction compensator, should be added to the analog output signal used in the control loop.
This method of keeping pneumatic valves free from clogging and seizing involves activating them regularly by adding short pulses, to “knock” the valve. The stiction compensator function compensates for static friction and hysteresis which may increase gradually with time.
3BSE041488R101 149
Additional Control Functions Section 4 Analog Process Control
Enable
Stiction compensator
Advanced PID controller module
Setpoint
PID algorithm
AO
Output
Process value
Enable
Automatic oscillation detector
Output if oscillations are detected
Pneumatic process valve at risk of stiction
Figure 68. Principles for detecting and solving friction problems.
Oscillation detection starts when the user has enabled the automatic oscillation detector in the PID controller module. If an oscillation is detected an output is set and a warning is given. If it is obvious that there is friction in the valve, the user should enable the stiction compensator function to keep the valve moving until it can be repaired or replaced.
Oscillation Detection
Automatic monitoring of control loop performance is built into the advanced PID controller module. When activated, this oscillation detector function detects oscillations in the process value around the setpoint, often caused by friction in a control valve. Oscillation is detected when the process value oscillates a certain number of times around the setpoint with an amplitude of about 1% or greater, and with a period of about the length of the process time constant.
If you are uncertain about the cause of oscillation, you may undertake a diagnostic procedure according to the flow chart in
Figure 69 , which helps you to find and
eliminate the source of oscillation.
150 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Additional Control Functions
Oscillation detection can be sent from the PID AdvancedCC object (parameter
VoteOut) to receiving Voting objects (parameter Inx). You then configure the value of Inx parameter to be for example oscillation detection from the Vote object's parameter InxLevelConfig. See also
Signal and Vote Loop Concept on page 305.
Figure 69. Flow chart for oscillation diagnosis.
Perform the following steps to determine what kind of oscillation has been detected:
1.
Activate the oscillation detector function in the loop assessment settings of the advanced PID control module, to detect any oscillation in the process value around the setpoint.
2.
If an oscillation is detected, a warning text is shown in the More parameters interaction window and an output signal from the PID control module is set to true.
3BSE041488R101 151
152
Additional Control Functions Section 4 Analog Process Control
3.
If you are uncertain of the reason for the oscillation you may undertake a stiction diagnostic procedure according to the succeeding steps. These guide you in finding and eliminating the oscillation.
4.
Put the output signal to the pneumatic valve into forced mode.
5.
If the oscillation stops, check the pneumatic valve for friction. If the valve is sticking, perform the required maintenance to retrieve the problem, or replace the valve.
6.
If it is not suitable at the moment to carry out maintenance on the valve, wait for a later occasion. Meanwhile, you are advised to activate the stiction compensator to reduce the influence of static friction in a pneumatic valve.
7.
If there is no friction, check the tuning of the controller. There may have been accidental changes in the process parameters.
8.
If the oscillation persists, the process value may be influenced by a disturbance.
Search for the source. It may be useful to use the feedforward function.
Reduction of the Influence of Friction
The stiction compensator function signal is superimposed on the analog output signal to the process, according to the figure below. A short pulse sequence is added to the controller output signal, inside the analog output control module. This signal is of equal amplitude and duration in the direction of the output signal’s change rate.
Thus, when the signal increases, the pulse is directed upwards (and vice versa). See
. In this way, it is possible to handle sticky valves. (Industrial tests show that the procedure reduces the control deviation during stick-slip motion significantly, compared with standard control without friction compensation.)
The stiction compensator function may be varied and the following parameters can be set: pulse amplitude, pulse width, and the pulse period factor multiplied by the pulse width, giving the pulse period time. A stiction compensator pulse is only given when the output signal changes by an amount greater than a set hysteresis limit.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control
Output signal
Pulse width
Pulse amplitude
Additional Control Functions
Hysteresis
Pulse period
Time
Figure 70. The stiction compensator signal is superimposed on the analog output signal.
Sluggish Control Detection
Sluggish control, which should be avoided, means that a controller responds too slowly to load disturbances or setpoint changes, as in the figure below.
Desired optimal control
Sluggish control
Figure 71. Illustration of sluggish control.
Sluggish control loops may occur with conservatively or poorly tuned controllers.
This may cause losses in production and quality. A sluggish response to load changes or disturbances is therefore undesirable. Slow behavior with unnecessarily large and long deviations from the setpoint should be avoided. A well-tuned controller gives a fast response to load disturbances. The loop assessment function, which works according to the Idle index, can detect sluggish control.When you have completed the commission of a control loop and you have tuned it, you can supervise the loop for the detection of sluggish control. Sluggish control may occur after a certain operating time.
3BSE041488R101 153
Input and Output Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Perform the following steps to detect sluggish control.
1.
Activate the sluggish control detector function in the loop assessment settings of the advanced PID control module, to detect any sluggish control in the process.
2.
If sluggish control is detected, a warning text is shown in the More parameters interaction window and an output signal from the PID control module is set to true.
Perform a new autotuning sequence and ensure that faster control is achieved.
Sluggish control can be sent from the PID AdvancedCC object (parameter VoteOut) to receiving Voting objects (parameter Inx). You then configure the value of Inx parameter to be for example sluggish control from the Vote object's parameter
InxLevelConfig. See also
Signal and Vote Loop Concept on page 305.
Input and Output Signal Handling
Signals start and end in I/O units with I/O channels of the RealIO data type.
Between input and output I/O units, signals are handled in I/O function blocks of the
RealIO data type, or directly in various function blocks, or in control modules of the
ControlConnection data type.
In open loop control, information mainly goes forward, for example, formula calculations, indications, comparisons, or presentations.
I/O unit
Input
Code or presentation
Output
I/O unit
Figure 72. Signal handling in open loop control.
In closed-loop control, applications that contain one or several controllers, it is necessary for information to go both forward and backward. This places much higher demands on the solution of such applications.
154 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Input and Output Signal Handling
Process
I/O unit
Input
PID control, code or presentation
Output
I/O unit
Figure 73. Control loop application in closed-loop control.
When combining and connecting various objects, you should be able to predict the resulting functions and behavior.
It is often necessary to measure values for later calculations in the application and for presentation. Analog signals are then transferred from measurement transmitters in a process, to I/O units. The signal interface objects for input and output signals read values from, and write values to, the I/O systems, respectively. Further on in the loop, the signal is directed to application code, or to a presentation. The signal goes to an analog input interface which transforms it into a ControlConnection type signal for further direction, for example, to a PID controller, application code, or a presentation, see
Input Signal Handling
Input objects receive a value from the I/O unit, which receives it from the process.
I/O input units are represented in the hardware configuration section in the Project
Explorer, where you can configure the measuring range and units of measurement.
Interface objects
Input
I/O unit
Code or presentation
Figure 74. Handling of input signals
3BSE041488R101 155
156
Input and Output Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 13. Standard library types for input signal handling .
Type Name Library Type Description
SignalInReal(M) SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
SignalInReal has an analog input, of
RealIO data type, with several supervision functions, such as alarm and event levels, and interaction windows. SignalInReal has a first-order, low-pass filter built in. The input is intended to be connected to an analog input I/O variable. The signal output is of real data type (Function blocks) and
ControlConnection (Control modules).
SignalSimpleInReal(M) SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
SignalInBool(M) SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
SignalSimpleInReal is a version of
SignalInReal (SignalSimpleInRealM is a version of SignalInRealM) that only handles one high and one low level. This simple type consumes less memory than
SignalInReal.
SignalInBool has a digital input, of BoolIO data type, with several supervision functions, such as alarm and event levels, and interaction windows. The signal input is intended to be connected to a digital input
I/O variable. The signal output is of bool data type (Function blocks) and
BoolConnection (Control modules).
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Input and Output Signal Handling
Table 13. Standard library types for input signal handling (Continued).
Type Name Library Type Description
AnalogInCC Standard
Control
Control module
AnalogInCC receives the measured analog input value from the I/O unit and converts the input signal of RealIO data type to the common ControlConnection data type.
AnalogInCC has a built-in first-order, lowpass filter. The analog input signal may be supervised by a Level6CC control module
type with alarm levels, see Supervision on page 162. The analog input signal may also
be supervised in bar graphs or histograms and controlled manually.
In a control loop application, AnalogInCC
The chain of objects in a control loop must end with one of the following objects for
Output Signal Handling
normally precedes a PidCC controller.
(1)
.
the output signals, see
.
Signals or values from the code can go directly to an I/O unit, or be handled in control modules before the output signal goes further to an output interface and then on to an I/O unit, and finally out to an actuator in the process.
Interface objects
I/O unit
Code Output
Figure 75. Handling of output signals
3BSE041488R101 157
158
Input and Output Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
.
Table 14. Standard library types for analog output.
Type Name
SignalOutReal(M)
Library Type
SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
Description
SignalOutReal has an analog output of
RealIO data type, (Function blocks) and
ControlConnection (Control modules) with alarm level functions and interaction windows. The signal output, of RealIO data type, is intended to be connected to an analog output I/O variable.
SignalSimpleOutReal(M) SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
SignalOutBool(M) SignalLib Function block and
Control module
(1)
SignalSimpleOutReal has analog output of
RealIO (Function blocks) and
ControlConnection (Control modules)
SignalSimpleOutReal is a version of
SignalOutReal that only handles one high and one low level. This simple type consumes less memory than
SignalOutReal.
SignalOutBool has a digital output of
BoolIO data type, with several supervision functions, such as alarm and event levels, and interaction windows. The signal input is intended to be connected to a digital input
I/O variable. The signal output is of bool data type.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Input and Output Signal Handling
Table 14. Standard library types for analog output.
Type Name
AnalogOutCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Description
AnalogOutCC writes, scales, or converts the following, from the ControlConnection signal type, to the RealIO signal type:
- analog output signals to actuators via I/O units,
- variables to the local system or a distributed system.
The analog output may be supervised with a control module of the Level6CC,
Level4CC, or Level2CC type, see
AnalogOutCC has an extension possibility for stiction compensation, see
Compensator on page 149. The analog
output may also be supervised in bar graphs or histograms and controlled manually in a interaction window.
AnalogOutCC often succeeds a PID control module.
(1)
Control Module Types on page 315 .
Backtracking function in analog output objects
A backtracking function can be activated in Local mode via the parameter
FeedbackPos. A local value from (for example) a level indicator can be sent (via an analog input object) with ControlConnection back to the analog output object's backtracking function.
This function will provide a bumpless transfer when the analog output object switches back from local mode to auto mode.
This function is valid for SignalOutReal(M), SignalSimpleOutReal(M) and
AnalogOutCC.
3BSE041488R101 159
Input and Output Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Type Name
ThreePosCC
ThreePosReal
Sometimes it might be desirable to convert controller output to a digital output signal, see
.
In some cases, PulseWidthCC or ThreePosCC can be used for signal handling.
ThreePosCC or PulseWidthCC usually follow upon a PID control module.
Table 15. Standard library types for digital output signals.
PulseWidthCC
Library
Standard
Control
Standard
Control
Simple
Control
Type
Control module
Control module
Function block
Description
ThreePosCC should be used as the end of a three-position control loop. (This is described in
more detail in section Additional Control Functions on page 148. One digital output is used to
increase the output signal and another digital output is used to decrease the output signal. The digital outputs cannot be activated at the same time and when there is no need to change the output, neither of them is activated.
PulseWidthCC converts the analog signal from the control loop into a digital output signal. The digital signal is periodic with a selectable pulse width proportional to the value of the analog signal.
ThreePosReal is a three-position converter from a real input to two Boolean outputs (increase/ decrease), similar to the ThreePosCC control module. The function block can be used with or without feedback from the actuator.
160 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Input and Output Signal Handling
Manual-Auto Control
The ManualAutoCC control module lets you view the status of a signal of
ControlConnection data type, at any location, but preferably before an output, and then change its value in Manual mode.
Table 16. Standard library objects for Manual-Auto control.
Type Name Library
ManualAutoCC Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Description
ManualAutoCC makes is possible to enter values manually into a control loop, for example, range, units of measurement or limits, and to supervise the control values graphically in bar graphs and trim curves.
Normally, ManualAutoCC is configured in series on the ControlConnection line between two other control modules. If ManualAutoCC is located first in a control loop, it can be in Manual mode only, and when located last in a control loop, it can be in
Auto mode only.
After many different calculations, the unit of measurement of a signal may require simplification, which can be entered in a
ManualAutoCC control module.
3BSE041488R101 161
162
Supervision Section 4 Analog Process Control
Supervision
A level detector is a trip switch (low or high) for supervision of an analog signal. A low-level trip indicates when the input signal drops below any of several defined low detect levels, and a high trip correspondingly indicates when the supervised signal exceeds any of several defined high detect levels.
Table 17. Standard library types for supervision .
Type Name Library Type Description
LevelHigh and
LevelLow
SignalReal
Basic Function block
LevelHigh and LevelLow are trip switches for the supervision of an analog signal of real type at an optional number of levels.
SignalLib Function block
The input signal may be given a certain degree of hysteresis, which prevents the level detector output signal from repeatedly changing state when the supervised input signal varies near the detection level.
SignalReal has an analog input and an output, both of real data type, with several supervision functions, such as alarm and event levels, and interaction windows. The input and output are intended to be connected to real variables in an application.
SignalRealCalcOutM
(1)
SignalLib Control
Module
SignalRealCalcOutM is a version of SignalReal that handles input connections from a vote control module. Input/Output is ControlConnection.
SignalRealCalcInM
(1)
SignalLib Control
Module
SignalRealCalcInM is a version of SignalReal that handles connections to a vote control module.
Input/Output is ControlConnection.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Supervision
Table 17. Standard library types for supervision (Continued).
Type Name Library Type Description
SignalBool SignalLib Function block
SignalBool has a digital input and an output, both of bool data type, with several alarm and event functions when input value differs from normal value, and interaction windows. The input and output are intended to be connected to bool variables in an application.
SignalBoolCalcOutM
(1)
SignalLib Control module
SignalBoolCalcOutM is a version of SignalBool that handles input connections from a vote control module. Input/output is of Boolconnection.
SignalBoolCalcInM
(1)
SignalLib Control module
SignalBoolCalcInM s a version of SignalBool that handles connections to a vote control module.
Input/output is of Boolconnection.
3BSE041488R101 163
164
Supervision Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 17. Standard library types for supervision (Continued).
Library Type Description Type Name
Level6CC
(1)
Control
Standard
Control module
Level6CC is a supervisor object for level detection of a ControlConnection signal with six configurable alarm and event detection levels:
H (High), HH, HHH, L (Low), LL, and LLL.
Supervision may be absolute or relative to a reference signal. Level6CC also has hysteresis and filter time for alarm and event levels.
The H and L levels are mainly used for logical circuits. The HH and LL levels are intended to be used as conditions for alarm generation. The HHH and LLL levels are intended to stop processes, but there are no limitations on their use.
All levels may generate alarms. The presentation color of levels and graphs is defined by project constants. Each level has a logical color, and for each color, there is a color setting. See online help for more information.
Three information types are given for each level: alarm condition state, a Boolean alarm condition parameter, a presentation signal of Level6Connection type.
The latter, which is parameter connected only, may be used in control objects, in analog and digital interface control modules, and in ManualAutoCC, to show alarm levels in graph windows.
Level6CC handles connections to vote control module.
Level4CC
Level2CC
(1)
(1)
and Control
Standard
Control module
Level4CC and Level2CC are simplified versions of
Level6CC, restricted to 4 and 2 levels, respectively.
These types consume less memory and should be used when 4 or 2 level supervision is enough.
Level4CC and Level2CC handles connections to vote control module.
(1)
See also Vote Control Module Types on page 315
.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Supervision
Signal Quality and Status
The supervision of signal quality and handling of signal errors from, for example, a transmitter, or from the I/O interface system, is important in many processes.
Normally, the quality of a signal has its origin in the signal interface. The quality of a signal is defined as either GOOD, UNCERTAIN or BAD. A signal underflow or overflow gives an UNCERTAIN signal quality. A hardware error gives a BAD signal quality.
Table 18. Standard library objects for signal quality supervision.
Type Name
SignalSupervisionCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Description
•
SignalSupervisionCC supervises the
ControlConnection signal quality and handles signal errors with configurable alarm and event
• settings. SignalSupervisionCC has three different modes.
• Through mode lets the signal pass without any action.
Freeze mode may freeze the output. If the input signal is not of GOOD quality, the output is frozen and an alarm is given.
Predetermined mode. If the input signal is not of GOOD quality, the output is set to a preset value and an alarm is given. The predetermined value is reached by ramping.
3BSE041488R101 165
166
Calculation Section 4 Analog Process Control
Calculation
There are a large number of system functions and control modules for mathematical calculations of signals as well as mean, median and majority calculations.
Table 19. Standard library objects for mathematical calculations.
Type Name Library
MedianReal and
MedianDint
Basic
MajorityReal Basic
AddCC
SubCC
MultCC
Extended
Control
Extended
Control
Extended
Control
XRaisedToYCC Extended
Control
SqrtCC Extended
Control
DivCC Extended
Control
Control module
Control module
Control module
Control module
Control module
Control module
Type
Function block
Function block
Description
MedianReal and MedianDint calculate the median value of an optional number of input values of real and dint types, respectively.
MajorityReal calculates the mean value of a number of signals of the real type, within a selectable deviation value.
MajorityReal can, for example, be used to exclude a divergent value in a redundant calculation or to measure a number of signals.
AddCC executes the addition Out = In1 + In2.
SubCC executes the subtraction Out = In1 - In2.
MultCC executes the multiplication Out = In1 * In2.
XRaisedToYCC executes the xy function Out =
In1 raised to the power of In2.
SqrtCC executes the square root Out = Sqrt(In).
DivCC executes the division Out = In1 / In2.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Calculation
Table 19. Standard library objects for mathematical calculations.
Type Name
Mean4Exclude
BadCC
Mean8Exclude
BadCC
Mean12Exclude
BadCC
Library
Extended
Control
Type
Control module
Description
Bad values collected by several transmitters can be excluded by using MeanXExcludeBadCC control modules to analyze the status and value of a signal.
Which module type to use depends on the number of input signals.
Bad signals are excluded, and the mean value is calculated for the remaining signals.
If status is not GOOD or if a value is extreme, it is omitted. The mean value of the remaining inputs is then taken as the output value. When only one valid input value exists, this value is used as the output signal. If no input signal is accepted, the output is a value with status BAD.
For example, this might be useful when a number of temperature transmitters are placed at the bottom of a boiler, and some have been covered with dust, and therefore return significantly higher or lower values than the others.
MeanXExcludeBadCC may also be used for processing values to controllers.
3BSE041488R101 167
168
Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Signal Handling
Type Name
DerivativeReal
Derivative Objects
Derivative objects are normally used to detect changes in a signal, to predict a control activity. A derivative object may also act as a high-pass filter.
Table 20. Derivative standard library objects.
DerivativeCC
Library
Simple
Control
Type
Function block
Extended
Control
Control module
Description
DerivativeReal is a combined first-order, low-pass filter and a differentiator. The filter is used to smoothen the derivative action. The output may be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless. The transition to the tracking value is dependent on the deviation from the current output value when tracking is enabled.
DerivativeReal and DerivativeCC (below) have similar functionality.
DerivativeCC is a derivative control module with adjustable filter time. The input is filtered by a firstorder, low-pass filter which determines the time during which the derivative action is to decline.
The sampling time must be considerably shorter than the filter time, at least 3 to 10 times. The filter output is then differentiated.
During feedforward control, when the signal changes, there is a need for an amplification of short duration. The DerivativeCC filter can be used to smoothen the derivative action.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Handling
Integrator Objects
Integrators accumulate the input signals and present the sum as an output. For instance, a flow may be integrated, in order to compute a volume. The input signal is integrated as long as the integrator is enabled. See
.
Output signal
∫
In
Set at a level
Set to a preset value
Enable=
FALSE
Time
Type Name
IntegratorReal
Figure 76. The integrator function sums the input signal (In) value over time.
Table 21. Integrator standard library objects.
Library Type Description
Simple Function The IntegratorReal output can be limited, and may
Control block be forced to track an external signal. Transitions from tracking and limiting are bumpless. Further increase or decrease of the output can be inhibited. At reset, the integral part is set to zero.
IntegratorCC Extended
Control
Control module
IntegratorCC offers the same functions as the
IntegratorReal function block type.
It can also be reset to a selectable, predetermined output value.
3BSE041488R101 169
170
Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Type Name
FlowCC
Flow Calculation
Flow measurements can be made by meters giving an analog signal directly proportional to the flow, or by differential pressure measurement across a measuring flange.
Table 22. Standard library objects for flow calculation.
Library
Extended
Control
Type
Control module
Description
FlowCC calculates a flow directly proportional to the flow, or by differential pressure measurement across a measuring flange.
FlowCC has compensation inputs for the surrounding temperature and pressure. Given the maximum flow, the flow can be calibrated for other operational cases with real measurements.
calculations, or as a process value in a controller.
FlowCC may be used as input to various
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Handling
Signal Reshaping
If a transmitter signal is non-linear, a piecewise linear signal object can be used to reshape and linearize it. Linearization is performed before the signal is connected to the controller or a calculator function. A piecewise linear signal object is also useful in cases of non-linear relations between values in one or two dimensions, for example, absolute and relative humidity, or pressure versus density for a liquid or for steam.
Table 23. Standard library objects for flow signal reshaping.
Type Name
PiecewiseLinearReal
Description Library Type
Simple
Control
Function block
PiecewiseLinearReal has a number of predefined input-output pairs. Values between these pairs are calculated by linear interpolation.
PiecewiseLinearReal can be used to define a nonlinear function y=f(x). The maximum number of data points is 21, and there is an interaction window making data input easier. Intervals between different break points do not have to be equal.
X values must be increasing. Below the first point, and above the last point, linear extrapolation to infinity is used. The pseudo inverse of the defined function can be calculated for a given input.
PiecewiseLinear2DReal Simple
Control
Function block
The PiecewiseLinear2DReal function block type takes two inputs, which means that a non-linear surface, z=f(x,y) can be specified. The restriction on the x, and the y values is that they must be increasing. A maximum of 21 x values and 11 y values can be specified, that is 231 data points.
An interaction window can be used to edit the data.
The functionality of PiecewiseLinear2DReal is the same as for the PiecewiseLinear2DCC control module below.
3BSE041488R101 171
172
Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 23. Standard library objects for flow signal reshaping.
Type Name
PiecewiseLinearCC
Library Type
Extended
Control
Control module
PiecewiseLinearExtension Extended
Control
Control module
Extended
Control
Control module
Description
PiecewiseLinearCC has the same functions as the PiecewiseLinearReal (see above).
If a transmitter signal is non-linear,
PiecewiseLinearCC can be used to linearize it.
Linearization is performed before the signal is connected to a controller. The controller can then be tuned for optimized function, independent of the non-linearity of the transmitter. If, in the future, the transmitter is replaced, the new one may have other characteristics. The new function, given in the transmitter manufacturer’s technical information data sheet, may then be entered in this PiecewiseLinearCC control module and the control loop will work the same with the new transmitter.
You can also connect PiecewiseLinearCC to a controller output to linearize a non-linear valve characteristic.
PiecewiseLinearExtension modules are used as add-ons to PiecewiseLinearCC, in order to add multiples of 20 points, for large numbers of data.
PiecewiseLinear2DCC has the same functions as
PiecewiseLinear2DReal (see above).
PiecewiseLinear2DCC
The above control modules are suitable for changing signals according to nonlinear static functions.
A setpoint curve may be generated by a PiecewiseLinearCC control module to a succeeding controller by having a preceding IntegratorCC control module.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Handling
The inverse of the f(In) function can be calculated with the InInverse and OutInverse parameters:
• The relation is OutInverse = f
--1
(InInverse). The inverse calculation is performed on the specified data points, where OutInverse is in the interval x1 - xn, and xn is the last point used. All functions can of course not be inverted. In such cases a pseudo inverse is calculated using the curve between the maximum and minimum defined values of y.
• If the inverse is still not unique, the smallest value is chosen. This is illustrated in
, which shows the inverse calculation for two different InInverse values, y1 and y2. For y1 there are two possible inverse values. The rightmost is chosen, since the inverse is calculated from the curve between the maximum and minimum values. For y2, there are four possible inverse values, three of which are inside the inverse range. The leftmost of these is chosen. If InInverse is greater than the maximum defined value of y or less than the minimum minimum value respectively.
defined value of y, the inverse calculation is based on using the maximum or
Figure 77. Calculation of the inverse function f(x).
3BSE041488R101 173
Signal Handling Section 4 Analog Process Control
Type Name
FilterReal
Filter2Real
LeadLagReal
FilterCC
Filters
First-order, low-pass filters can be used to, for example, reduce the amount of highfrequency noise in analog signals created by an analog transmitter or the control system environment. A filtering time can be set.
Table 24. Standard library objects for filtering.
Library
Simple
Control
Simple
Control
Simple
Control
Extended
Control
Type
Function block
Function block
Function block
Control module
Description
FilterReal is a single-pole low-pass filter. The transfer function is:
G(s) = 1 / (1 + s*FiltT)
where FiltT is the filter time constant.
Filter2PReal is a low-pass filter with one zero and two complex poles. Their outputs can be forced to track an external signal. The transition from tracking is bumpless. The transfer function is
G(s) = (1+s*ZFiltT) /
(1+ s*2*Damping*PFiltT+s2*PFiltT2)
where ZFiltT is the time constant for the derivation. Damping is the damping factor and
PFiltT is 1/the resonance angular frequency.
LeadLagReal is used as a lead or a lag function, that is, a derivative or an integration limiter, respectively, determined by the relation between two input time constants. LeadLagReal, of real type, can be forced to track an external signal and the transition from tracking is bumpless. The transfer function is:
G(s) = (1+s*LeadT)/(1+s*LagT)
where LeadT is the time constant for the derivative lead and LagT is the time constant for the integration lag.
FilterCC is a first-order, low-pass filter for
ControlConnection signals. The transfer function is the same as in FilterReal (see above).
174 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Handling
Type Name
Filter2PCC
Table 24. Standard library objects for filtering.
Library
Extended
Control
Type
Control module
LeadLagRealCC Extended
Control
Control module
Description
Filter2PCC is a low-pass filter with one zero and two complex poles. The transfer function is the same as in Filter2PReal (see above).
LeadLagRealCC has the same functions and transfer function as LeadLagReal (see above).
Type Name
DelayCC
Low-pass filter control modules may be used to flatten a signal step with a high derivative component into a continuous signal, without steps. This filter function
is also included in the analog input control module described in Input and Output
Delays
Dead-time control and loop calculation are required in control systems with long transport lags, such as conveyor feed systems.
Table 25. Standard library objects for signal delays.
Library
Extended
Control
Type
Control module
Description
DelayCC, in combination with other control loop control modules, delays a ControlConnection signal for a predetermined time. The delay time may also be a calculated variable, or a controller output.
3BSE041488R101 175
Branch Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
Branch Objects
There are a number of branch objects that split signals into two or several branches and manage different aspects of the splitting procedure.
Also, many processes work with large differences in product flows. It may then be necessary to use two valves in parallel, one for small flows and one for large flows.
In other processes, there might be a need to split a signal into two branches, one slow and one fast.
To ensure that two process valves working in parallel, together give the required flow a signal range might need to be divided into two output signal ranges, each of which is an output part of the input signal.
The Control libraries contain a number of types for these purposes.
Table 26. Standard library signal branch objects.
Type Name
BranchCC
Branch4CC
SplitRangeCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Standard
Control
Control module
Description
BranchCC and Branch4CC split a signal of
ControlConnection type into two or four branches, respectively, with output signals equal to the input signal, with the same backtracking functions.
A signal of ControlConnection type can be duplicated for calculation with several other signals using these control modules.
A measured signal value can be duplicated for use as an input signal to several controllers using these control modules.
SplitRangeCC splits the output signal to the valves into two output signal ranges; one branch for each valve. You can scale the output signal ranges independently.
A SplitRangeCC split range control module can be used in a controller output signal.
176 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Branch Objects
Table 26. Standard library signal branch objects.
Type Name
MidRangeCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
CommonRangeCC Standard
Control
Control module
Description
MidRangeCC splits a ControlConnection signal into two branches, one slow and one fast branch.
For example, if two valves act in parallel on the same flow, there is a need to split a signal into two branches. One valve may be bigger and slower and have a larger operating range. The other may be small and fast and used to control small perturbations in the flow.
The fast branch reacts faster to changes in the signal and then works around an approximate middle setpoint for its operating range. Meanwhile, the slower branch takes control.
CommonRangeCC splits a ControlConnection signal into two branches which, when added together, give the value of the input signal.
CommonRangeCC is used to ensure that two valves in parallel, with a specified ratio between the outputs, give the required flow, when added.
The input signal range is divided into two output signal ranges, each of which is an output part of the input signal, for example, in a 20/80% ratio.
If one output signal is in Manual mode and is changed (for example, 20% is changed to 10%), the other output signal overrides its default value
(80%) and sets its output to 90% in order to maintain the total output (100%).
CommonRangeCC can also be used for quotient control. In such applications the input for the first output is connected to an output from a quotient controller. The input is connected to an output from a controller for the addition of the outputs.
3BSE041488R101 177
Branch Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
Type Name
TapCC
TapRealCC
Signal Tapping
There are functions for tapping off signals in the same signal range. One function taps off signals of the ControlConnection type. Another can tap off signals of the
real type from a signal of the ControlConnection type. A signal tap is a kind of listening control module on the main signal flow. The tapped signal is an exact copy of the input signal. Modules connected to the tap output must not, under any circumstances, influence the main signal flow.
Table 27. Standard library objects for signal tapping.
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Standard
Control
Control module
Description
TapCC divides a ControlConnection signal into two branches, where one has backtracking capability, and the other does not. The latter is called the tapped signal.
Use this control module type with care.
TapRealCC extracts the value component, as an exact copy, from a ControlConnection signal to a real value. Use this control module type with care.
Use TapRealCC to use extract the real value of a signal in, for example, calculations.
178 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Branch Objects
Type Name
DeMuxReal
DeMuxDint
DeMuxBool
Demultiplexors
A demultiplexor has one input and several outputs. It is possible to select the output that will forward the input value.
Table 28. Standard library objects for demultiplexing.
Library
Basic
Type
Function block
Description
DeMuxReal, DeMuxDint, and DeMuxBool are used as demultiplexors with one input and an optional number of outputs, for the real, dint, and bool data types, respectively.
These function blocks are suitable in signal handling when a signal is forwarded to several users of the signal one at the same time.
In control loops working with function blocks a controllers one at a time.
signal may, for example, be distributed to several
3BSE041488R101 179
180
Selector Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
Selector Objects
In signal handling and in control loop applications it is often necessary to choose between two or more signals. This subsection describes a number of functions, function blocks and control modules for this purpose.
Table 29. Standard functions and library objects for signal selection .
Type Name
sel mux
Description Library Type
(system function)
Function sel selects one signal of two depending on whether a given expression is evaluated as True or False.
mux works as a multiplexor, with several inputs and one output, of most data types, but inputs have to be of the same type. The user selects the input signal to be forwarded to the output.
For signal handling, it is sufficient to use the sel or
mux system functions, for example, to select a signal for indication.
When choosing between signals from, for example, two controllers, consider that the non-selected signal branch is open, and no information is sent backwards. This may require some means to remedy controller output signal drifting, such as backtracking.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Selector Objects
Table 29. Standard functions and library objects for signal selection (Continued).
Type Name
SelectorCC
Selector4CC
SelectGoodCC
SelectGood4CC
Library Type
Standard
Control
Control module
Standard
Control
Control module
Description
The SelectorCC and Selector4CC selector control modules select one of two or several inputs, of
ControlConnection type, for example, setpoints.
In SelectorCC you select which of two input signals is allowed through, by means of a Boolean signal.
To select between four input signals a Selector4CC selector control module with four inputs is used. For more than four input signals, several Selector4CC control modules can be connected in a chain.
The output of the first Selector4CC goes to the input of the second, and so on. By means of an integer signal going to and between the control modules it is possible to select which of the input signals to allow through.
For signal handling only it is possible to use the
SelectorCC and Selector4CC selector control modules.
High demands on information in both directions are fulfilled. For example, backtracking of the notselected inputs is supported automatically.
The SelectGoodCC and SelectGood4CC control modules can be used for selection of the first GOOD signal between either two or up to four inputs of
ControlConnection type. If no GOOD signal exists, the output used is a copy of the first input.
For signal handling only, it is possible to use the
SelectorGoodCC and SelectorGood4CC selector control modules.
High demands on information in both directions are fulfilled. For example, backtracking of the notselected inputs is supported automatically.
An I/O signal is considered to be GOOD when there is no overflow, no underflow and no missing interface.
3BSE041488R101 181
182
Selector Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 29. Standard functions and library objects for signal selection (Continued).
Type Name
max min
MaxReal
MaxDint
MinReal
MinDint
Library Type
(system function)
Function
Description
max and min select the signal with the maximum or the minimum value. max and min are extensible for several input signals of many types, but the compared signals have to be of the same type.
Basic Function block
MaxReal, MaxDint, MinReal, and MinDint select the input signal with the maximum or the minimum value among an optional number of inputs. The selected input is written to the output signal.
The MaxReal, MaxDint, MinReal, and MinDint function blocks compare signals of real or dint type.
The function blocks also have a dead zone functionality for the inputs and an output that specifies the chosen input. Observe that the output signal will be discontinuous if the dead zone differs from zero (0).
For signal handling only it is sufficient to use the min or max system functions or the MaxReal, MaxDint,
MinReal, or MinDint function blocks.
When the signal selection involves controllers in a control loop, high demands on information through the signals are required, for example, when using function blocks to solve a selection of controller outputs for override control of a heat pump.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Selector Objects
Table 29. Standard functions and library objects for signal selection (Continued).
Type Name
MaxCC
Max4CC
MinCC
Min4CC
Library Type
Standard
Control
Control module
Description
MaxCC, Max4CC, MinCC, and Min4CC calculate and select the maximum and minimum value of 2, 3, or 4 input ControlConnection signals with a certain tolerance. The selected input is written to the output signal.
For MinCC and Min4CC, the value of inputs that are not connected to the output is limited. If they deviate more than their tolerance, their value is limited to the output plus the tolerance. In this way, the output of preceding modules is limited to the output plus the tolerance.
As long as an input is within its tolerance, no value is sent to preceding control modules.
The same thing applies for MaxCC and Max4CC, but with the opposite functionality.
MaxCC, Max4CC, MinCC, and Min4CC can be used for signal handling.
The MinCC and Min4CC selector control modules select the minimum value of two and up to four connected input signals, respectively. MaxCC and Max4CC select the maximum value of two and up to four connected input signals, respectively. At least two inputs have to be connected but unconnected inputs are not considered in the selection. The inputs may have different measuring ranges.
If the output is backtracked from succeeding control modules all connected inputs are backtracked to the same value.
The user defines a tolerance for each input. An unselected input can deviate at most by that tolerance from the output. When an input is limited by the tolerance, that input value is sent to preceding control modules having an internal state. No value is sent backward as long as the input is within its tolerance from the output.
Assume for a MinCC that input one is the minimum signal and is consequently sent to the output.
3BSE041488R101 183
184
Selector Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
To avoid input two drifting away it is limited by its tolerance from the output. If input two exceeds the output plus the input two tolerance, input two is limited to that value. This means that outputs of preceding control modules with internal states do not exceed that limited input two value. Consequently, if the input two value is within its tolerance of the output signal, no value is sent to preceding control modules. The opposite is true if instead input two signal is the smallest.
The same is valid for MaxCC. It selects the maximum of two input signals and sends it to the output. Accordingly, if the smaller input signal reaches its tolerance limit, the smaller input is assigned the output signal value minus its tolerance value.
This means that outputs of preceding control modules with internal states do not fall below that limited input two value.
In control modules with four inputs the discussion is exactly the same. The three unselected inputs are treated in the same way as described above. These control modules can be used if, for example, controllers are connected to the inputs. The unselected controller output signal will stay close (differing by the tolerance at most) to the selected controller output. It is then ready to be the active controller.
See the example for maximum and minimum selectors.
Do not set the tolerance values too low. Problems may occur if any of the input signals starts to oscillate or has a noise jamming overlay. If the tolerance parameters are set too narrow and a controller starts to oscillate, with an amplitude greater than the tolerance, problems may occur. The output signal from
MaxCC and Max4CC can start to "integrate" up to 100% (MinCC and Min4CC lead to integration to 0).
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Limiter Objects
Limiter Objects
In many cases it is necessary to limit a signal value, or to limit the rate of change of a signal.
Table 30. Standard library objects for limiting a signal .
Type Name
limit
Library
(system function)
VelocityLimiter
Real
Simple
Control
Type Description
Function limit works as a delimiter between a set minimum and a set maximum signal value of several data types. If the input is smaller than or equal to the minimum value, the output is assigned the minimum value.
Function block
If the input is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the output is assigned the maximum value. An input value between the minimum and a maximum values is not changed.
VelocityLimiterReal is a ramp function that is used to limit the velocity of change for a signal of real type. The output can be forced to track an external signal and the transition from tracking is bumpless.
3BSE041488R101 185
Limiter Objects Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 30. Standard library objects for limiting a signal (Continued).
Type Name
AccelerationLim
Real
Library
Simple
Control
Type
Function block
Description
AccelerationLimReal is a ramp function that is used to limit the velocity and acceleration of change for an input signal of real type.
The maximum acceleration is given as the time allowed from steady state to maximum velocity of the output signal.
It is also possible to configure
AccelerationLimReal so that overshoots are minimized when the input is changed in discrete steps. The output may also be tracked and held at a certain value.
For signal handling only it is sufficient to use the
limit system functions or VelocityLimiterReal and
AccelerationLimReal.
When the limiter involves controllers in a control loop, high demands are placed on information through the signals.
186 3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Limiter Objects
Table 30. Standard library objects for limiting a signal (Continued).
Type Name
LimiterCC
LimiterHighCC
LimiterLowCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
VelocityLimiterCC Standard
Control
Control module
Description
LimiterCC keeps the signal between a high limit and a low limit. LimiterCC is, in the first place, used to set high and low limits on the output from controllers. The controller itself has changeable limits on its output, but in a loop with one or more control modules on the controller output, the limitation is often required at the end of a chain of control modules.
LimiterHighCC and LimiterLowCC maintain the signal below a high limit and above a low limit, respectively.
The Limiter types have no internal state and cannot allow backtracking from the output, unless a preceding control module has the feature. If a high or low limit is reached, information is sent backward to preceding control modules to prevent the input from being increased. An output also indicates that the limit has been reached. If a succeeding control module orders this control module into Backtracking mode, this order is also transferred to preceding control modules.
VelocityLimiterCC is used to limit the change rate of an increasing or decreasing signal. This will slow down changes in the output signal. The maximum rate of change for increasing and decreasing signals can be set independently. The output follows the input signal but the rate of change is limited. If the input signal changes faster than the output is allowed to change, the change rate of the output will be constant until the output has reached the input value.
3BSE041488R101 187
188
Conversion Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 30. Standard library objects for limiting a signal (Continued).
Type Name
Acceleration
LimCC
Library
Standard
Control
Type
Control module
Description
AccelerationLimCC is a ramp function that is used to limit the velocity and acceleration of change for an input signal of ControlConnection type. The maximum acceleration is given as the time allowed from steady state to maximum velocity of the output signal.
It is also possible to configure AccelerationLimCC so that overshoots are minimized when the input is changed in discrete steps. The output may also be tracked and held at a certain value.
Conversion
The conversion function blocks in the Basic library convert signals of various data types to and from signals of other data types.
The conversion control modules in the Standard Control library convert data types used in control loops to and from other data types for connections to application programs. These control modules are like an adaptor interface between an ordinary data type signal and a control loop signal of ControlConnection data type.
The following conversion functions are available. See also online help for detailed information on individual objects (select the object in Project Explorer and press
F1).
Table 31. Conversion objects in standard libraries
Conversion of
Signal Data Type
ControlConnection to real
ControlConnection to integer
Function Block
Type
Control Module
Type
Explanation
CCToReal
CCToInteger
Convert a ControlConnection signal to a real signal.
Convert a ControlConnection signal to an integer signal.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Conversion
Table 31. (Continued)Conversion objects in standard libraries (Continued)
Conversion of
Signal Data Type
real to
ControlConnection
Manual control of
ControlConnection
Function Block
Type
Control Module
Type
Explanation
RealToCC Add a real signal to a
ControlConnection signal.
ManualAutoCC Use ManualAutoCC to manually control or to view the status of a ControlConnection signal, at any location.
RealIO to integer RealIOToInteger
Integer to RealIO
Binary code to dint
dint to Binary code
First of N to
dint
IntegerToRealIO
BcToDint
DintToBc
FirstOfNToDint value to an integer value in the range 0-65535.
Converts an integer value in the range 0-65535 to a scaled
RealIO value with a measuring range, units and decimals.
Can be treated as a physical
RealIO value in the application.
Converts data from an optional number of binary coded
Boolean inputs and a sign input into a dint.
Converts data from dint to an optional number of Boolean outputs, using binary coded conversion, and a sign output.
Converts data from 1-of-N format with an optional number of Boolean inputs and a sign input, into a dint.
3BSE041488R101 189
190
Conversion Section 4 Analog Process Control
Table 31. (Continued)Conversion objects in standard libraries (Continued)
Conversion of
Signal Data Type
dint
to first of N
NBCD to
dint dint
to NBCD
Function Block
Type
DintToFirstOfN
NBcdToDint
DintToNBcd
Gray code to
dint
GrayToDint
Control Module
Type
Explanation
Converts data from dint to an optional number of Boolean outputs using 1-of-N conversion, and a sign output.
Converts data from an optional number of Boolean inputs in groups of four, coded as BCD, and a sign input, into a dint.
Converts from dint to an optional number of Boolean inputs in groups of four, coded as BCD, and a sign output.
Converts data from gray code with an optional number of
Boolean inputs and a sign input, into a dint.
There are more functions for similar conversions in the Basic library. See online help for complete information.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Miscellaneous Objects
Miscellaneous Objects
There are some additional types in the standard libraries that are useful when building control loops.
Table 32. Standard library objects for demultiplexing.
Type Name
StateCC
Threshold Basic
Library
Extended
Control
Type
Control module
Function block
Description
StateCC is used to break up control loops and create one scan delay. (For simple data types this problem is solved by means of variable:new and variable:old.)
StateCC is needed since it is not possible to break code loops in a controller loop consisting of control modules only.
StateCC delays the forward and backward components by one cycle scan. StateCC does not influence either the forward or the backward component of ControlConnection.
StateCC is normally not used, because the system does not check that the code is executed in the correct order. However, if you are forced to break the automatic sorting of the input to output order and you have to make a connection of
ControlConnection type backwards in the control loop, it is possible to use it.
Do not use StateCC in any other case.
Threshold can have an extensible number of inputs. Threshold determines when more than, or equal to, a given number of Boolean input values are True.
3BSE041488R101 191
192
Basic Control Loop Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
Basic Control Loop Examples
This sub section contains a number of examples that have been included to show how to implement analog process control using objects from the Control libraries, and to illustrate some important concepts and relations:
• Basic Control Loop Examples show two basic cascade loops, and an input selection function, all based on types from the Control libraries.
The following two examples show cascade loops built from basic components in the
Control libraries.
Cascade Loop with Functions and Function Blocks
Figure 78. Example of a cascade control loop consisting of function blocks, with signal ranges added.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control
Cascade Loop with Control Modules
Signal Selection Example
Figure 79. Example of a cascade control loop consisting of control modules.
Signal Selection Example
When signal selection involves controllers in a control loop, higher demands are placed on the signal information. Use the MaxCC, Max4CC, MinCC, and Min4CC control modules for selection. This example shows how to use the control module
Max4CC to select between the input from several control loops.
Information backward (backtracking), units of measurement and range, etc., transferred using structured signals of ControlConnection type, and in the control modules for these purposes. Information on which signal is selected is also given. If the output is backtracked from succeeding control modules, all connected inputs are backtracked to the same value.
3BSE041488R101 193
Signal Selection Example Section 4 Analog Process Control
194
Figure 80. Example of a Max4CC control module with inputs from controller outputs.
In
, controller PID1 has no control deviation, its inputs are stable and the
PID1 output signal is constant. The other three controllers have a control deviation causing the controller outputs to show a decreasing tendency. This situation will force each of the non-selected PID2, PID3, and PID4 outputs to a value, assigned for each input to Max4CC, close to the selected controller output determined by the
PID1 output minus the tolerance value. The controller output signals will then remain close to the selected controller output, ready to be the selected one. For example, if you use control modules to solve a selection of controller outputs for override control of a heat pump, the solution with a minimum selector control
module may be as shown in Figure 81 .
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Signal Selection Example
Master controllers
Minimum selector
Slave controller
Figure 81. Example using control modules for override control in a heat pump using a minimum selector control module.
All the components of ControlConnection are transmitted unaffected between the selected master controller and the slave controller. The backward component, of the non-selected inputs to the minimum selector are computed from the forward components of the selected input in such a way that integrator wind-up is managed, even in noisy cases. The inputs to the minimum selector are computed from the backward components of the slave controller output in order to handle bumpless transfer when the slave controller goes from manual to automatic mode.
In the forward direction, the range of measurement of the minimum selector output is computed as the union of the ranges of the minimum selector inputs. In the backward direction, the range of measurement of the output is transmitted to all the inputs.
3BSE041488R101 195
196
Common Range Example Section 4 Analog Process Control
Common Range Example
A CommonRangeCC control module is used to ensure that two valves in parallel together give the required flow. The signal is divided into two output signals that each transmit part of the input signal. The two output signals also work together in the following way. If one is in Manual mode, the other output signal takes over and compensates its output signal so that the sum of the output signals becomes equal to the input signal. The ratio between the output signals may be selected from the interaction window, or, from an input of ControlConnection type. This allows the output signal's quotient to be controlled according to the example in the figure below.
Split Range Examples
Example 1
describes the conditions in a SplitRangeCC control module when the input value giving the maximum output 1 is greater than the input value giving minimum output 1, that is imax1 > imin1. The input value giving maximum output
2 is also greater than the input value giving minimum output 2, that is imax2 > imin2.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Split Range Examples
3BSE041488R101
Figure 82. Split range
Example 2
An example of a case in which the SplitRangeCC control module may be used is
heating or cooling of a material flow. In the setup illustrated below in Figure 83
, there are two valves, one for the cooling medium and one for the heating medium. If both valves are closed, there is no need to change the temperature. A low-level input signal means cooling and a high-level signal means heating.
In the temperature control case, imin1 and imin2 may be equal so that heating takes over when cooling stops.
197
Split Range Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
198
Figure 83.
In applications such as this, the input value giving the maximum value of output 1 is smaller than the input value giving the minimum value of output 1, that is imax1 < imin1. When the input value giving maximum output 2 is greater than the input value giving minimum output 2, that is imax2 > imin2, the conditions are as shown in
. However, imin1 and imin2 are not equal, as suggested above. The figure shows possible overlapping valve openings.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Level Detection Example
Figure 84.
Level Detection Example
A level detection example with a Level4CC control module type is described in the following figure. The alarm conditions are shown at the various HH, H and L, LL levels, with their common hysteresis, of the In minus (-) the Reference signal.
FilterTime is the common time-delay for the alarms. The two HHH and LLL levels are not shown.
3BSE041488R101 199
Level Detection Example Section 4 Analog Process Control
200
Figure 85. Level Detection example
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Application Examples
Application Examples
The examples in this section are installed with your Compact Control Builder. They are located in the ControlExamples folder which is installed in the Examples folder.
For more information on how to open the examples, see the manual Basic
Control Software, Introduction and Configuration.
The control loop example applications all reside in the TankControl project, which is created when the ControlExamples file is imported. Each application is implemented in four ways, using:
• control modules
• function blocks
• control modules in a function block
• a control loop function block.
The variables of each application are connected to simulated processes, with I/O
Control application Simulated process and I/O units
PID or Fuzzy controller
Output interf.
I/O unit
Input interf.
Process
I/O unit
Figure 86. The principle for control applications, the simulated processes and I/O units.
The first application example consists of basic, simple control loops. The second example is based on the simple example but expanded to include a cascade controller. The third application example has fuzzy controllers. See
The processes used in the examples are simulated process models, all designed by means of control modules. The process object models, such as the tanks and valves, have their own interaction windows. The advanced user may then alter these objects and see the resulting behavior of the control loop.
3BSE041488R101 201
202
Application Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
The simulated process object models with I/O units designed by means of control modules
Control modules
A code block with function blocks
A code block with control modules in a function block
A code block with a control loop function block
Figure 87. The four methods of designing an application and the simulated process.
The purpose of these control loop examples is to show the functions of the function blocks and control modules from the Control libraries, and their use. It is assumed that the user has basic knowledge about the system, Project Explorer and application graphics, as well as general knowledge about process control systems.
The purpose is also to show the user how to use controller interaction windows, perform tuning and parameter settings, apply and view the result of disturbances, etc. The examples will increase your understanding of the process dynamics. Run the TankControl project and gradually find and explore the features on your own.
If you want to construct a similar control system application yourself, start from these control examples. You may, in offline mode, also insert any of the application examples into your own project. Alternatively, you can copy some example objects, with their connections, to your own application, from an inserted application example.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Application Examples
What You Can Do?
Start the examples in offline mode, run them in test or online mode, and then perform the following operations:
• Open the interaction windows for the controllers from the Project Explorer.
• Change their internal or external setpoints.
• Go to manual mode and control the process manually.
• Tune the controllers with the Autotuner, or manually.
• Change other controller parameters.
• Change the I/O range or force an I/O signal.
• Open the interaction windows for the process objects from the application windows, and change their characteristics.
Start the Examples
This section describes the control examples in the Examples folder, which is installed with the Compact Control Builder.
Carry out the following steps to startup the examples:
• Begin with the Simple Loop example, and then go to the Cascade Loop, followed by the Fuzzy Control Loop.
• If you want to run the project in a controller, you have to select the
TankController controller and enter System Identity as the identity of the controller. In this example, an AC 800M controller with a PM860/TP830 CPU has been selected. You have to enter the same System Identity that you used for the controller as the IP address for Ethernet. You should then save the
TankController controller.
3BSE041488R101 203
204
Simple Loop Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
Simple Loop Examples
These first Simple Loop examples contain a process model tank, as shown in the figure below, connected to a level PID controller in the Project Explorer. They are also the basis for the subsequent examples. The task is to keep the level in the upper tank constant.
Figure 88. The Simple Loop application in online mode with its four methods of programming.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Simple Loop Examples
Tank Process
The example consists of two tanks. The upper tank has an inlet pipe. The flow in the inlet pipe is controlled by a control valve. The outlet from the upper tank is a free drain outlet to another lower tank, also with a free drain outlet.
The tank process is created, in each of the four methods, with control modules from the TankLib library; one control module for each tank and one for the valve, which can be seen in the Project Explorer. In the application interaction window, you have a view of the process.
The input and output of the simulation model are of real data type. Because the input and output control signals to and from the control loop are of RealIO type they are connected via control modules from the TankLib to simulate the I/O system. You can see these control module types, AnalogInIOSim and AnalogOutIOSim, in the lower left hand corners of the application window. In offline mode, you can view their connections. In test and online mode, you can view them in the interaction windows.
Simple Loop with Control Modules
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in the Applications > SimpleLoop >
Control Modules > CMLoop control module, open the interaction window of the
PIDController control module for exploration.
Simple Loop with Function Blocks
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > SimpleLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the PIDSimpleReal function block for exploration.
Simple Loop with Control Modules in Function Blocks
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > SimpleLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the CMInFBLoop function block. CMInFBLoop contains the CMLoopInFB control module which contains similar control modules to CMLoop above. Open the interaction window of the PIDController control module for exploration.
3BSE041488R101 205
Cascade Loop Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
Simple Loop with a Function Block Loop
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > SimpleLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the FBPidLoop function block, which is a ready-made complete control loop, for exploration.
Cascade Loop Examples
The Cascade Loop examples consist of two process model tanks, according to the figure below, connected to two level PID controllers in cascade in the Project
Explorer. The examples are based on the Simple Loop example above. The task is to keep the level in the lower tank constant.
206
Figure 89. The Cascade Loop application in online mode showing four methods of programming.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Cascade Loop Examples
Sp2
Pv2
Tuning of Controllers Connected in Cascade
A cascade controller consists of a combination of input and output signals and two function blocks or controller modules, connected in cascade. The output of one controller, called the master, is connected to the external setpoint of the other controller, called the slave.
Two controllers connected in cascade, according to the following figure, must be tuned in the correct sequence.
Slave
Inner controller
Out1
Process 1
Pv1
Process 2
Pv2
Master
Outer controller
Out2=Sp1
Pv1
Inner loop
Outer loop
Figure 90. Illustration of two PID function blocks or controller modules connected in cascade.
The inner loop should be faster than the outer loop. It should also be possible to have high gain in the inner loop. Starting from scratch, perform the tuning of two controllers in cascade according to the following basic steps.
1.
Put both controllers in Manual mode.
2.
Begin with the inner controller and adjust the internal setpoint, Sp1, to the inner process value, Pv1.
3.
Start the Autotuner of the inner controller, and accept the tuned PID
parameters. See Autotuning on page 133.
4.
Select the external setpoint for the inner controller and set it to Auto mode.
5.
In the outer controller adjust the setpoint, Sp2, to the outer process value, Pv2.
6.
Start the Autotuner of the outer controller and accept the tuned PID parameters.
See
7.
Switch the outer controller to Auto mode.
3BSE041488R101 207
208
Cascade Loop Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
Cascade Loop with Control Modules
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in the Applications > CascadeLoop
> Control Modules > CMLoop control module, open the interaction windows of the SlaveController and MasterController control modules for exploration.
Cascade Loop with Function Blocks
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > CascadeLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction windows of the PIDSimpleMaster and PIDSimpleSlave function blocks for exploration.
Cascade Loop with Control Modules in Function Blocks
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > CascadeLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the CMInFBLoop function block. CMInFBLoop contains the CMLoopInFB control module, which contains similar control modules to CMLoop above. Open the interaction windows of the SlaveController and MasterController control modules for exploration.
Cascade Loop with a Function Block Loop
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications > CascadeLoop >
Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the
FBPidCascadeLoop function block, which is a ready-made complete control loop, for exploration.
3BSE041488R101
Section 4 Analog Process Control Fuzzy Control Loop Examples
Fuzzy Control Loop Examples
The Fuzzy Control Loop examples contain a tank with a level controller. The task is to keep the level in the upper tank constant by means of a fuzzy controller according to the FuzzyControlLoop application, as follows. It is implemented in two ways:
• with control modules,
• with control modules in a function block.
These two examples are identical to the Simple Loop examples, except that the PID controller in the control loop has been replaced by a fuzzy controller. It should, however, be emphasized that the tank control loop is not a good example of a loop where a fuzzy controller should be used. In this case, a PID controller works well and should be used instead of a fuzzy controller.
Despite this, we will use the tank control application to demonstrate the fuzzy controller. The reason is that the loop is simple to control and well known to most the PID controller. control engineers. It also provides a means of to comparing the fuzzy controller to
Figure 91. The Fuzzy Control Loop application in online mode showing two methods of programming.
3BSE041488R101 209
210
Fuzzy Control Loop Examples Section 4 Analog Process Control
Fuzzy Control Loop with Control Modules
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in the Applications >
FuzzyControlLoop > Control Modules > CMLoop control module, open the interaction window of the FuzzyController control module for exploration. Start by putting the fuzzy controller in Auto mode and enter a setpoint value, for example, setpoint = 4.
Fuzzy Control Loop with a Control Module in the Function Block
In Test or Online mode in the Project Explorer in Applications >
FuzzyControlLoop > Programs > ControlLoops, open the interaction window of the CMInFBLoop function block. CMInFBLoop contains the CMLoopInFB control module which contains similar control modules as CMLoop above. Open the interaction window of the FuzzyController control module for exploration.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control
Introduction
This section describes how to use types from the Process Object libraries to create binary control solutions for your automation system. The section contains:
• A description of the Process Object concept that will help you understand the
thinking behind the library types in the Process Object libraries, see Concept on page 212.
• Advice and instructions on how to implement binary control solutions using
the types in the Process Object libraries, see Design on page 238.
• Examples on how to implement binary control solutions using the types in the
Process Object libraries, see
• Detailed information on how to implement ABB Drives and INSUM control,
see Advanced Functions on page 266.
All other Uni and Bi types that are based on the UniCore and BiCore types exist in a function block and a control module version. Throughout this section, the notation
UniSimple(M) etc. is used when referring to both the function block type and the control module type.
For a discussion on the difference between function blocks and control modules, and how to choose between the two, see the Basic Control Software, Introduction
and Configuration manual.
3BSE041488R101 211
212
Concept Section 5 Binary Process Control
Concept
A process object is a representation of a real physical object, which can be in different states and can be controlled by commands. Throughout this section, process objects are usually motor or valve objects, but they can also represent other objects, such as a tank.
With process objects, there is a need for scalability, down to single process objects.
However, they must never be too specific or too complex, they must be so small and fit so smoothly that they do not interfere with the programmer’s own valve or motor parameters, but at the same time, they must be intelligent enough to work directly by themselves, without any additional programming efforts.
In order to satisfy this need, the Process Object libraries contain a number of types that are designed to be either:
• Used in the application as is, in which case you only have to connect it to the application, to interaction windows, etc., see
• Used as a template, when new valve object types or motor object types are to
be created in your libraries and applications, see Process Object Template
Concept (Core Objects) on page 216.
When using process objects, as is or as templates, you will also need to know:
• How to use the basic parameters of the core objects to configure the different
types in the Process Object library types, see Core Object Functions and
Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) on page 220.
•
Which graphics and icons that are used to represent control modules, Control
• How the interaction windows that can be used in Control Builder work, see
Interaction Windows on page 236.
• How communication with graphics and code works, see
Interaction Parameters on page 237.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Process Object Libraries Overview
Process Object Libraries Overview
The Process Object libraries provide function blocks and control modules to define valve and motor objects, as well as objects to control and supervise ABB Drives, standard INSUM (Integrated system for user optimized motor management) MCUs
(Motor Control Units) and trip units for circuit breakers. The Process Object libraries are standard AC 800M libraries that are installed with the Compact Control
Builder.
A schematic overview of the relations between a function block or control module and the remote objects can be seen in
3BSE041488R101 213
Process Object Libraries Overview Section 5 Binary Process Control
214
Figure 92. Relations between a function block or control module and the remote objects
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Process Object Libraries Overview
There are four different Process Object libraries:
• Process Object Basic library,
• Process Object Extended library,
• Process Object Drive library,
• Process Object INSUM library.
For a complete list of all objects in the Process Object libraries, see
Object Libraries on page 395. For information on parameters and detailed
instructions on how to configure individual types, see Process Object libraries online help.
Process Object Basic Library
The Process Object Basic library contains template (core) objects for building your own process objects. They are intended to be embedded in application-specific
types, see Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects) on page 216. This
library also contains function block types for control of ABB Drives, objects for delaying commands in auto mode, and priority handling.
Process Object Extended Library
The Extended library is more comprehensive than the Basic library. It comprises ready-to-use valve and motor objects, alarm handling functionality and templates for user-designed valve and motor objects. It includes additional control modules for high-level graphical configuration, which are integrated with Compact Control
Builder.
The types in this library also have a group start interface, which can be used to connect them to a group start configuration.
The ready-to-use valve and motor control module types in Process Extended library has a vote parameter (VotedCmd) that is used for connections to vote control module types (see
Vote Control Module Types on page 315)
.
3BSE041488R101 215
216
Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects) Section 5 Binary Process Control
Process Object Drive Library
The Process Object Drive library contains function block and control module types for controlling and supervising ABB Drives via ModuleBus, DriveBus, or
PROFIBUS-DP. Drives process objects are based on UniCore. Communication is based on the DriveStatusRead and DriveCommandSend function blocks, which are included in all Drives process objects.
Process Object INSUM Library
The Process Object INSUM library contains object types and control module types to control and supervise standard INSUM (Integrated system for user optimized motor management) MCUs (Motor Control Units) and trip units for circuit breakers.
INSUM process objects are based on UniCore. Communication is based on the
INSUMWrite and INSUMRead function blocks, which are included in all INSUM process objects.
INSUM devices are connected via an INSUM Gateway and a CI857 hardware unit to the AC800M. All objects include interaction windows for Compact Control
Builder.
The Process Object INSUM library also contains a number of predefined data types, used for communication to the interaction windows.
Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects)
When using types from the Process Object libraries, it is important to understand the
template concept. When working with process objects, there is a need for a general function block base, a Core function that fits all valve and motor objects in all industrial control applications. Since all valve and motor objects need at least uni- or bi-directional control, objects with these properties make up the core of all types in the Process Object libraries.
The smallest common denominator is:
• The UniCore function block type, for uni-directional process objects.
• The BiCore function block type, for bi-directional process objects.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects)
The above core function blocks (BiCore and UniCore) are protected and form a basis for all object types. The core is not copied when a process object type is copied, instead it refers (points) to its type in the Process Object Basic library. This means that then using types that have a core object embedded, this core object is referenced whenever this
Since types based on core objects reference the core objects, the Process Object
Basic library must always be connected to your project when you have used standard types based on core objects or created your own types based on core objects.
Figure 93 shows how core objects form the basis of other, application-specific
objects.
Note! Must always be included
The user’s own created library
Figure 93. The core functionality in ProcessObjExtLib and in a user’s self-defined library.
3BSE041488R101 217
Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects) Section 5 Binary Process Control
The Process Object Basic library must always be connected to your project when using self-defined types based on types from the Process Object libraries. This is necessary since this library contains data types used that are used in the Process
Object Extended library. It is necessary even if parameters of those data types not are explicitly used, due to their DEFAULT declaration.
Core objects can only be updated when the standard libraries are upgraded. If core objects are updated, the core functions of all types based on these core objects are updated as well.
All types based on the core objects exist in two variations, as a function block type and a control module type.
Core Object Properties
All core objects (sub-objects) have protected code. The user can neither see nor access the code, modify it nor change it; instead the function blocks have parameters for providing a means of interaction in the code.
The two basic function blocks, UniCore and BiCore, do not contain any Control
Builder graphics. However, they have parameters for interaction with the graphics operator panel.
UniCore or BiCore are used in all process objects and may be combined with some or several of the other above mentioned core objects. The process objects
UniSimple(M) and BiSimple(M) are open for the user and may be used as templates and copied to a user library, where modifications may be performed in the code, the
Control Builder graphics or used as object types and instantiate in the user application like other closed library objects. The code content of these objects is mostly calls to core objects and the direct code is minimized.
Interaction with core objects uses a structured parameter named InteractionPar, containing the information that is written from the graphics. As this parameter also may be written from the user code, care have to be taken not to lock out the graphic interaction possibilities.
218 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Process Object Template Concept (Core Objects)
Commands to UniCore and BiCore objects are reset inside the core, and process objects shall only set them to activate operation. Examples on commands are switch to auto mode or manual mode, but also the manual operation commands like
ManCmdx.
Types Based on UniCore and BiCore
There are a number of types that are based on UniCore and BiCore:
• The function block types Uni, Bi, ValveUni, MotorUni, and MotorBi.
• The control module types UniM, BiM, ValveUniM, MotorUniM, and
MotorBiM.
The Process Object Basic library contains two additional function block types and two control module types that are based on the core objects, but contain fewer functions than the Uni and Bi types:
• UniSimple(M) is based on Uni(M), but does not have any alarm handling.
• BiSimple(M) is based on Bi(M), but does not have any alarm handling.
For information on how to configure simple objects, see
Directional Control on page 245 and Process Object library online help.
All these types can be used as is, or form the basis for your own types. Objects based on these types will still reference the UniCore or BiCore function block type.
This means that they may be affected by upgrades to the Process Object standard libraries.
To avoid upgrading problems, place a copy of the process object type in your own library and then make the changes.
3BSE041488R101 219
220
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
In order to understand how to use the process objects in the Process Object libraries, it is necessary to know how the different parameters interact and how they should be used.
This text is based on the UniCore core function block type, but most of the information applies to BiCore as well.
At the end, there is a short section which discusses the most important differences between UniCore and BiCore, see
Differences Between UniCore and
UniCore can be used to control a generic process object via a number of predefined outputs and feedback signals
(inputs). Uni means that the process object can be either activated or deactivated. For a valve (or a motor) this would mean open (running in one direction, uni-directional) or being closed (stopped).
UniCore has pulse output selection and feedback configuration, to allow configuration of the number of feedbacks and inversions.
UniCore function block
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
UniCore parameters are divided into the following types:
• Operation
– Mode,
– Configuration of feedback signals,
– Object test.
• Interlocking
– Ilock,
– Priority commands,
– Inhibit.
• Feedback error
• Effective feedback
• Output IOLevel
Operation Parameters
The operation parameters of the UniCore object can be used to configure feedback signals, set feedback error time, and disable error handling. The PulseOut parameter governs whether outputs should be pulsed or level, depending on the hardware used for the process object in question. UniCore also calculates information to be presented in interaction windows.
• Modes
An object is activated when the Enable parameter is set to true, signifying that the function block will be executed. When the parameter Enable is false, Out1,
Out0, Out1Level, StatAct, StatDeact, and ObjErr will be set to false, regardless of the status of other signals. The object can be activated or deactivated in all modes. After deactivation, the object is switched into Manual mode.
UniCore has seven different operation modes:
Manual, Auto, Panel, Priority, Group Start, Local and Out of Service Mode.
Manual mode and Auto mode are examples of output mode indication parameters (ManMode and AutoMode).
3BSE041488R101 221
222
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
Manual mode is set as the default start-up mode using the parameter
ManModeInit. The initial value is set to true, meaning that Manual will be the default mode. The parameter ManModeInit is copied to the parameter
ManMode at every cold start.
The output parameter ObjMode also indicates the different modes:
ObjMode = 0 -> Local mode
ObjMode = 1 -> Priority mode
ObjMode = 2 -> Panel mode
ObjMode = 3 -> Manual mode
ObjMode = 4 -> Auto mode
ObjMode = 5 -> Group start mode
ObjMode = 6 -> Out of service mode
shows the different operation modes and their relationships. The longer from the middle the higher the priority.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
Figure 94. Core object modes and their relationship
3BSE041488R101 223
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
– Manual Mode - A user operates the object from a workstation
To change to Manual mode, trigger the SetMan parameter and the
ManMode parameter will automatically be set to true. Output signals
(Out1, Out0, Out1Level) will retain their status from the previous mode.
In Manual mode, the status of the output signal is controlled by the parameters ManCmd1 and ManCmd0. These parameters have rising edge detection.
All parameters mentioned above (SetMan, ManCmd0, ManCmd1) are normally connected to the interaction window via the application.
– Auto Mode - The program controls the object
Auto mode is set by means of the parameter SetAuto. The status of the output signals (Out1, Out0, Out1Level) in Auto mode is controlled by the parameters AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd0. AutoCmd0 has higher priority than
AutoCmd1.
The AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd0 parameters are level detected, therefore these parameters affect the output signal, as long as they are active. The programmer is required to reset these parameters from the application program outside the function block. These parameters act on Out1Level according to
.
*
AutoCmd1
AutoCmd0
Out1Level
* Reset after function block in application program. AutoCmd0 has priority.
Figure 95. Status relations for Out1Level and the Auto commands.
224 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
When returning to Auto mode from another mode, the status of the output signals will be returned from the previous mode, but adjusted directly by the signals AutoCmd1 or AutoCmd0, if one or both are set to true.
– Panel Mode - The object is controlled locally from a control panel, via the
UniCore function block
The function block has a set of signals for maneuvering the object from a control panel. Setting the PanMode parameter activates Panel mode. The
PanMode parameter is level detected.
This mode is active only as long as the PanMode parameter is true. If
PanMode is changed to false, the system exits Panel mode immediately, and return to the previous mode.
For examples of Panel mode, see Connect to a Control Panel in Panel
– Priority Mode
The object is in Priority Mode when any of PriorityCmd0, PriorityCmd1,
PriorityCmdMan0 and PriorityCmdMan1 are active. This is described in section
Priority and Interlocking Parameters on page 228.
– Group Start Mode
Changing mode to Group start mode is done via the structured parameter
GroupStartIn of type GroupStartObject. In this mode the object is controlled via this parameter. The parameter GroupStartIlock prevents the possibility to transfer to Group start mode. In this mode output parameter
GroupStartMode is active.
– Local Mode - The object is controlled locally from a local control panel, bypassing the UniCore function block
Local mode is used when the object is controlled locally from a local control panel and the function block does not have any signals for controlling the object from the local control panel. All signals from the local control panel are physically connected directly to the object (motors, valves, etc.), see
.
In this mode, the object statuses are updated using the feedback signals.
Objects return to the previous mode when local mode is disabled.
3BSE041488R101 225
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
Local Control Panel
Switch
Start
Stop
Motor
Process object
LocMode
Figure 96. Control steps in Local mode.
– Out Of Service Mode
Out of Service mode is only available when the object is stopped. The operator controls the mode and the object cannot be maneuvered. It is possible to transfer to other modes.
If the command signal SetOutOfService is true the mode sets. When this command has been executed the function block resets the command. The object must be in position 0 (stopped, closed) to enter the Out of Service mode.
226 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
• Feedback Signals
The parameter FBConfig informs the function block of how feedback is configured, by transferring the combination of feedback signals of the object to the function block. Possible combinations of feedback signals are listed in
Table 33. Possible combinations of feedback signals
2
3
FBConfig
0
1
Feedback from activated position Feedback from deactivated position
FB1
FB1
FB0
(none)
FB1 inverted
FB1 inverted
(none)
FB0 inverted
4
5
6
(none) FB0
(none)
(none)
FB0 inverted
(none)
The values of the feedback signals FB1 and FB0 are transferred to the StatAct and StatDeact output parameters respectively, in condition with Out1Level.
If an object has no, or only a single, feedback signal, StatAct and StatDeact will still be set. The signals StatAct and StatDeact are set to zero if double feedback is used and both are true at the same time.
• Output Settings
The output signals include Out1, Out0 and Out1Level. Out1 and Out0 can be configured as pulsed command or level-detected command, by means of the
PulseOut parameter.
The pulse is sustained by the parameters Out1 and Out0, until the corresponding feedback is detected or the maximum feedback error time is exceeded. Out1Level is intended to indicate the output state when the Out1 and
Out0 parameters are pulsed. If there is no feedback from a position, the pulse duration is set to the object error time. Only one pulse is generated upon each status change.
3BSE041488R101 227
228
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
• Object Test
When the parameter Object Test is activated, the feedback error calculation is disabled and the Out1 and Out0 signals are set to false. The signals StatAct and
StatDeact are set according to the status of Out1Level.
When Object Test is deactivated, the status of the object reverts to that in the mode prior to Object Test and the Out0 signal is set to true.
Priority and Interlocking Parameters
Priority and interlocking parameters can be used to control the behavior of process objects in certain situations, for example, to stop an object from entering a certain state or forcing it to a certain state. This might be needed to ensure accurate operation with critical process values, such as high levels and temperatures, Motor
Control Center interface, safety devices, etc.
The main difference between interlocking and priority parameters lies in that interlocking parameters stop the object from entering a certain state, while priority parameters are used to force an object to a certain state.
• Ilock - Prevents the object from entering a certain state
The Ilock1 and Ilock0 signals block commands in all modes to switch the object to the activated and deactivated state respectively. The Inhibit signal will suppress interlock signals, when true.
• Priority Command - Compels the object to enter a certain state
The PriorityCmd1 and PriorityCmd0 signals force the output to the respective status with priority over other signals, except when the Inhibit signal is set to true. When these signals disappear, the status from Priority state is transferred to the current mode.
•
Priority Manual Command - The commands PriorityCmdMan1 and
PriorityCmdMan0 have the same functionality as the Priority Commands with the exception that the object switch into manual mode after the priority man command is completed.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
• Inhibit - Suppress all Ilock and Priority(Man)Cmd signals
When the Inhibit signal is set to true, the program will ignore all Ilock and
PriorityCmd signals. This parameter can be used when there is an absolute need for running the object, although all Ilock and PriorityCmd signals are suppressed. When the Inhibit signal returns to false, the Ilock and PriorityCmd are re-activated.
When Object Test is de-activated, the status of the object reverts to that in the mode prior to Object Test and the Out0 signal is set to true.
Feedback and Output Parameters
The feedback error (ObjErr) is supervised in all modes except when the parameter
Enable is false and in Local mode, based on the values of the parameters Out1Level,
FB1 and FB0.
The parameter ExtErr provides the possibility of connecting other errors to the object. This parameter does not affect the object status. If required, it must be implemented outside the UniCore, for example, by connecting a variable to both parameters ExtErr and PriorityCmd0.
The information required for the feedback error calculation is the feedback error time and the number of feedbacks: these two parameters have to be configured by the user (the parameters FBTime and FBConfig).
FBTime has an initial value of 5 seconds. In the Extended Library an interaction parameter is connected to FBTime. This value can be altered online, in the interaction windows (Compact Control Builder). The interaction parameter has a cold retain attribute to retain the value following cold or warm restarts.
ParError is set to True when a parameter takes an illegal value (goes outside the allowed range). This is also indicated by a red triangle in interaction windows.
EnableParError is set to false by default. ParError will not be executing in non-SIL application (by default).
See also
3BSE041488R101 229
230
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
The object internal status is updated from the feedback signals after a warm restart:
• Effective Feedback
The EffectiveFB1 and EffectiveFB0 parameters, of the in/out type, give the calculated result from FBConfig and the values of FB1 and FB0.
Effective feedback signals are connected to the interaction window and are displayed under the Status tab.
• Output IOLevel
The parameter Out1IOLevel, of the in/out type, is calculated from the actual values of the binary I/O (Out1IO, Out0IO), in relation to the selected pulse functionality.
Out1IO
Out0IO
Figure 97. OutputIOLevel state diagram.
Out1IOLevel
The output signals are connected to and displayed in the interaction window.
• Interlock
The parameter Interlock, of the in/out type, is the sum of parameters
PriorityCmd and Ilock. The Interlock parameter provides information when any type of interlocking is active (for example, PriorityCmd or Ilock).
The interlock signals are connected and displayed in the interaction window.
• Forced Actions
The parameter Forced, of the in/out type, indicates the forced status of the
Out0IO and Out1IO signals at FB0 or FB1. If one of these four I/O signals is blocked/forced, the parameter Forced, of the in/out type, will be true.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
Differences Between UniCore and
BiCore
The only difference between UniCore and BiCore is that BiCore is bidirectional. UniCore is designed for control of process objects with two states (such as stopped and running), while BiCore is designed for control of process objects that have three states (such as stop, start/forward and start/back, which correspond to 0, 1, and 2).
Examples of bi-directional applications are two-speed motors and forward/backward motors.
Compared to UniCore, Bi Core has the following extra parameters (all relating to the extra state, hence they all carry the number 2):
• In Manual mode, there are additional parameters ManCmd2,
Out2 and Out2Level.
• In Auto mode, there are additional parameters AutoCmd2,
Out2 and Out2Level. The influence of AutoCmd parameters on OutLevel parameters can be
seen in Figure 98 on next page.
• In Panel mode, there is an additional PanCmd2 parameter.
BiCore function block
3BSE041488R101 231
232
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
AutoCmd1
AutoCmd2
AutoCmd0
Out1Level
Out2Level
AutoCmd0 has priority .
Figure 98. Status relations of OutLevel parameters and Auto commands (BiCore).
• There are additional parameters for feedback configuration: FB2, EffectiveFB2 and StatAct2, see
Table 34 . If an object has no, or only one or two, feedback
signals, StatAct1, StatAct2 and StatDeact are still set. The signals StatAct1,
StatAct2, and StatDeact are set to false, if FBConfig = 0, 1, 2 or 3, and more than one feedback is True at the same time.
Table 34. Possible combinations of feedback signals (BiCore)
3
4
1
2
FBConfig
0
Position 1
FB1
Position 2
FB2
Deactivated position
FB0
FB1 FB2 (none)
FB1 inverted FB2 inverted (none)
FB1 inverted FB2 inverted FB0 inverted
(none) (none) (none)
• For implementation of a bi-directional motor, the BiCore function block has a parameter named ChangeOverTime (Time data type). The ChangeOverTime parameter is used for large motors in order to secure priority operation
(switching forward/reverse). The parameter ChangeOverTime sets a delay time, before the direction can be changed (see
).
The ChangeOverTime parameter has an initial value of 5 seconds.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
xxx = AutoCmd, ManCmd, PanCmd xxxCmd1 xxxCmd2 xxxCmd0
Out1
(not pulsed)
ChangeOverTime
Out2
(not pulsed)
ChangeOverTime
Figure 99. Change-over action state diagram
ChangeOverTime is only applicable to Out1, Out2, and Out0. It is not applicable to Out1Level or Out2Level, as they present the actual command.
It is possible to configure all Bi Process Objects to work in two-speed mode instead of bi-directional mode (switching forward/reverse). This is done by setting the ChangeOverTime parameter to zero.
• The Ilock1, Ilock2 and Ilock0 interlocking parameters block commands in all modes, so that the object cannot be forced to the activated or deactivated states, respectively. The Inhibit signal will suppress interlock signals when True.
Figure 99 shows which changes between states that are blocked by interlocking
parameters.
3BSE041488R101 233
234
Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) Section 5 Binary Process Control
State 1
(Start/Forward)
(C)
(D)
State 2
(Start/Reverse)
(B)
(E)
(A)
(F) State 0
(Stop)
Figure 100. Manual maneuvers interlocking signals.
(A) - Condition for jump to state 0: State 0-maneuver and NOT Ilock0.
(B) - Condition for jump to state 1: State 1-maneuver and NOT Ilock1.
(C) - Condition for jump to state 2: State 2-maneuver and NOT Ilock2.
(D) - Condition for jump to state 1: State 1-maneuver and NOT Ilock1.
(E) - Condition for jump to state 2: State 2-maneuver and NOT Ilock2.
(F) - Condition for jump to state 0: State 0-maneuver and NOT Ilock0.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore)
PriorityCmd0 has the highest priority of the three priority commands and affects Out0. Similarly, PriorityCmd1 and PriorityCmd2 affect Out1 and Out2.
Priority1
Priority2
Priority0
Inhibit
Out1
Out2
Out0
Figure 101. State diagram showing Priority command priorities and output signals with the effect of Inhibit.
The Inhibit signal overrules all priority commands. When the Inhibit signal is active, the object ignores the status of PriorityCmd (the Priority commands do not affect the output signals).
• The parameter Out2IOLevel, of the in/out type, is the result calculated from the actual values of the binary I/O (Out2IO, Out0IO) in relation to the selected pulse functionality.
Out1IO
Out2IO
Out0IO
Out1IOLevel
Out2IOLevel
Figure 102. OutputIOLevel state diagram.
The output signals are connected to and displayed in the operator workplace.
3BSE041488R101 235
Control Module Icons Section 5 Binary Process Control
Control Module Icons
In Control Builder, a control module is represented by an icon that shows the most important module characteristics dynamically. The interaction window can be opened by clicking this icon. Connections to a group start environment is made using normal parameter connections for the process objects. For control modules, it is also possible to make graphical connections.
Figure 103 shows a control module icon in Control Builder.
236
Indication only
Indicate the
The object name visible for output status
Bi objects
Indicates object test
Indicates any forced I/O
Alarm state indication
Priority mode indication
(second output status)
Figure 103. Graphical representation and explanations of the control module icons
When modifying a process object, changes may also have to be made to the graphics. When additions are made in Control Builder graphics, window positioning might have to be changed. To change the position of an interaction window, doubleclick the faceplate (for example FaceplateBi) in the control module types folder.
Select Variables for x and y position and change their value. After a positioning change, change Initial Value to Value. The values are relative and can be set for both the x and y position.
Interaction Windows
Interaction windows are used for maintenance purposes. Through an interaction window, the service engineer or programmer may manipulate the process object. All types in the Process Object standard libraries have at least one pre-made interaction window.
For example, the Bi process object has three Control Builder interaction windows, one for manual control, one for indications and one for Group Start (see
Figure 104 ). The main interaction window is displayed first.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Interaction Parameters
The extended interaction window is displayed by a click on the information icon in the main interaction window and the Group Start window is displayed by a click on the G-button.
The window above and the button only exist if Group
Start is connected
Figure 104. Control Builder interaction windows for Bi(M).
Interaction Parameters
Interaction parameters are used to interact with the process object. Interaction parameters can be accessed from the code (this is not recommended, since it might shut out the operator interface) and from the graphical interface. Interaction parameters are identified by the syntax InteractionPar.ComponentName.
For more information on interaction parameters, see Control Builder online help for the Process Object libraries. Interaction parameters for process objects are also described in connection with instructions on how to configure the objects,
see Advanced Functions on page 266.
3BSE041488R101 237
Design Section 5 Binary Process Control
Design
The types in the Process Object libraries can be used in a number of ways. There are also a number of choices that have to be made regarding which type of object to use for which purpose.
This sub section contains information designed to help you:
• Decide which type to use, see
Choose the Correct Type on page 239.
•
Configure standard types to be used in your application as is, see Use Standard
•
•
Connect process objects to a group start configuration, see Group Start
•
Configure alarm handling, see Alarm Handling on page 243.
• Create uni-directional and bi-directional control solutions using the Uni(M) and Bi(M) template objects, see
Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control on page 245.
• Configure motor control and valve control solutions using objects from the
Process Object libraries, as templates or as is. See Motor and Valve Control on page 249.
238 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Choose the Correct Type
Choose the Correct Type
In choosing a representation of a specific process object, you must decide on the following:
•
Should I use a function block or a control module? See Function Blocks vs
• Which process object type should I use? See
Type Selection Chart on page 239.
Function Blocks vs Control Modules
All process objects (except the core function blocks) are delivered in two versions, function blocks and control modules. Control modules have an suffix M in the type name.
In simple applications (or small ones) that will not need to be modified at a later date, traditional function block solutions may be used. In more complex applications, control modules are preferred.
One of the benefits of using control modules, is that they allow the user to insert many similar objects, as the code sorting routine ensures that variables are dealt within the correct order. The more objects to be inserted, the more you gain by using control modules.
Function block parameters are copied at each call, while control module parameters are defined at compilation and set up once, prior to execution. Control modules have a performance advantage, especially when large structures (for example, structured data types) are used as parameters, of the in and/or out type, in function blocks, or when parameters are transferred through deep hierarchies.
Type Selection Chart
If the process object is intended to be applied to a bi-directional object (an object with three states) and it is a motor, choose the MotorBi(M) type. If it is a bi- directional object, but not a motor, choose the Bi(M) type or the BiSimple(M) type if you do not need alarm handling.
3BSE041488R101 239
240
Use Standard Library Types Section 5 Binary Process Control
If the process object is to be used for a uni-directional object, (an object with two states) several choices are possible. If it is not a motor or a valve, choose the Uni object type or the UniSimple(M) type if you do not need alarm handling. If it is a uni-directional motor object, choose MotorUni(M) and if it is a uni-directional valve object, choose ValveUni(M).
Figure 105 contains a flow chart for selecting the correct type for your process
objects.
Bi
Bi/Uni
Uni
Motor/Valve
No
Yes
Alarm
Yes
Uni
No
UniSimple
Motor
Yes
MotorBi
No
Alarm
Yes
Bi
No
BiSimple
Motor
Yes
MotorUni
No
ValveUni
Figure 105. Flowchart of possible process object type choices.
Use Standard Library Types
All process objects are delivered as template objects. This means that the code is open and readable for the user. However, process objects may be instantiated as they are, if no addition or change is needed.
If you want to use one of the types in the Process Object libraries without any modification, simply connect the library to your application and create one or several instance(s) of it. The only thing you have to do is configure the instances by connecting them to faceplates and connecting their parameters to your application.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Use Standard Library Types to Create Self-defined Types
For examples of how to do this, see Examples on page 254. For detailed information
about parameters for the different types, see Level Detection, Commands and Alarm
Use Standard Library Types to Create Self-defined Types
It is possible to create your own types, based on the types in the Process Object libraries. However, to make it possible to modify and add to your self-defined types, you need to create copies of the Process Object library types you want to modify, and store them in a library that you have created for this purpose. For an example of how to create a new library and copy types to it from the Process Object libraries,
see Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type on page 254.
If you use a type from a Process Object library as a formal instance in one of your self-defined types, and this sub type is updated (for example, through an upgrade of your system), the changes are reflected in your self-defined type(s) as well.
You can add functions to the copied object types that you store in self-defined
libraries. For an example of how to do this, see Add Functions to Self-defined Types on page 259.
For detailed information about parameters for the different process object types, see
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts on page 266.
Group Start Interface
All process objects in this library have the group start interface where connections may be done to the group start environment.
The Group Start interface consists of the following parameters:
• GroupStartIn *,
• GroupStartMode,
• GroupStartILock.
* One for each connection (Uni types have one connection and Bi types have two connections).
3BSE041488R101 241
242
Voting Interface Section 5 Binary Process Control
The parameter GroupStartIn is the structured parameter, that connects the process object to the group start environment and is in the control module cases implemented as a node to allow a graphical connection. The out parameter
GroupStartMode indicates Group Start mode with a true value in the corresponding boolean parameter. When the parameter GroupStartILock is true, transfer to group start mode is inhibited.
These parameters are optional and only implemented in the more complex motor objects. The purpose is to halt the start or stop sequence if any external signal requests it and all Txt-parameters are strings, telling the Group Start environment the reason of the halt.
• ContinueStartSeq *
• ContinueStartSeqTxt *
• ContinueStopSeq *
• ContinueStopSeqTxt *
Voting Interface
* One for each connection (Uni types have one connection and Bi types have two connections).
For a description of the Group Start library, see Section 6, Synchronized Control
.
Several process objects support Voting; for more information about these objects and their corresponding Voting parameters, see
Signal and Vote Loop Concept on page 305.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Alarm Handling
Alarm Handling
For more information on alarm and event handling, see the manual Basic Control
Software, Introduction and Configuration, and online help for the Alarm and
Event library.
Some process objects contain an alarm and event handling function block. The alarm handling interface consists of the following parameters:
• AlarmDisabled
• ExtErr
• ObjErr
• AlState
• AlarmAck
• AEConfig
• AESeverity
• AEClass
• EnableSupOut
When an error occurs, motor objects normally and automatically enter Priority mode and reset the start signals. It is possible to leave the motor running, by setting the interaction parameter KeepAtErr. For other template objects, this is the normal functionality.
For the alarm to work properly, the Name parameter of each object has to be unique throughout the whole plant.
The alarm function is based on the AlarmCond function block, with acknowledge rule (AckRule=1). This acknowledge rule includes six possible alarm states. For further information about alarm states, see online help on the AlarmCond function block. The alarm is activated by a feedback error.
The AlarmCond function block incorporates an alarm Control Builder interaction window, displayed by a clicking the alarm icon in the Control Builder interaction window. See
3BSE041488R101 243
244
Alarm Handling Section 5 Binary Process Control
Figure 106. An alarm Control Builder interaction window.
If the object is in Disabled or in Local mode, or if the feedback error is disabled, the alarm function is disabled.
An alarm can be acknowledged from the program via the parameter AlarmAck, from the alarm Control Builder interaction window.
Error Texts
Error text strings can be added by the OETextUni, OETextBi, and OETextValveUni function block that are included in their corresponding process object types. These function blocks generate a text message from the feedback and output signals of the
AlarmCond function block. The text message is displayed in the Alarm Control
Builder interaction window.
The text is put together by adding the name of the object that created the alarm to information about status and feedback. If the error has been generated from an
ExtErr parameter, an external error text is also displayed.
For more information on the OEText function blocks, see
Commands and Alarm Texts on page 266. More information about parameters is
also found in online help for the Process Object libraries.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control
Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control
The Process Object Extended library contains two objects that are intended as generic template objects for uni- and bi-directional applications:
• Uni(M), see
•
There are two versions of each object, one function block type and one control module type (indicated by the letter M).
There are also two objects in the Process Object Basic library that are simplified versions of the above two:
•
UniSimple(M), see UniSimple(M) on page 248
•
BiSimple(M), see BiSimple(M) on page 248
As for the Uni(M) and Bi(M) objects, there are two versions, one function block type and one control module type.
All the above objects are based on UniCore and BiCore. Before reading this section, you should always be familiar with the functions and parameters of the core objects,
see Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) on page 220.
All the above function block and control module types contain function blocks from the Process Object Basic and/or Process Object Extended libraries. For a description of those function blocks, see
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm
3BSE041488R101 245
246
Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control
Uni(M)
Uni(M) object is a UniCore application.
Uni(M) includes an alarm function,
Control Builder interaction windows.
Uni(M) is intended for uni-directional control and can be used as a template for developing your own uni-directional types, see
For Uni(M), it is possible to control
Panel mode of the object from both a workplace, and from a switch on a control panel. The interaction window has a button that can toggle Panel mode.
There is also a parameter (PanMode) intended to be connected to an activation signal from the panel. If you connect PanMode to the panel, it is still possible to use the button in the interaction window to activate Panel mode.
It is not possible to deactivate Panel mode from the interaction window if it has been activated from the control panel. For an example of a panel control configuration, see
Panel in Panel Mode on page 262.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control
Bi(M)
Bi(M) is an example of a BiCore application. Bi(M) includes an alarm function, Control Builder interaction windows.
Bi(M) is intended for bi-directional control and can be used as a template for developing your own bi-directional types,
see Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a
For Bi(M), it is possible to control Panel mode of the object from both a workplace, and from a switch on a control panel. The interaction window has a button that can toggle Panel mode.
There is also a parameter (PanMode) intended to be connected to an activation signal from the panel. If you connect
PanMode to a panel it is still possible to use the button in the interaction window to activate the Panel mode.
It is not possible to deactivate Panel mode from the interaction window if it has been activated from the control panel. For an example of a panel control configuration,
see Connect to a Control Panel in Panel
Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control
3BSE041488R101 247
248
Generic Uni- and Bi-Directional Control
UniSimple(M)
UniSimple(M) is a UniCore application. It includes Control Builder interaction windows.
UniSimple(M) has the same functions as Uni(M), except for the fact that there is no alarm and event handling.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
BiSimple(M)
BiSimple(M) is a BiCore application. It includes
Control Builder interaction windows.
BiSimple(M) has the same functions as Bi(M), except for the fact that there is no alarm and event handling.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Motor and Valve Control
Motor and Valve Control
The Process Object Extended library contains two motor control objects (each in a function block type and a control module type version), and one valve object (in a function block type and a control module version):
•
MotorUni(M) for uni-directional motors, see MotorUni(M) on page 250.
• MotorBi(M) for bi-directional motors, see
• ValveUni(M) for valves, see
For a description of how to configure ABB Drives and INSUM control, see
Advanced Functions on page 266.
All the above objects are based on UniCore and BiCore. Before reading this section, you should always be familiar with the functions and parameters of the core objects,
see Core Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) on page 220.
All the above function block and control module types contain function blocks from the Process Object Basic and/or Process Object Extended libraries. For a description of those function blocks, see
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm
These types can be used as is, or as templates. If you want to use them as templates,
When using the motor and valve process objects as is, the only thing you have to do is to connect the parameters that do not have default values.
3BSE041488R101 249
250
Motor and Valve Control
MotorUni(M)
MotorUni(M) is an example of a UniCore application. It includes an alarm function,
Control Builder interaction windows. It is intended to be used to control a uni-directional motor object (stop and run).
This section only discusses functions that have been added, compared to the functions of
UniCore and Uni(M). You should also read
Object Functions and Parameters (UniCore and
Auto mode can be set from the program, interaction windows. Since Auto mode implies automatic operation, the program controls the object via AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd0.
Each of these parameters is supplied with a value of FBTime, connected to the interaction window, via interaction parameter components. The value of FBTime can be changed from the corresponding graphical window. The interaction parameter components have the cold retain attribute to retain their values following a cold restart. FBTime for AutoCmd1 has the same setting as AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd0, because the same local variable is used.
For MotorUni(M), it is possible to control Panel mode of the object from both a workplace, and from a switch on a control panel. The interaction window has a button that can toggle the Panel mode.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Motor and Valve Control
There is a parameter (PanMode), which is intended to be connected to an activation signal from the panel. If you connect PanMode to the panel it is still possible to use the button in the interaction window to activate the Panel mode. It is, however, not possible to deactivate Panel mode from the interaction window if it has been activated from the control panel.
Modification of the interlocking function is performed to extend some parameters, to apply user-defined text, and to implement the combination of PriorityCmd0 and an alarm function via ExtErr. Further improvement is possible, based on this example.
MotorUni(M) object has four interlocking parameters: Ilock01, Ilock02, Ilock11, and Ilock12, that set the condition of Ilock0 or Ilock1 in the UniCore function block.
The Ilock0 condition is set by Ilock01 or Ilock02. Similarly, the Ilock1 condition is set by Ilock11 or Ilock12.
The PriorityCmd0 parameter is divided into three parameters: PriorityCmd01,
PriorityCmd02, and PriorityCmd03. PriorityCmd02 and PriorityCmd03 have associated parameters: PriorityCmd02Txt, and PriorityCmd03Txt, to provide a descriptive text in the alarm list and the interaction window. The text is displayed in the Priority Interlock menu area.
The extended PriorityCmd0 (-Cmd01, -Cmd02 and -Cmd03) has a hold function with an alarm. When the priority command is active, the feedback error is generated by an alarm and can only be released by alarm acknowledge or inhibit.
The Inhibit signal for MotorUni(M) process objects works exactly the same as
PriorityCmd0.
3BSE041488R101 251
252
Motor and Valve Control
MotorBi(M)
MotorBi(M) is an example of a BiCore application, with an alarm function, interaction windows.
This section only discusses functions that have been added, compared to the functions of BiCore and Bi(M).You should also read
Functions and Parameters (UniCore and BiCore) on page 220.
Auto mode can be set from the program, interaction windows. Since Auto mode is the automatic operation, the program controls the object via AutoCmd1, AutoCmd2 and AutoCmd0.
AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd2 are supplied with an
OnDelayTime interaction parameter, AutoCmd0 is supplied with an OffDelayTime interaction parameter, connected to the interaction window, via interaction parameter components. The value of
OnDelayTime and OffDelayTime can be changed in the graphical window.
Interaction parameter components have the cold retain attribute to retain their values at cold restart.
OnDelay for AutoCmd1 and AutoCmd2 has the same setting as AutoCmd1, AutoCmd2 and
AutoCmd0, since the same local variable is used.
Just like for MotorUni(M), it is possible to control
Panel mode of the object from both a workplace, and from a switch on a control panel. The interaction window has a button that can toggle the
Panel mode.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Motor and Valve Control
MotorBi(M) implements the BiCore change-over function. A parameter is provided for setting the change-over time, and it is connected to the corresponding parameter in BiCore. The interaction parameter component for the change-over time is also connected to the interaction window. This makes it possible to change the value in the corresponding graphical window. The interaction parameter components have the cold retain attribute to retain the values following a cold restart.
Interlocking and priority commands work as for MotorUni(M), but with additional parameters for the second output and the extra state.
Error texts are generated in the same way as for MotorUni(M).
ValveUni(M)
The ValveUni(M) process object is a simple example of the UniCore function block. ValveUni(M) includes an alarm function, Control Builder interaction windows.
The ValveUni(M) object is incorporated with only one output I/O for open command.
When using the ValveUni(M) as is, the only thing you have to do is to connect the parameters that do not have default values.
3BSE041488R101 253
254
Examples Section 5 Binary Process Control
Examples
This sub section contains a number of examples that have been included to show how to implement process objects, how to create your own, application-specific types, and to illustrate some important concepts and relations:
•
Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type on page 254 gives an example of
how to create a library and copy Process Object library types into this library.
•
Add Functions to Self-defined Types on page 259 gives an example of how
functions can be added to a type.
•
Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode on page 262 shows how to connect
UniCore and BiCore to a control panel (Panel mode).
Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type
This example shows how to copy a type from the Process Object Extended library to a user-defined library.
1.
In Project Explorer, right-click the Libraries folder and select New Library...
2.
Type the name of the library to be created in the Name field, for example,
MotorLib
.
Click OK.
3.
In the Process Object Extended library, locate MotorBiM (in the Control
Module Types folder).
4.
Right-click the type and select Copy (Ctrl+C).
5.
Right-click the Control Module Types folder in your newly created library (in this example MotorLib), depending on wether the copied object is a function block type or a control module type. Select Paste (Ctrl+V).
The default name of the copied object is the name of the copied original object type followed by underscore and a number, for example, a copy of MotorBiM may get the name MotorBiM_1.
To change the name of the object, proceed as follows:
6.
Right-click the object and select Rename...
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type
7.
Type the desired name of the object, in the New name text field, in this example, MotorBiMod. Click the OK button.
Process object types in the Process Object libraries contain a number of control modules, for example, the FaceplateMotorBi control module, which can be used as an interaction window for the MotorBi(M) process object type. The control modules refer (or point) to their types in ProcessObjExtLib.
If these control module types are to be changed in your application, the updated control module types must also to be copied to your library.
8.
Expand the folder of the copied process object type, and identify the control module types that refer to the control modules used in the process object type.
For example, the control module type MotorLib.FacePlateMotorBi refers to control module FaceplateMotorBi used in the MotorBi(M) process object type.
Figure 107. The control module type is copied to your own created library.
3BSE041488R101 255
256
Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type Section 5 Binary Process Control
9.
In the Control Module Types folder of the Process Object Extended library, select the control module type that is to be copied (for example,
FaceplateMotorBi).
10. Right-click on the control module type and select Copy (Ctrl+C).
11. Right-click on the Control Module Types folder in your newly created library
(in this example MotorLib). Select Paste (Ctrl+V). (See steps 6 and 7 if you wish to change the name of an object type.)
12. Select the control module type that is to be replaced, under the process object type, in your own created library (MotorLib), in this example,
FaceplateMotorBiMod under MotorBiMod. See Figure 107
.
13. Right-click and select Replace Type.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type
3BSE041488R101
Newly created library
A copy of the
MotorBi type, pasted into the
MotorLib.
Figure 108. Copying of object types to a new library, MotorLib.
257
258
Create a Library and Insert a Copy of a Type Section 5 Binary Process Control
14. In the Libraries/Application list, select your self-defined library and in the
Control module type list, select the control module type that is to replace the original type. (It is possible to rename the control module in the Instance name field). Click the OK button.
Figure 109. Replace Control Module Type dialog.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Add Functions to Self-defined Types
Add Functions to Self-defined Types
In the example below, a level detection for motor speed is added to the object type that was copied above, MotorBiMod.
In this example, no functionality for alarm text handling has been added.
1.
In the Function Block Types folder in MotorLib, right-click on the
MotorBiMod type and select Editor (ENTER).
2.
Place the cursor in the code pane and choose Edit>Find... (Ctrl+F) from the menu. Search for the text
level detection
.
3.
Make a copy of the code concerning
***Compute the level detection on the associated analog input signal***
and paste it into the code pane.
4.
, declare the new function block
(LevelDetectionSpeed), change the function block name in the code pane and declare the required variables. Connect the parameters by right-clicking on the function block in the code pane and selecting Edit>Parameter list (Ctrl+M).
5.
Select Editor>Save and Close (Ctrl+U) to implement the changes made in the
MotorBiMod object type.
3BSE041488R101 259
Add Functions to Self-defined Types Section 5 Binary Process Control
260
Figure 110. Level detection functionality added to the MotorBiMod function block type
It is now possible to use the MotorBiMod function block type in a program, with the new added functionality.
6.
In the Program folder under Applications, right-click on a program, for example Program2, and select Editor (ENTER).
7.
Declare a function block of the type MotorBiMod (in this example called
MotorBi).
8.
Insert the function block in the code pane, connect the desired parameters and declare the required variables. (In this example the Function Block Diagram language is used).
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Add Functions to Self-defined Types
Figure 111. MotorBi(M) function block with connections to variables.
9.
Select Editor>Save and Close (Ctrl+U) to implement the changes.
3BSE041488R101 261
262
Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode Section 5 Binary Process Control
Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode
Whether or not Panel mode is used, depends on how comprehensive the application is. The question is whether you prefer to initiate control (the parameter PanMode) of the object from a workplace, or from a switch on a control panel.
When the Panel mode is active, the control panel takes control of the object and errors are calculated according to the status signals from the control panel. The output signal retains its status from the previous mode. The following examples show how to connect UniCore and BiCore to a control panel.
UniCore Examples
Figure 112 shows how to connect UniCore to a control panel in a small application.
Controller
Control Panel
Motor
Switch
Start
Stop
Process object
PanMode
PanCmd1
PanCmd0
Figure 112. Control steps in Panel mode. This solution is recommended for small applications, where all three panel parameters are connected from a control panel.
In large applications, the best solution is to connect the PanMode parameter, via variables, to interaction window. The PanCmd1 and PanCmd0 parameters are still connected to the physical Start/Stop buttons (see
Figure 113 ). Changes in the Panel
mode are therefore approved centrally, that is, a local operator must first obtain permission from the central control operator.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode
Operator workplace
Switch on screen
Controller
Process object
PanMode
PanCmd1
PanCmd0
Motor
Control Panel
Start
Stop
Figure 113. Control steps in Panel mode. This solution is recommended for large applications, where the PanMode parameter is connected to an operator workplace.
The status of the object is controlled by the signals PanCmd1 and PanCmd0, which are level signals and function in the same way as AutoCmd signals, as illustrated in
Figure 95 . The PanCmd1 and PanCmd0 parameters should be connected to push
buttons. It may be advisable to use an R_Trig function block (trigger, parameter and push button) between PanCmd1 and PanCmd0, in case the push button malfunctions.
BiCore Examples
A control panel is a natural choice for smaller applications. The PanMode parameter is connected to the switch on the control panel; PanCmd1, PanCmd2 and
PanCmd0 are connected to the Start/Stop buttons (see Figure 114 )
3BSE041488R101 263
264
Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode
Control Panel
Switch
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Controller
Process object
PanMode
PanCmd1
PanCmd2
PanCmd0
Section 5 Binary Process Control
Motor
Figure 114. The Panel mode control diagram. A general solution for smaller applications, where all four Panel parameters are connected from a control panel.
The PanMode parameter is connected via variables to interaction window.
The PanCmd1, PanCmd2 and PanCmd0 parameters are still connected to the physical Start/Stop buttons. Changes in the Panel mode are therefore approved centrally, that is, a local operator must first obtain permission
from the central control operator (see Figure 115
).
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Connect to a Control Panel in Panel Mode
Operator Workplace
Switch on screen
Controller
Process object
PanMode
PanCmd1
PanCmd2
PanCmd0
Motor
Control Panel
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Figure 115. The Panel mode control diagram. A general solution for large applications, where the PanMode parameter is connected to an operator workplace.
The status of the object is controlled by the signals PanCmd1, PanCmd2 and PanCmd0, which are level detected signals and function in the same way as AutoCmd signals, as illustrated in
PanCmd2 and PanCmd0 parameters should be connected to push buttons.
It may be advisable to use an R_Trig function block (trigger parameter and push button) between PanCmd1, PanCmd2 and PanCmd0, in case the push button malfunctions.
3BSE041488R101 265
266
Advanced Functions Section 5 Binary Process Control
Advanced Functions
This sub section contains information about the more advanced functions of the process objects. It also contains reference information for those who need to use all functions offered by the Process Object libraries:
•
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts on page 266 contains
information on the use of parameters for all types in the Process Object libraries.
•
ABB Drives Control on page 269 explains how to configure process objects for
controlling ABB Drives.
•
INSUM Control on page 289 describes how to configure process objects for
INSUM control.
For detailed information on the use of individual parameters, beyond the contents of this manual, see online help and the Control Builder editor. To open the editor, right-click the type and select Editor.
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts
In addition to the UniCore and BiCore core objects (see Process Object Template
Concept (Core Objects) on page 216), the Process Object Basic and Process Object
Extended libraries also use a number of function block types that can be used to enhance the functions of the process objects:
• The LevelDetection function block is be used to supervise a signal of type real.
When the in signal Value has been above the value of Level during the set
FilterTime, GTLevel is set to True.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts
• The UniDelayOfCmd and BiDelayOfCmd function block types are used to avoid false commands in Auto mode. The command signal is delayed, to avoid repeated starts and stops.
3BSE041488R101
If, for example, a level detector informs an object to start, a disturbance pulse should not be able to start the object. The object shall not start until the detector delivers a reliable, constant signal stating that the start level is reached. If the object is a motor, this behavior is very important, in order not to wear it out.
• The DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend function block types are
used for ABB Drives communication, see Examples on page 254.
• The PrioritySup function block type supervises the commands and sets the mode to Priority mode if any of the inputs are active. It also supervises the alarm status. Some are active and automatic priority to zero is performed, if
KeepOutAtErr is false.
It can be used, together with the OEText function blocks, to generate error messages.
267
Level Detection, Commands and Alarm Texts Section 5 Binary Process Control
• OETextUni, OETextBi, and OETextValveUni function block types are available in the Process Object Extended library. They can be used to generate error-text strings for the corresponding objects.
268
The following situations are taken care of and the corresponding texts are built:
– 'Name' Unit error
– 'Name' Channel error
– 'Name' Too low value
– 'Name' Too high value
– 'Name' Underflow
– 'Name' Overflow
– 'Name' Out of service
– 'Name' OE External error;
– 'Name' OE 'PriorityCmd02Txt'
– 'Name' OE 'PriorityCmd03Txt'
– 'Name' OE 'MotorValueTxt'
– 'Name' OE Out1/Out0; FB1=1/0; FB0=1/0
The OEText functions block have open code and may be copied and changed in a user-defined library.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
ABB Drives Control
This section describes things you have to consider when you want to control ABB drives using process objects:
•
ABB Drives Process Objects on page 270 introduces the ABB Drives Process
objects that are found in the ABB Drives Process Object library.
• More information on the behavior, configuration and operation of the ABB
Drives process objects can be found under
on page 274, Drive Speed References on page 275,
on page 276, Drive Torque Selector for
DCStdDrive(M) on page 277, Drive Torque Selector for EngDrive(M) on page
Priority and Interlocking on page 278, and
Alarm and Event Handling on page 279.
• The function blocks DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend are included in all ABB Drives process objects. For a description of those, see
DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend on page 281
•
ABB Drives Communication on page 284 shows how to configure
communication between an AC 800M controller and ABB Drives, using the
ABB Drives process objects.
•
ABB Drives Interaction Windows on page 288 provides Drives-specific
information on interaction windows.
3BSE041488R101 269
270
ABB Drives Control
ABB Drives Process Objects
There are three ABB Drives process objects:
• ACStdDrive(M)
Supports the control and supervision of
ABB AC Standard Drives.
It is based on UniCore for Process logic handling, and on DriveCommandSend and
DriveStatusReceive for handling the ABB
Drive interface/communication. Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for display of drive trips, drive alarms and object errors, such as communication and feedback errors from the device.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control
• DCStdDrive(M)
Supports the control and supervision of ABB
DC Standard Drives.
It is based on UniCore for process logic handling, and on DriveCommandSend and
DriveStatusReceive for handling ABB Drive interface/communication. Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for display of drive trips, drive alarms and object errors, such as communication and feedback errors from the device.
The function of DCStdDrive(M) and
ACStdDrive(M) is very similar.
ABB Drives Control
3BSE041488R101 271
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
• EngDrive(M)
Supports the control and supervision of ABB
Engineered Drives.
EngDrive(M) is based on UniCore for process logic handling, and on DriveCommandSend and DriveStatusReceive for handling ABB
Drives interface/communication. Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for display of drive trips, drive alarms and object errors, such as communication and feedback errors from the device.
EngDrive(M) operation modes work the same way as for DCStandardDrive(M).
Operation Modes
The Enable parameter is by default set to true, meaning that the function block or control module is executed. When Enable is False, the function block or control module is disabled, including all internal instances. All output signals are inactivated or set to zero.
ABB Drives process objects are based on UniCore, with the following operation modes.
• Manual Mode
In Manual mode, the operator controls the drive from the operator station, or from interaction windows in Control Builder.
Manual mode can be set via the interaction parameter. In Manual mode, the drive can only be started and stopped by setting the parameters InteractionPar.Manstart and
InteractionPar.ManStop.
The output parameter ManMode is true when the drive is in Manual mode. The speed reference is set with InteractionPar.ManSpdRefInput.
272 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
The default startup mode after a cold start is set via ManModeInit. The initial value is set to true, which means that manual mode will be the default mode.
By writing 'false' in the actual parameter column, you can change to auto mode instead. The parameter ManModeInit is copied to parameter ManMode at every cold start. Manual mode is always active when the Enable signal state goes from False to True.
• Auto Mode
Auto mode is set by setting InteractionPar.SetAuto or SetAuto to True.
In Auto mode, the status of the drive (start or stop) is controlled via the parameters AutoStart and AutoStop. The output parameter AutoMode is True when an object is in Auto mode. The speed reference is set using the parameter
AutoSP1.
• Panel Mode
Panel mode is set by setting InteractionPar.SetPan or SetPan to True.
In Panel mode, the drive is controlled via the parameters PanStart and PanStop.
The speed reference is set using the parameter PanSP1. The output parameter
PanMode is active when the object is in this mode.
Sometimes a panel connection is not available in the system. The displays and control logic for PanMode must not be activated. This is prevented by setting the parameter InteractionPar.PanelExists to False.
• Priority Mode
The drive is in Priority mode whenever a priority Start or Stop interlock is active. See
Priority and Interlocking on page 278.
• Group Start Mode
Group Start mode is set by setting the parameter InteractionPar.SetGroupStart.
In Group Start mode, the object is controlled via the parameter GroupStartIn.
The interlocking parameter GroupStartIlock prevents transfer to Group Start mode. In this mode, the output parameter GroupStartMode is active. The speed reference in this mode is AutoSP1.
3BSE041488R101 273
274
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
• Local Mode
In Local mode, the drive is controlled directly from CDP312 on the drive, bypassing the controller. Local mode can only be set and reset at the Drive. In
Local mode, all inputs from Auto mode and Manual mode, as well as all priority interlocks, are ignored. The object will return to the previous active mode when Local mode is disabled. The output parameter Remote is false when a drive is in Local mode.
• Out of Service Mode
Out of Service mode is set by setting the parameter InteractionPar.SetOos.
In Out Of Service Mode, the drive is stopped, and the operator controls the on the machine to which the drive belongs.
To exit Out of Service mode, change the mode to Manual, Auto, Group Start or
Panel. The output parameter OutOfService is active when the object is in this mode.
Drive States
The current state of a drive is available in the Status Word received from the drive
(see DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend on page 281). The drive can be in
any one of the following states, the active state is set to true in the object output:
• ReadyToSwitchOn: The drive is ready to be switched On.
• ReadyToRun: The drive is energized and ready to run
(EngDrive(M) only).
• Run: The drive is operating with a speed reference.
• Fault: The drive has tripped on an internal error.
• Alarm: The drive is reporting an internal warning, but it is not severe enough to stop the operation of the drive.
• AboveLimit: The actual frequency/speed is equal to or above supervision limit set by a parameter (for example, parameter 32.02 in ACS800).
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
Drive Speed References
ABB Drives objects transmit one speed reference, called SpdRef, to the drive.
There are the following input speed references:
• AutoSP1 in Auto mode & Group Start mode.
• PanSP1 in Panel mode.
• InteractionPar.ManSpdRefInput in Manual mode. This reference is set from the operator interface.
• PrioritySP1 in Priority mode. This value is set to half of
InteractionPar.MaxSpeed, in case it is set to zero in the application. This ensures that the motor runs when PriorityStart is true.
• AutoSP1CC, a control connection is available in the control modules. This reference is used in AutoMode only, if this is not connected then AutoSP1 is used as speed reference. (this reference is valid for EngDrive(M) only.)
The correct reference, depending on the active mode, is transmitted to the drive. The speed and torque set points in the object are set in engineering units selected by the system engineer.
The string for unit of speed is entered in InteractionPar.SpeedUnit. The string for unit of torque is entered in InteractionPar.TorqueUnit.
The object scales the speed signal to the drive units using InteractionPar.MaxSpeed and InteractionPar.EnableNegSpeed and torque signals using
InteractionPar.MaxTorque and InteractionPar.EnableNegTorque. See
DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend on page 281.
The speed set point in Manual mode is input from the operator station in the selected engineering units, for the convenience of the operator.
InteractionPar.ManSpdRefInput is used for this.
During a mode change, the drive maintains its previous state. It is the responsibility of the new state to ensure 'bumpless' transfer of the speed reference, when the drive is running.
In Manual mode, the reference is always initialized with ActualSpeed.
3BSE041488R101 275
276
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
Drive Torque Selector for ACStdDrive(M)
ACS800 drives have parameters for Master/Follower applications. The master and follower drives are connected by a fiber optic channel. The Master drive controls the start/stop of the follower drive. The object can be used to generate the desired torque reference for the follower drive.
The object and interaction window of the follower drive only display status and references. They do not control the drive in any manner, the master drive controls the follower drive.
Six options are available for setting the source of torque reference. The drive controller selects different torque references based on the input parameter
TorqueSelectorValue.
1 -> Speed Controlled
2 -> Torque Controlled
3 -> Min (minimum logic with speed error comparison)
4 -> Max (maximum logic with speed error comparison)
5 -> Window Control (Window control mode)
6 -> Zero Control
The selection of torque reference is made using parameters WindowControl and
TorqueSelectorValue. The parameters TrqSelectorOut, WindowCtrlSet and
TrqSelectorErr are the outputs of the object.
The default mode is Speed Control. In AutoMode, the drive can be run in different torque selector modes. In other modes like ManMode and PanMode, only speed control mode is possible.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
Drive Torque Selector for DCStdDrive(M)
The torque reference TrqRef is transmitted to the Drive.
DCS500B drive has a torque reference chain. This can be used to provide desired torque reference for the torque regulation. Six options are available for setting the source of torque reference. The drive controller selects different torque references based on the input parameter TorqueSelectorValue.
0 -> Zero Control
1 -> Speed Controlled
2 -> Torque Controlled
3 -> Min (minimum logic with speed error comparison)
4 -> Max (maximum logic with speed error comparison)
5 -> Window Control (Window control mode)
The selection of torque reference is made using parameters WindowControl and
TorqueSelectorValue. The parameters TrqSelectorOut, WindowCtrlSet and
TrqSelectorErr are the outputs of the object. The default mode is Speed Control. In
Auto mode, the drive can be run in different torque selector modes. In other modes like Manual mode and Panel mode, only speed control mode is possible.
Drive Torque Selector for EngDrive(M)
An Engineered Drive has a torque reference chain. This can be made use to provide desired torque reference for the torque regulation. Six options are available for setting the source of torque reference. The drive controller selects different torque references based on the input parameter TorqueSelectorValue.
– 1 -> Zero Control
– 2 -> Speed Controlled
– 3 -> Torque Controlled
– 4 -> Min (minimum logic with speed error comparison)
– 5 -> Max (maximum logic with speed error comparison)
– 6 -> Window Control (Window control mode)
3BSE041488R101 277
278
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
The selection of torque reference is made using parameters WindowControl and
TorqueSelectorValue. The parameters TrqSelectorOut, WindowCtrlSet and
TrqSelectorErr are the outputs of the object.
The default mode is Speed Control. In Auto mode, the drive can be run in different torque selector modes. In other modes like Manual mode and Panel mode, only speed control mode is possible.
Priority and Interlocking
Interlocking is used to stop process objects from entering a certain state. Priority parameters are used to force an object to a certain state. The following interlocking and priority functions are available for ABB Drives process objects:
• Priority Start (On) Interlocks
The parameter PriorityStart forces the drive to start. The process interlock can only be overridden by the priority Stop commands and the Inhibit parameter.
The speed reference when PriorityStart is active during PriorityMode is set to
PrioritySP1.
The parameter PriorityStartMan forces the drive to start and sets it to Manual mode.
• Priority Stop (Off) Interlocks
There are three different parameters, which can be used for priority Stop (Off) interlocks, forcing the drive to stop (stop and switch off), PriorityStop1,
PriorityStop2 and PriorityStop3 (PriorityOff1, PriorityOff2 and PriorityOff3).
The priority Stop (Off) can only be overridden by the Inhibit parameter.
The parameter PriorityStopMan (PriorityStopMan) forces the drive to stop and sets it to Manual mode.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
• Start/Stop Interlocks
The IlockStop and IlockStart are Start/Stop interlocks that prevent the drive from being manually forced to certain states. IlockStop blocks the drive from being stopped in ManMode and IlockStart blocks a manual start signal.
IlockStart does not stop a drive that is already running. The Inhibit parameter overrides these Interlocks also.
• Inhibit
The Inhibit parameter overrides all active interlocks when set to True.
Alarm and Event Handling
The following alarms are generated for ABB Drives objects:
• Warnings
Warnings are alarms from a drive that do not trip the motor. These need to be acknowledged by operator and are time stamped in the controller.
• Faults
Faults are alarms from the drive which trip the motor. These need to be acknowledged by the operator and are time stamped in the controller.
• Object Errors
Object errors can be any of the following, or a combination:
– Communication error from the drive.
– Feedback error from the drive.
– PriorityStop2 or PriorityStop3 interlock active.
– EmergencyStop and EmergencyStop with ramp, issued to the drive.
Details of the particular internal error that has occurred can be found in the description field in the alarm list.
Alarms are acknowledged via the input parameter, AlarmsAck. The operator acknowledges it in the alarm list. All alarms can be disabled by
InteractionPar.DisableAlarms.
3BSE041488R101 279
280
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
Both a feedback error from the drive and drive having tripped will force the object to go to state Stop (Run is false). EngDrive(M) will switch off, that is,
ReadyToSwitchOn is False. That means that whenever the drive returns to normal mode, a start command will never be active until the command has been reactivated.
The following parameters are associated with alarm handling:
• AEConfigX (where X is any of the alarms above), sets the behavior when there is an active alarm.
• AESeverityX (where X is any of the alarms above), sets the severity of the alarm.
• ALStateX (where X is any of the alarms above), displays the state of the alarm.
• AEClass, the class which all alarms belong to.
• Warnings, active output when there is a Warning alarm active.
• Trips, active output when there is a Trip alarm active.
• ObjErr, active output when there is an ObjectError alarm active.
For more information on alarm and event parameters and alarm and event handling, see alarm and event information in the manual Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Configuration, and online help for the object in question.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend
The function blocks DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend are included in the drive control types ACStdDrive(M), DCStdDrive(M), and EngDrive(M).
3BSE041488R101
DriveStatusReceive are used to retrieve the status from a drive, after which the program or operator makes a decision based on this information. A command can then be issued to the drive using DriveCommandSend.
ABB Drives process object types can also be used to build custom ABB Drives control solutions. In this case, you should consider the following:
281
282
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
•
Execution Order
The execution order is always DriveStatusReceive, UniCore,
DriveCommandSend. In this way, communication delays are avoided. The start parameter (Start) is a level signal with a hold function.
•
Status and Control Word
The Command, RawSP1, RawSP2, Status, RawPV1 and RawPV2 parameters are to be connected to the drive, independent of the media through which data is transferred. The drive communicates with the controller though drive data
sets and the parameters are to be connected to the drive according to Table 35
.
The drive data set number may differ between different types of ABB Drives, see
ABB Drives documentation for the drive in question.
Table 35. Drive data sets and parameters.
Drive Data Set 1 Drive Data Set 2
Data Words
1.1
1.2
Command RawSP1
1.3
RawSP2
Data Words
2.1
Status
2.2
RawPV1
2.3
RawPV2
•
Emergency Stop
There are two command parameters that can cause an emergency stop, Off2 and Off3. If the application demands an emergency stop through one of these parameters, the drive stops according to local emergency settings on the drive.
The priority for emergency stops is controlled by the drive. The priority of emergency stop is higher than that of the stop and start commands.
The Off2 and Off3 parameters do not have any effect on the drive, if it is not in its remote state (locally controlled drive).
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
•
Controlling the Drive
There are two sets of commands that start/stop a Drive:
– On/Off:
In a DC Drive, On/Off switches on/off the main contactor/circuit breaker and also energizes/deenergizes the field, motor fan and drive module cooling fan. In an AC engineered Drive, the incoming DC converter bridge is switched on, and the DC bus energized.
– Start/Stop:
Start/Stop releases/blocks the pulses to the output power bridge. On the start command, the drive controllers release torque and speed references and start the motor.
For an AC Standard Drive, a start/stop command is sufficient. The same command can be connected to Switch On and Start, Switch Off and Stop.
When both start (Switch On) and stop (Switch Off) orders are given though the input parameters, the stop (Switch Off) order has the higher priority.
In order to prepare a drive for start/switch on, the following must be fulfilled:
– The drive must be configured to receive commands from the Fieldbus.
– Communication must be running (Drive<->Controller).
– No activated emergency stop (Off2, Off3).
– After drive fault, the Drive must be reset before continuing operation.
•
Scaling of Drive Values
It is possible to scale all reference and set point values according to local settings in the drive unit. These variables are used in the Function Blocks
DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend.
DriveMaxMin1 is the maximum numerical value of the first process variable, for example speed reference and actual values in a Drive. This value for speed is +/- 20000 for ACS800.
DriveMaxMin2 is the maximum numerical value of the second process variable, for example torque reference and actual values in a Drive. This value is +/-10000 for ACS800.
Pv1MaxMin is the maximum value of the first process variable (for example speed) in engineering value. If a processing line has the speed of 1500 m/s, this value is set to 1500. The value 1500 is then scaled using DriveMaxMin1.
3BSE041488R101 283
284
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
Pv2MaxMin is the maximum value of he second process variable (for example torque) value in engineering value. Scaling is similar to Pv1MaxMin.
If the application requires only unipolar values (for example no negative references), then both Pv1MaxMin and Pv2MaxMin have to be limited externally. SP1MaxMin and SP2MaxMin are the corresponding set point values for speed and torque in the DrivesCommandSend.
ABB Drives Communication
ACStdDrive(M), DCStdDrive(M), and EngDrive(M) all contain the
DriveStatusReceive and DriveCommandSend function blocks. For more information on those function blocks, see
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
Figure 117 shows communication between an AC 800M Controller
and an ABB Standard Drive.
Figure 116. Overview of the connections between an ABB Standard Drive and an
AC 800M Controller, part A-B
3BSE041488R101 285
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
286
Figure 117. Overview of the connections between ABB Drive and AC 800M
Controller, part C-A (black arrow = fixed connection)
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control ABB Drives Control
To configure communication: a.
Establish the communication channels (part A in Figure 116
and
The communication protocols between AC800M and ABB Drives may be:
- ModuleBus,
- PROFIBUS DP-V0,
- PROFIBUS DP-V1,
- DriveBus.
The setting must be done either in AC 800M, or in the ABB Drive, so that they use the same protocol and define the same communication channels.
For AC 800M, the setting is defined in the Hardware Editor of the applied communication interface. Refer to online help and the manual
Communication, Protocols and Design for further information. The
Hardware Editor for different protocols might use different names for the same communication channel. For ABB Drive configuration, refer to ABB
Drives documentation.
b.
Define the data to be sent and received in AC 800M Controller (part B in
In AC 800M, this is done by making variable connections between the
ACStdDrive function block and the Hardware Editor of the applied communication interface, using variable connections. The most important thing is that the required process data on the Drive side must be connected on the same communication channel used by the corresponding data in
ACStdDrive function block. For example, in Figure 116
, Actual Speed in
ACStdDrive function block must be connected to DS4 ch 2, so that the parameter can get the correct information.
3BSE041488R101 287
288
ABB Drives Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
c.
Define the data to be sent and received in the ABB Standard Drive (part C
).
For example, define the connection between parameter index 01.02
(ActSpeed) with parameter index 92.05 (DS4 word 2) in ABB Standard
Drive. How to connect those parameter indexes in the Drive is described in
ABB Drives documentation. A black arrow in
connection that is not configurable.
The same method is also used to establish communication with EngDrive(M).
The differences are only the number of communication channels and the data to be sent and received.
ABB Drives Interaction Windows
The Drives control types in the Process Object Drives library have four interaction
Windows, the main for manual control and some supervision, one for configuring the object, one to display Process interlock and Priority signal status and one for
Group Start mode. The main window is displayed first, the others can be displayed by clicking the corresponding Icons on the main window.
For information on icons used in interaction windows, see Appendix C, Process
Graphics Icons .
DCStdDrive(M) has two additional parameters that can be set in Control Builder using interaction parameters. The parameters are:
• DriveSpeedScale: Maximum speed of Motor in Drive Units (for example.
20000 for DCS500B).
• DriveTorqueScale: Nominal Torque in Drive Units (for example 4000 for
DCS500B).
All ABB Drives internally scale speed to +/-20000 and torque to +/- 10000. This unit is different for DCS500B. However, future DC Drives can be expected to follow
ABB Drives scaling.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
INSUM Control
This section describes control INSUM devices using the process objects
InsumBreaker(M), MCUBasic(M), and MCUExtended(M):
•
INSUM Process Object Types on page 290 contains a short description of each
of the INSUM process objects in the INSUM Process Object library.
• Additional information on the behavior, configuration and operation of the
INSUM process objects can be found under Operation Modes on page 293,
Circuit Breaker and MCU States on page 295,
Priority and Interlocking on page 297, Priority and
Alarm and Event Handling on page 298,
Control Builder Interaction Windows on page 301.
3BSE041488R101 289
290
INSUM Control
INSUM Process Object Types
There are three INSUM process object types:
• INSUMBreaker(M)
Used to control and supervise an
INSUM trip unit for circuit breakers.
INSUMBreaker(M) is based on
UniCore for process logic and
INSUMRead and INSUMWrite blocks for communication with the device. Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for the display of trips, warnings and other errors, such as communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control
• MCUBasic(M)
Used for control and supervise an
INSUM MCU. It supports the control of two starter types, NR-DOL and REV-
DOL and two MCU types, MCU1 and
MCU2.
MCUBasic(M) is based on BiCore for process logic and INSUMRead, and on
INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device. Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for the display of trips, warnings and other errors, that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
INSUM Control
3BSE041488R101 291
292
INSUM Control
• MCUExtended(M)
Used to control and supervise an INSUM
MCU. It supports the control of four starter types, NR-DOL, REV-DOL, NR-
SD and NR-2N.
McuExtended(M) is developed for the control of an MCU2 and has options of reading/writing to general purpose I/Os.
It is based on BiCore for process logic, and includes INSUMRead and
INSUMWrite blocks for communication with the device.
Blocks for alarm handling are also included, for the display of trips, warnings and other errors, such as communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
Operation Modes
The Enable parameter is by default set to True, meaning that the object is executed.
When Enable is False, the object is disabled, including all internal types. All output parameters are inactivated or set to 0.
All three INSUM process objects have the same modes (with the exception of Soft
Local mode, which is not valid for circuit breakers). There are only minor differences, which are pointed out below.
• Manual Mode
The input parameter ManModeInit sets the default startup mode after a cold start. If this parameter is True, control will be manual (Manual mode), otherwise it will be automatic (Auto mode). When an object returns from being disabled, it is always in Manual mode.
Manual mode is activated via InterationPar.SetMan. In Manual mode, the parameter ManMode is True.
Open and Close commands to circuit breakers in manual mode are sent via the
InteractionPar variables InteractionPar.ManOpen and
InteractionPar.ManClose.
Manual control of MCUs is possible via the parameters
InteractionPar.ManStartRun1, InteractionPar.ManStartRun2 and
InteractionPar.ManStop.
In Manual mode, the operator can switch to Auto, Soft Local (McuBasic(M) and MCUExtended(M) only), Out of Service, and Group Start mode. The operator is also able to reset trips from a circuit breaker or MCU
(InteractionPar.Reset) and activate TOL bypass for MCUs (set
InteractionPar.TOLBypassActive to True).
• Auto Mode
Auto mode is activated via the parameter SetAuto or the interaction parameter
InteractionPar.SetAuto. In Auto mode, the status of a circuit breaker (open or closed) is controlled by the parameters AutoOpen and AutoClose, while the status of an MCU is controlled by the parameters AutoStartRun1,
AutoStartRun2, and AutoStartStop.
3BSE041488R101 293
294
INSUM Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
In Auto mode, active trips can be reset and it is possible to override the parameters in InteractionPar. The output parameter AutoMode is True as long as the object is in Auto mode.
• Priority Mode
Priority mode is active when any of the process interlock or priority interlock
parameters described in Priority and Interlocking on page 278 are True.
Priority mode can be overridden by the Inhibit parameter, by manual commands, or by setting the circuit breaker or MCU in Local mode.
•
Group Start Mode
Group Start mode is activated via the InteractionPar.SetGroupStart parameter.
In Group Start mode, the object is controlled by the parameter GroupStartIn
(circuit breakers), or by the parameters GroupStartIn1 and GroupStartIn2
(MCUs). The parameter GroupStartIlock prevents changes to Group Start mode. In Group Start mode, the output parameter GroupStartMode is True.
For more information about the Group Start library, see
• Local Mode
Local mode means that the circuit breaker or MCU is not controlled from the process object, but via direct input, bypassing the controller. Local mode can only be set or reset directly at the circuit breaker or MCU. In this mode, all input from Auto mode and Manual mode is ignored.
When local mode is disabled, the object will return to its previous mode. The output parameter LocMode is True when in Local mode.
Priority mode and priority manual commands cannot be executed in this mode.
• External Mode
If you activate External mode it will provide other objects like the MMI all rights reserved of sending commands to a MCU. Thus, preventing a user (via faceplates) to interfere with an action given from the MMI. Although, an Insum object in External mode cannot send commands to a MCU, it can still read the
MCU status.
External mode is activated via the InteractionPar.SetExternal and is indicated in the parameter External mode.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
• Soft Local Mode (MCU control only)
Soft Local mode works as Local mode, but with the difference that Soft Local mode is activated from a remote point of control, for example, an interaction window. Remote control is also reset directly from the interaction window.
When an MCU is in Soft Local mode, an indication is shown on the interaction window (the same indication as for Local mode, but the difference is that the push button for setting the MCU to remote control is active).
• Out of Service Mode
Out of service mode is entered using the command
InteractionPar.SetOutOfService. It is only possible to enter this mode when the status of a circuit breaker is Open (when the status of an MCU is Stopped). In this mode, it is not possible to maneuver the circuit breaker or MCU, but it is possible to change modes and exit Out of service mode. The output parameter
OutOfServiceMode is active when in this mode.
Circuit Breaker and MCU States
The current state of a circuit breaker, Open or Closed, is shown by the output parameters Open and Closed, respectively. More detailed information is displayed at the interaction window.
The current state of the MCU is shown by the output parameters Runs1, Runs2 and
Stopped. Runs1 and Runs2 basically mean that the MCU is in any of its running states, and Stopped that the MCU is stopped. Changing states for an MCU is handled via its associated commands. More detailed information is displayed in the interaction window.
MCUExtended(M) has two additional states: Star and Delta. The Star and Delta output parameters have different meaning depending on the motor starter type used,
see Motor Starter Types on page 296.
3BSE041488R101 295
296
INSUM Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
MCU Types
As McuBasic(M) supports the use of both MCU1 and MCU2, the configuration in the object must indicate which one is being used (via InteractionPar.MCU) as some functionality provided by McuBasic only is available for MCU2 types. This is not necessary for McuExtended(M), since this type is intended for use with MCU2 only.
McuBasic(M) supports the object is made via InteractionPar.StarterType (0 = NR-
DOL, 1=REV-DOL). As NR-DOL is a starter type that only activates two states
(Runs1 and Stopped), all commands and input parameters associated with output parameter Runs2 do not have any function for this starter type, that is, if the
InteractionPar.StarterType is set to 0, activating AutoStartRun2 will not affect the object in any way.
Motor Starter Types
Table 36 shows supported motor starter types.
Table 36. Supported motor starter types. X=supported, -=not supported.
NR-DOL REV-DOL NR-SD NR-2N
MCUBasic(M) X X -
MCUExtended(M) X X X X
The motor starter type is selected via InteractionPar.StarterType (0 = NR-DOL,
1=REV-DOL, 2=NR-SD and 3=NR-2N):
• NR-DOL only activates two states (Runs1 and Stopped). Parameters associated with Runs2 do not have any effect for this motor starter type.
• For NR-SD, all commands and input parameters associated with Runs2 have no function (as for NR-DOL). For this starter type, output Star means that the starter is star connected and, accordingly, output Delta means that the starter is delta connected.
• For NR-2N, the commands and input parameters associated with Runs2, that is,
AutoStartRun2, PriorityStartRun2, GroupStartIn2 etc., puts the starter in its high-speed state. However, Runs2 itself has no function for this configuration.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
Instead, an active output Runs1 indicates that the MCU is in its running state and the speed is indicated via the outputs Star and Delta, where Star is the lowspeed and Delta the high-speed indication.
Priority and Interlocking
Interlocking is used to stop process objects from entering a certain state. Priority parameters are used to force an object to a certain state. The following interlocking and priority functions are available for INSUM process objects:
• Process Interlocks
Setting the parameter PriorityClose to True forces a circuit breaker to close.
For MCUs, the parameters PriorityStartRun1 and PriorityStartRun2 forces the
MCU to go to state Runs1 and Runs2, respectively.
Process interlocks can only be overridden by Priority interlocks, the Inhibit parameter and by manual commands.
• Priority Interlocks
For circuit breakers, the parameters PriorityOpen1, PriorityOpen2 and
PriorityOpen3 can be used to force the circuit breaker to open. For MCUs, the parameters PriorityStop1, PriorityStop2 and PriorityStop3 can be used to force the MCU to stop.
PriorityOpen2, PriorityOpen3, PriorityStop2 and PriorityStop3 all generate an alarm (ObjectError) when activated.
Priority Interlocks can only be overridden by the Inhibit parameter and manual commands.
• Priority Manual Commands
For circuit breakers, PriorityCloseMan and PriorityOpenMan force the circuit breaker into the corresponding state (Closed or Open), and sets the process object in Manual mode. For MCUs, PriorityStartRun1Man,
PriorityStartRun2Man and PriorityStopMan force the MCU into the corresponding state and then sets the process object in Manual mode.
PriorityCloseMan and PriorityStopMan also generate an alarm.
Priority manual commands have no function when a circuit breaker or MCU is in Local mode or Priority mode.
3BSE041488R101 297
298
INSUM Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
If priority manual commands are executed while in Priority mode, an MCU will change to the corresponding state, but the change to Manual mode will not take place until Priority mode is left (that is, all Priority commands are inactivated or a possible feedback error is acknowledged).
• Open/Close and Start/Stop Interlocks
For circuit breakers, IlockClose and IlockOpen are prevent circuit breakers from being transferred to certain states manually. IlockClose blocks the circuit breaker from manual closure and IlockOpen blocks manual open signals.
IlockClose does not open an already closed circuit breaker.
For MCUs, IlockStartRun1, IlockStartRun2 and IlockStop prevent the MCU from being transferred to certain states manually. IlockStartRun1 blocks the
MCU from manual start to Run1 state, IlockStartRun2 blocks manual start to
Run2 state, and IlockStop blocks a manual stop command. IlockStartRun1 and
IlockStartRun2 do not stop MCUs that are already in a running state.
• Inhibit
Setting the Inhibit parameter to True overrides all active interlocks. Ilock parameters prevent both manual control and control in Auto mode.
Alarm and Event Handling
The following alarms can be generated for INSUM objects:
• Warnings
Alarms from a circuit breaker or MCU can be warnings, for example, alarms that do not trip the breaker or MCU. Warnings are acknowledged by the operator in the operator workplace alarm list, or by activating the parameter
WarningsAck at the object. This alarm is time-stamped in the controller.
• Trips
Trips are alarms that indicate that a circuit breaker or motor has tripped. If the parameter ExtErrTimeStamp is True, trips might also be a warning with an external time stamp from the breaker or MCU. Which type of alarm a trip is can be seen in the description field in the operator workplace alarm list, where all warning and trip details are displayed. A trip is acknowledged by the operator in the alarm list, or by activating the parameter TripsAck at the object.
3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
• Object Errors
Object errors can be any of the following, or a combination:
– Communication read error in an INSUMRead function block.
– Communication write error in an INSUMWrite function block.
– Feedback error from the circuit breaker or MCU.
– Any of PriorityOpen2 or PriorityOpen3 is True.
– PriorityCloseMan or PriorityStopMan generates an alarm
More information about which ObjectError has occurred is displayed in the description field in the alarm list. As with other alarms, ObjectError can be acknowledged from the alarm list or from the object (via ObjErrAck).
Both a feedback error from the device and the circuit breaker having tripped will force the breaker/MCU to go to state Open/Stopped and the object will go to
Priority mode. That means that whenever the circuit breaker or MCU returns to normal mode, a start command will not become active until the command has been re-activated.
Whether alarms should be time-stamped in the circuit breaker or MCU, or not, is controlled by the parameter ExtErrTimeStamp. If ExtErrTimeStamp is True, the inputs CIPos and GWPos must be set in order to get the alarms from the correct circuit breaker or MCU. Setting this parameter disables the Warning alarm, since both warnings and trips will be included in the alarm Trip, as described above.
It is possible to acknowledge alarms from Control Builder interaction windows. To open an interaction window, click on the relevant alarm triangle icon in the interaction window.
The following parameters are associated with alarm handling:
• AEConfigX (where X is any of the alarms above), sets the behavior when there is an active alarm,
• AESeverityX (where X is any of the alarms above), sets the severity of the alarm,
• ALStateX (where X is any of the alarms above), displays the state of the alarm,
• AEClass, sets the class to which an alarm belongs,
• Warnings, active output when there is a Warning alarm active,
• Trips, active output when there is a Trip alarm active,
3BSE041488R101 299
INSUM Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
• ObjErr, active output when there is an ObjectError alarm active.
For more information on alarm and event parameters and alarm and event handling, see alarm and event information in the manual Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Configuration, and online help for the object in question.
All alarms can be disabled by activating the configuration parameter
InteractionPar.DisableAlarms.
Supervision
The following NVs are read to the object from InsumBreaker(M):
• NV NodeStatus,
• NV CurrentReport,
• NV AlarmReport.
NodeStatus and AlarmReport are read every execution cycle, while CurrentReport is read with a cyclic interval that is set by the parameter
InteractionPar.ProcessDataScanTime.
The following MCU NVs are read to the object from McuBasic(M):
• NV CurrentReport
• NV CalcProcValue
• NV TimeToReset
• NV TimeToTrip
• NV CumRunT
• NV OpCount1
• NV OpCount2
• NV OpCount3
• NV AlarmReport
• NV MotorStateExt
• NV ActualCA1
MotorStateExt, AlarmReport and ActualCA1 are read every execution cycle, while the others are updated with a cyclic time interval set by the parameter
InteractionPar.ProcessDataScanTime.
300 3BSE041488R101
Section 5 Binary Process Control INSUM Control
• The following MCU NVs are read to the McuExtended(M) object:
– NV CurrentReport
–
NV VoltageReport (optional)
– NV PowerReport
– NV CalcProcValue
– NV TimeToReset
– NV TimeToTrip
– NV CumRunT
– NV OpCount1
– NV OpCount2
– NV OpCount3
– NV GpIn1
– NV GpIn2
– NV GpOut1Fb
– NV GpOut2Fb
– NV AlarmReport
– NV MotorStateExt
– NV ActualCA1
MotorStateExt, AlarmReport, ActualCA1, GpIn1, GpIn2, GpOut1Fb and
GpOut2Fb are read every execution cycle, while the others are updated with a cyclic time interval set by the InteractionPar.ProcessDataScanTime parameter.
Control Builder Interaction Windows
All three types in the Process Object INSUM library has four interaction windows: a main window for manual control and some supervision, one for extended supervision, one for configuring the object, and one for group start. The main interaction window is displayed first, and the others are displayed by clicking the corresponding icons at the top of the main INSUM Control window.
For information on icons used in interaction windows, see Appendix C, Process
Graphics Icons .
3BSE041488R101 301
302
INSUM Control Section 5 Binary Process Control
3BSE041488R101
Section 6 Synchronized Control
Introduction
Group Start library can be used to build procedures for starting and stopping processes. The library is intended to be used together with objects from the Process
Object Basic and Process Object Extended libraries.
The Group Start library is based on a control module philosophy. The stop sequence is always the reverse of the start sequence. This makes the Group Start library suitable for creating start and stop procedures for machines. Group Start support several initial head control modules.
Group Start Library
The group start library contains objects to control and supervise a sequential startup of process objects as well as other units that may be seen as process objects.
The GroupStartLib standard library organizes the control modules needed to build
Group start applications. One exception is the GroupStartObjConn control module which is placed in BasicLib in order to avoid unnecessary dependencies between the process object libraries and the GroupStartLib.
Group Start Concept
It is easy to use the Group Start functionality in the Control Builder. Configuring complex configurations to handle start and stop objects in group start is made with control modules connected by graphical connections. The user gets an overview of the connected object and object status and control are centralized to the head of the
Group Start. Information is given about the present starting object as well as the next object to be started. Group Starts may be build in a hierarchal way that complete group starts may be looked upon as objects. The hierarchy may be made in several levels and may be connected in any object position.
3BSE041488R101 303
304
Group Start Objects Section 6 Synchronized Control
The connected objects may be standard process objects from the ProcessObj libraries, but may also be of some other kind like complete control loops that can have an on/off situation associated. In a control loop the on/off switch may consist of for example a set point change from one value to another.
Group Start Objects
In the following you can find the objects for GroupStartLib and a short description of each object:
• GroupStartHead
GroupStartHead supervises the entire group, keeps track of the alarms generated in the group and detects the connected objects not ready for start in group start mode.
• GroupStartStep
GroupStartStep is used to define a step in a Group Start sequence
• GroupStartAnd
GroupStartAnd can be used when two or more Group Start groups need to be synchronized before a Group Start object/sub-group is started.
• GroupStartOr
GroupStartOr can be used when a Group Start object/sub-group is started from two or more Group Start groups.
• GroupStartObjectTemplate
GroupStartObjectTemplate is used to connect a generic process object to the group start, using the structured data type ProcObjConnection.
• GroupStartTestObject
GroupStartTestObject can be used during design / commissioning to test the
Group Start before all process objects are in place.
• GroupStartStandby4, 8, 12
These modules shall be used for standby purposes and to be able to activate a desired number of objects all working together in the process.
• IfoParGroupStartObjectTemplate
This control module type contains the graphics of the interaction window of the
GroupStartObjectTemplate type
3BSE041488R101
Section 7 Surveillance
Introduction
This section presents a short description about the signal and vote loop concept in the SignalLib.
Signal and Vote Loop Concept
Overview
Vote control module types may be connected to objects with vote logic (control module types with a voting parameter). The vote control module types are used to define different rules that make it possible to control the process to predetermined states. This means that the process can behave differently, depending on valid rule, for example shutdown the process.
The SignalLib library consists of control modules for signal input, voting and output signals and the ProcessObjLib libraries consist of control modules for process control. The ControlLib libraries consist of control modules for control loops and calculation.
A typical usage for vote control modules are applications that are divided into signal loops, where voting with signal status diagnostics and communication to external applications is an essential and integrated part of the application. Each loop contains input signal control modules, vote control modules and output control modules. The output signals in the vote control modules are latched and can be reset from the process output signal control module or from any connected vote control module in the loop. The latched command signals are sent via MMS to a separate (non-SIL) application in addition to a local alarm/event.
3BSE041488R101 305
306
Overview Section 7 Surveillance
Figure 118 shows the principal voting data flow for a SIF (Safety Instrumented
Functions) loop and
Figure 120 shows some combination possibilities between SIF
loop logic and common programmer calculation code, using the input signals from signal objects real as well as boolean types. The vote control modules have a possibility to combine the action together with a command number inside the structured component VotedConnection. Then, the receiving object as e.g. a process object like a motor or a valve may decode this command into different actions inside the process object like PriorityCmd0 or/and perhaps ILock1. PriorityCmd0 or/and
ILock1 are defined by an input parameter (xxxConfig) for each possible action where xxx is representing the specific action, for example PriorityCmd0Config. This gives the possibility for different Vote control modules to take different (or equal) actions in the process object.
The selections in xxxConfig are displayed in the faceplate of the process object and the signal output control modules.
xxxConfig word.
The voted commands are numbered from 1 to 32 to define a corresponding bit in the
3BSE041488R101
Section 7 Surveillance Overview
Out
Command number
The Command number is a parameter integer value defining a bit in a word to be compared with the xxxConfig pararmeters.
Ex: Command number=4
Command number 1-4 may change if
<>0
The lowest command number of the activated inputs are sent on the output
PriorityCmd0Config
PriorityCmd1Config
ILock1Config
Process Object defines actions
The number of xxxConfig are dependent on the process object type and may vary.
The xxxConfig values are defined by an dword value that may be entered as a parameter 2#1000
Figure 118. Configuration example of vote logic. (SIR=Signal In Real, and
SIB=Signal In Bool)
The output from a vote control module may also be connected to other objects
defined in Table 38 , for example, an output signal object that defines the action of
the output signal when the voted signal is activated.
The coding method of the xxxConfig parameters is based upon which state the process is to enter when the command is received. To enter a specific process state, the process object has to give one or several commands. The different commands
may be individual for different output control modules types, as listed in Table 38 .
3BSE041488R101 307
Overview Section 7 Surveillance
308
The square color changes when the bit pattern match the received command number..
Red color is used when both Cmd and
LatchedCmd are true.
Gren color is used when Cmd component has return to false state.
White squares indicate the value of the received command number.
Black squares indicate the configured behavour of hte different actions.
Figure 119. Example of Voted commands indications in a faceplate of a process object (MotorUniM).
The process object in the example has three different command types that are affecting the process object in three different ways:
• PriorityManCmd 0 and 1
• PriorityCmd 0, and 1
• Lock0 and 1
The corresponding config parameters contains a bit pattern that is compared to the command bit position and if they match the command is given to the process object.
These commands are or-ed with the corresponding parameters and finally the process object priorities what actually shall be performed. If for example the
PriorityCmdMan0 command is given from the voting logic and the input parameter
PriorityCmdMan1 also is true, the PriorityCmdMan0 will be the result. The
xxxConfig parameters together with the command bit pattern is displayed in the faceplate.
3BSE041488R101
Example Section 7 Surveillance
Example
Figure 120. Configuration example of vote logic.
As a result of the upper vote control module in the control module diagram above, the process is to shut down completely, and as a result of the second vote control module the process is to be placed in a stand by mode.
3BSE041488R101 309
310
Example Section 7 Surveillance
Solution
Start to define the behavior of the different process objects or connected outputs at
shutdown and standby, according to following:
Behavior
Shutdown
Action
The upper process object shall run (use PriorityCmd)
The middle process object shall prevent the automation program to transfer the object into the stopped position
(use ILock0)
The lower process object shall stop and when the vote condition has been released be placed in manual mode
(use PriorityManCmd0)
The upper process object shall run (Use PriorityCmd1) Standby
The middle process object shall not be affected.
The lower process object shall prevent the automation program to transfer the object into the started position
(Use ILock1)
This gives the following settings on the objects:
Object
Upper
vote
Lower vote
Upper process object
Middle process object
Lower process object
Setting
OutCommandNumber: 1
OutCommandNumber: 2
PriorityCmd0Config: 2#1
PriorityCmd0Config: 2#10
ILock0Config: 2#1
PriorityManCmd0Config: 2#1
ILock1Config: 2#10
3BSE041488R101
Section 7 Surveillance Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic
Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic
There are two types of objects that support Voting logic:
• Objects determining specified situations like too high values, sending it to the voting objects (sending objects).
• Objects receives voted commands and are responding to them (receiving objects).
Sending Objects
Sending objects send the detected information into a node of VoteConnection. The table below displays sending objects and also describes the possible detected situations related to the InxLevelConfig parameter of the voting objects. Values of
InxLevelConfig outside the described range or on objects where the value is marked with a “x” gives ParError in ParError detecting objects.
InxLevelConfig in Voting object
Object
SignalInBoolM
SignalBoolCalcInM
SignalInRealM x
Yes
SignalSimpleInRealM Yes
SignalRealCalcInM Yes x
Real
Value
Out
(1)
Table 37. Sending VoteConnection standard objects
= -3 = -2 = -1 = 0 = 1
x x x DiffNormal x x x
LLL LL x
L
DiffNormal x x H x x
LLL LL
L
L x x
H
H
PidCC
PidAdvancedCC
Yes
Yes x x x x
DevNeg x
DevNeg x
= 2
x x
HH
= 3
x x
HHH x
HH x
HHH
DevPos x x
DevPos Oscillation detected
Sluggish control detected
3BSE041488R101 311
312
Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic Section 7 Surveillance
Object
Level2CC
Level4CC
Level6CC
BiM
UniM
ValveUniM
MotorBiM
MotorUniM
InsumBreakerM
McuBasicM
McuExtendedM
ACStdDriveM
InxLevelConfig in Voting object
Table 37. Sending VoteConnection standard objects (Continued)
= -3 = -2 = -1 = 0 = 1 = 2
x x x x x x x x
Real
Value
Out
(1)
Yes
Yes x x
Yes x x
LL
LLL LL x x x x x x x x x x
Trip Warn ing
Object error
Trip Warn ing
Object error
Trip Warn ing
Object error
Trip Warn ing
Object error
L
L x x
L
Object error x
Off Object error error error
Object error
Object
Off
Object
Closed
Stopped
Stopped
Opened
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
H
H x
HH x x
H
On Pos
1
HH HHH
On Pos 2 x
On x x
Opened x
Runs
Pos1
Runs
Runs
Pos2 x
Closed x x x x x
Runs
Pos1
Runs
Pos1
Runs
Runs
Pos2 x
Runs
Pos2 x
Stopped Runs
= 3
3BSE041488R101
Section 7 Surveillance Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic
InxLevelConfig in Voting object
Table 37. Sending VoteConnection standard objects (Continued)
= -3 = -2 = -1 = 0 = 1 = 2 = 3
Object
DCStdDriveM
EngDriveM
Real
Value
Out
(1)
x x
Trip Warn ing
Object error
Trip Warn ing
Object error
Stopped
Stopped
Runs
Runs
Current
Off
Current
Off
Current
On
Current
On
(1) Sends a real value to be used in the statistic calculation of the vote object (highest, lowest, median and average value).
Receiving Objects
The sending objects receive the voted information and reacts on it, dependent of the nature and possibilities of the individual object. The table below displays the sending objects and also describes the possible different behavior.
Table 38. Receiving VotedConnection standard objects
Object
SignalBoolCalcOutM
SignalOutBoolM
SignalRealCalcOutM
SignalOutRealM
Freeze
Freeze
Freeze
Freeze
SignalSimpleOutRealM Freeze
PidCC ->Auto mode
Voting Action
Predetermined Value
Predetermined Value
Predetermined Value
Predetermined Value
Predetermined Value
-> External setpoint -> Tracking mode
3BSE041488R101 313
314
Standard Object Types that Support Voting Logic Section 7 Surveillance
Table 38. Receiving VotedConnection standard objects (Continued)
Object
PidAdvancedCC ->Auto mode
Voting Action
-> External setpoint -> Tracking mode
SelectorCC
Selector4CC
Select predefined input channel
Select predefined input channel also in chained configuration
ManualAutoCC -> Auto mode
SignalSupervisionCC Freeze
BiM
UniM
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1
ValveUniM
MotorBiM
MotorUniM
InsumBreakerM
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
Predetermined Value
Priority 0, 1, 2
Priority 0, 1,
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
McuBasicM
McuExtendedM
ACStdDriveM
DCStdDriveM
EngDriveM
Mimo22CC
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
Selects a specified equation
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1, 2
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
PriorityMan 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1, 2
Interlock 0.1
Interlock 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1, 2
Interlock 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1, 2
Interlock 0, 1, 2
Interlock 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1
Interlock 0, 1
3BSE041488R101
Section 7 Surveillance Vote Control Module Types
Table 38. Receiving VotedConnection standard objects (Continued)
Voting Action Object
Mimo41CC
Mimo44CC
Selects a specified equation
Selects a specified equation
Vote Control Module Types
Type Name
Vote1oo1Q
VoteXoo3Q
Library Description
SignalLib Performs voting of one input signal, where the signal quality is considered together with the activation signal from the input module, for example from SignalInRealM. The vote output is set if the input signal if either activated or have bad quality.
SignalLib Performs voting of up to three input signals, where the signal quality is considered together with the activation signal from the input modules, for example from SignalInRealM. The vote output is set if X (X parameter) number of input signals are either activated or have bad quality.
3BSE041488R101 315
316
Vote Structure Control Module Types Section 7 Surveillance
Type Name Library Description
VoteXoo2D SignalLib Performs voting of up to two input signals, where the signal quality is diagnosed together with the activation signal from the input modules, for example from SignalInRealM. If X parameter =1; the vote output is set if any input signal is activated and quality is good, or if all connected signals have bad quality. If X parameter =2; the vote output is set if both input signals are activated and quality is good, or if one input signal is activated and quality is good and the other input signal have bad quality, or if all connected signals have bad quality.
VoteXoo8 SignalLib Performs voting of up to eight input signals from input modules, for example from SignalInRealM. of input signals are activated. The signal quality is not considered.
Vote Structure Control Module Types
The vote output is set if X (X parameter) number
Type Name
VotedAnd4
VotedOr4
VoteBranch4
VotedBranch4
Library Description
SignalLib Makes an AND function between four signal of
VotedConnection from a vote control module.
SignalLib Makes an OR function between four signals of
VotedConnection from vote control modules.
SignalLib Branches a signal of VoteConnection, for example an output from a signal object control module, into four signals of the same data type.
SignalLib Branches a signal of VotedConnection, from a vote control module, into four signals of the same data type
3BSE041488R101
Appendix A Customized Online Help
In this section you will find requirements on customized help for self-defined libraries, applications and components of externally added applications, as well as for non-standard hardware.
Customized help can be produced using any online help authoring tool.
How to add customized help for user-defined libraries with hardware and nonstandard hardware types, differ from how to add customized help for user-defined libraries (with data types, function block types and control module types) and applications.
Online Help Files for User-defined Libraries and
Applications
The following requirements must be fulfilled on customized online help for userdefined libraries (with data types, function block types and control module types) and applications.
1.
Any online help authoring tool that produces Microsoft HTML Help 1.3 can be used when producing the external help files.
2.
Your help files should be placed in the UserHelp folder, which is located in the standard help file folder of the Control Builder product, ABB Industrial
IT\...Help\UserHelp. (For example, c:\Program files\ABB Industrial
IT\Engineer IT\Compact Control Builder 5.0\Help\UserHelp).
3.
The help file should be of the Microsoft HTML help file type, and should have the same name as the library or application (for example, MyLib.chm).
3BSE041488R101 317
318
Online Help Files for User-defined Libraries with Hardware and Non-standard hardware Appendix A
4.
Context-sensitive help (F1 help) must always use A keywords that are based on the Project Explorer object name.The name of the library or application in
Project Explorer is used by Control Builder, when calling the online help file.
See
External Help Files via F1 on page 320.,
Only Microsoft HTML Help files (*.chm) of version 1.3 are supported.
Online Help Files for User-defined Libraries with Hardware and Non-standard hardware
The following requirements must be fulfilled on customized online help for userdefined libraries (with hardware types) and non-standard hardware.
1.
Any online help authoring tool that produces Microsoft HTML Help or
WinHelp can be used when producing the external help files.
2.
The help file can be of HTML (*.chm) or WinHelp (*.hlp) type.
3.
The external help file should be added to the library with hardware or to the hardware type in Project Explorer. How to add a help file to a library with nonstandard hardware (with, for example, I/O units) and a specific hardware type in a library, see Basic Control Software, Introduction and Configuration
(3BSE035980Rxxxx).
Context-sensitive help (F1) works with any help file name of the added help file, as long as it is a HTML or WinHelp help file. F1 on a hardware type without any added help file calls the help file added (if any) to the user-defined library (with the hardware type).
Access Customized Online Help from Control Builder
There are three ways to access online help from Control Builder. You can use the menu option Help..., you can select an item in Project Explorer and press F1, or you could click the Help button on the tool bar, or in a dialog.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix A Customized Online Help Access Customized Online Help from Control Builder
Help Menu
The Show Help About dialog provides access to help files that have been added by the user (if such files exist in the UserHelp folder). Use this dialog box to access external, inserted help files. The dialog box is opened from the Project Explorer:
Help > Show Help About..., as illustrated in Figure 121
.
Figure 121. Help menu in the Project Explorer window.
...Help\UserHelp, are listed in the Show Help About dialog box. See Figure 122
.
All externally added *.chm files residing in the predefined help file folder,
Figure 122. The Show Help About dialog box
3BSE041488R101 319
320
Access Customized Online Help from Control Builder Appendix A Customized Online Help
To open a file from the dialog box, select (or double-click) a file from the list, or type the name in the File name field, and click Open.
Help files displayed in the Show Help About dialog box are not a part of Control
Builder online help. This means that if a project is transferred to a new computer, you manually will have to copy these help files from the UserHelp folder on the old computer to the UserHelp folder on the new computer. This also means that these help files are not included when a system backup is performed.
Context-Sensitive Help (F1)
If you select an item in Project Explorer and then press the F1 key, help on the selected item will be displayed. The F1 key can be used on all items in applications, libraries, user-defined libraries, hardware, and externally added hardware. It is also possible to get F1 help on error messages in the editor message pane, or in the project explorer pane.
External Help Files via F1
Control Builder supports context-sensitive help on user-defined library (with data types, function block types and control module types) and components of externally added applications, provided that the corresponding help file is placed in the
UserHelp folder.
Context-sensitive help on user-defined libraries with hardware and non-standard hardware is available if a help file (HTML or WinHelp file with any file name) is added to the library or to the hardware type. See Basic Control Software,
Introduction and Configuration (3BSE035980Rxxxx).
External help files for user-defined library (with data types, function block types and control module types), and components of externally added applications, must have exactly the same name as the corresponding component file, as it
appears in the Control Builder tree, with the extension chm (refer to Table 39 ).
Otherwise, context-sensitive help will not work.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix A Customized Online Help Context-Sensitive Linking
Table 39. Control Builder files and corresponding help files (examples)
Object Type
Library
Application
Control Builder File
Foocos.lbr
Application_1.app
Help File
Foocos.chm
Application_1.chm
Context-Sensitive Linking
Context-sensitive linking between the help project topics and user-defined libraries
(with data types, function block types and control module types), and components of externally added applications, in Project Explorer is done by A keyword linking.
Project Explorer objects should have their exact names specified as an A keyword in the corresponding topic. An A keyword is a non-language-dependent text string, sent from Control Builder (at an F1 call) to the online help system.
You must add the name of the object as an A keyword to the help topic describing the object. Control Builder uses the name of the currently selected item and tries to find a corresponding A keyword in the help system. If a call fails, the Control
Builder keyword is displayed under the Index Tab in the HTML Help Viewer.
3BSE041488R101 321
322
Context-Sensitive Linking Appendix A Customized Online Help
3BSE041488R101
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview
This section gives an overview of all library objects, such as data types, functions, function block types, and control module types that can be used in applications created using the Control Builder engineering tool. Refer to the appropriate manuals and Control Builder online help for detailed descriptions of the libraries.
Almost all library types are protected. This means that the types cannot be copied to your own library and then modified. To determine if a library object is protected, select the object in the Project Explorer and then try to copy it. If the object is dimmed, it is protected.
In the following tables, the columns named “TC” (time-critical) and “SIL” (Safety
Integrity Level), shall be interpreted as follows:
“Y” (Yes) in column “TC” means that the function block / control module type can be used in time-critical tasks. If not, there is an “N” (No) in the column.
“1-2” in column “SIL” means that the function block / control module type is SIL 1-
2 classified and can be used in SIL 1-2 applications. Otherwise, there is an “N” (No) in the column.
Note that time-critical tasks are not allowed in SIL classified applications.
323
324
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
System
The System contains IEC 61131-3 data types and functions, as well as data types and functions with extended functionality designed by ABB.
IEC 61131-3 Standard Functions
Table 40. IEC 61131-3 standard functions
Function
*_TO_**
TC SIL Description
Type conversion functions
Y
(1)
1-2 Type conversion from * to **
The following type conversions are implicit
(that is, a call to a type conversion function is not needed): bool -> word, bool -> dword word -> dword int -> dint, int -> real uint -> dint, uint -> real dint -> real explicit conversion functions:
<bool, int, dint, uint, words, dwords, time, string>_to_real
<bool, int, dint, uint, word, dword, real, time, date_and_time>_to_string
<dint, real, string>_to_time
<string>_to_date_and_time
<int, dint, uint, word, dword, real, string>_to_bool
<bool, uint, dint, word, dword, real, string>_to_int
<bool, int, uint, word, dword, real, time, string>_to_dint
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview
ABS
SQRT
LN
LOG
EXP
SIN
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
ADD
MUL
Function
Table 40. IEC 61131-3 standard functions (Continued)
TC SIL Description
<bool, int, dint, word, dword, real, string>_to_uint
Y
<bool, int, dint, uint, real, dword, string>_to_word
<bool, int, dint, uint, real, word, string>_to_dword
General functions
1-2 Absolute value
Y 1-2 Square root
Y
Y
Y N
Logarithmic functions
N
N
Natural logarithm
Logarithm to base 10
Natural exponential
Trigonometric functions
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Sine of input in radians
Cosine in radians
Tangent in radians
Principal arc sine
Y
Y
N
N
Principal arc cosine
Principal arc tangent
Extensible arithmetic functions
Y 1-2 Addition (OUT:= IN1 + IN2 + … + Inn)
Y 1-2 Multiplication (OUT:= IN1 * IN2 * … * INn)
System
3BSE041488R101 325
326
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
SUB
DIV
MOD
EXPT
MOVE
SHL
SHR
ROR
ROL
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
Function
Table 40. IEC 61131-3 standard functions (Continued)
TC SIL Description
Non-extensible arithmetic functions
Y
Y
Y
Y
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
Subtraction (OUT := IN1 – IN12)
Division (OUT := IN1 / IN2)
Modulus (OUT := IN1 modulo IN2)
Exponentiation (OUT := IN1 raised to IN2)
Y
Y
Y
Y 1-2 Move (OUT := IN)
Standard bit shift functions
Y 1-2 Shift bits left (OUT := IN left-shifted by N bits, zero-filled on right)
1-2 Shift bits right (OUT := IN right-shifted by N bits, zero-filled on left)
1-2 Rotate bits right (OUT := IN right-rotated by
N bits, circular)
1-2 Rotate bits left (OUT := IN left-rotated by N bits, circular)
Standard bit-wise Boolean functions
Y 1-2 Boolean AND (OUT := IN1 AND IN2 AND
… AND INn)
Y
Y
1-2 Boolean OR (OUT := IN1 OR IN2 OR …
OR INn)
1-2 Boolean Exclusive OR (OUT := IN1 XOR
IN2 XOR … XOR INn)
Y 1-2 Boolean negation (OUT := NOT IN1)
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview System
Function
SEL
MIN
MAX
LIMIT
MUX
GT (>)
GE (>=)
EQ (=)
LE (<=)
LT (<)
NE (<>)
Table 40. IEC 61131-3 standard functions (Continued)
Y
Y
Y
Y
TC SIL Description
Standard selection functions
1-2 Binary selection (non-extensible) Y
Y
(2)
1-2 Select the smallest of the input variables
(extensible)
Y
1-2 Select the largest of the input variables
(extensible)
Y
1-2 Delimiter between a minimum, min, variable value and a maximum, max, variable value
(non-extensible).
Y
1-2 Multiplexer which selects the variable
Y
Y pointed out by the input variable
(extensible)
Standard comparison functions
1-2 Decreasing sequence
1-2 Monotonic decreasing sequence
1-2 Equality
1-2 Monotonic increasing sequence
1-2 Increasing sequence
1-2 Inequality (non-extensible)
3BSE041488R101 327
328
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 40. IEC 61131-3 standard functions (Continued)
Function
LEN
LEFT
RIGHT
MID
TC SIL Description
Standard character string functions
N
N
Y
N
1-2 String length function
N
N
N
Left-most L characters of IN
Right-most L characters of IN
L characters of IN beginning at the Pth character position
CONCAT
INSERT
FIND
DELETE
REPLACE
N
N
N
N
Y
N Extensible concatenation
N
N
N
N
Insert IN2 into IN1 after the Pth character position
Delete L characters of IN, beginning at the
Pth character position
Replace L characters of IN1 by IN2, starting at the Pth character position
Find the character position of the beginning of the first occurrence of IN2 in IN1. If no occurrence of IN2 is found, then OUT := 0.
Functions of time data types
ADD
SUB
Y
Y
1-2
1-2
Add time variables
Subtract time variables
(1) Conversion functions can be used in time-critical tasks, except for the functions: <bool, int, dint, uint, word, dword, real, time, date_and_time>_to_string, real_to_uint, and string_to_bool.
(2) This function can be used in time-critical tasks, except for string variables.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview System
Non-IEC 61131-3 Conversion Functions
Table 41. Non-IEC 61131-3 conversion functions
Function
ASCIIStructToString
BCDToDint
Bool16ToDint
Bool32ToDint
CalendarStructTo
Date_and_time
Date_and_timeTo
CalendarStruct
DIntToBCD
DIntToBool16 and
DIntToBool32
DIntToGraycode Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
TC SIL Description
Type conversion functions
N 1-2 The ASCIIStructToString function takes a struct of dints, which contains the codes for an ASCII string, and reconstructs the string from the values in the components of the struct. The component values of the integer, DintStruct, are read and translated into the value of the destination string,
String.
N BCDToDint converts a BCD value into an
1-2 integer value (dint).
Bool16ToDint converts a Boolean struct
BoolStruct with 16 items into a dint.
1-2 Bool32ToDint converts a Boolean struct
BoolStruct with 32 items into a dint.
N This function converts a CalendarStruct to a date_and_time value.
This function converts a date_and_time value to a CalendarStruct.
N
N
N
DintToBCD converts an integer value into a
BCD value.
The DIntToBool16 and DIntToBool32 functions convert a dint into a Boolean struct BoolStruct with 16 or 32 items, respectively.
This function converts a dint value to a
Graycoded value.
N
3BSE041488R101 329
330
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 41. Non-IEC 61131-3 conversion functions (Continued)
Function
GraycodeToDInt
MaxStringLength
StringToASCIIStruct
TC SIL Description
Y N This function converts a Graycoded value to a dint value.
N N
N N
The MaxStringLength function returns the maximum length of a string; that is, the allocated size of the string variable, as an integer value.
This function converts a string to an
ASCIIStruct.
Other Functions
Function
CheckSum
EqAnyType
ExecuteControlModules Y
N
N
Table 42. Other functions
TC SIL Description
N The CheckSum function calculates checksums used for ASCII protocols written in the programming language.
N The EqAnyType function compares two variables of any type.
GetDTQuality
GetStructComponent
N
N
1-2 This function is used in function blocks that contain control modules. When the function is called from the function block, all control modules in that function block are executed.
N Returns the quality of the system time. It may be GOOD, UNCERTAIN or BAD.
N This function reads (copies) values from a struct component.
1-2 Returns the system time when current task was started.
GetSystemDT Y
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview System
Function
InitAnyType
LocalDTToSystemDT
Match
Modp
MoveAnyType
NationalLowerCase
NationalUpperCase
PutStructComponent
RandomNorm
RandomRect
Table 42. Other functions (Continued)
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
TC SIL Description
N N The InitAnyType function initiates all components of a structured data type variable.
N
Y
N Returns the system time for the specified local time.
1-2 The Match function returns the position of a string within another string. Unlike the Find function, a wildcard can be used with the
Match function.
Y
N
N
N
The Modp function returns the remainder after integer division and is related to the
Mod function. The functions differ on negative values.
Mod follows the IEC 61131 standard and
Modp follows the behavior in SattLine version 2.2 or earlier.
The MoveAnyType function copies the
Source parameter of any type into the
Destination parameter.
The NationalLowerCase function sets upper-case letters to lower-case letters.
N
N
N
N
The NationalUpperCase function sets lower-case letters to upper-case letters.
This function writes (copies) values into a struct component.
The RandomNorm function returns a normally distributed random number.
The RandomRect function returns a random number uniformly distributed between 0.0 and 1.0.
3BSE041488R101 331
332
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 42. Other functions (Continued)
Function
RandomSeed
TC SIL Description
Y N The RandomSeed function initializes the
RandomGenerator to a random value.
ReadStatusZeroDivInt Y
ReadStatusZeroDiv
Real
Y
1-2 The ReadStatusZeroDivInt function checks for zero division exceptions for integer values.
1-2 The ReadStatusZeroDivReal function checks for zero division exceptions for real values.
Round Y
SetFalse
SetSeed
SetTrue
SystemDTToLocalDT
Y
N
Y
Y
N The Round function rounds a real value to the nearest integer.
N
N
N
The Boolean operator will be set to false.
The SetSeed function initializes a random generator using a specific start value.
The Boolean operator will be set to true.
1-2 Returns the local time for the specified system time.
1-2 The Timer function controls a timer.
Timer
TimerElapsed
Y
Y
TimerElapsedMS Y
1-2 The TimerElapsed function returns the elapsed time of a timer as a time value.
1-2 The TimerElapsedMS function returns the elapsed time of a timer in milliseconds as a
dint value.
TimerHold
TimerReset
Y
Y
1-2 The TimerHold function stops a timer.
1-2 The TimerReset function stops and resets a timer.
1-2 The TimerStart function starts a timer.
TimerStart Y
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview System
Function
Trunc
WriteVar
Table 42. Other functions (Continued)
TC SIL Description
Y N The Trunc function truncates a real value to an integer.
N N Enables a system to write to a variable in a controller, or to transfer variables between controllers, without owning the variable.
Array and Queue Functions
Table 43. Array and queue functions
Function TC SIL Description
CreateArray N N
Arrays
Creates an array of elements of the same type as ArrayElement.
Puts the contents of ArrayElement into the data type at position Index in the array.
PutArray N N
GetArray N N
InsertArray
SearchArray
N
N
SearchStructComponent N
N
N
N
Gets the contents of the data type at position Index in the array Array into
ArrayElement.
Inserts a new element in an array. All successive elements are moved one step, and the last element is overwritten.
Searches the array ArrayName for a certain component in an array element.
A boolean function which searches for a specific part in a structured component.
Deletes the array Array and deletes the whole tree structure of arrays.
DeleteArray N N
3BSE041488R101 333
334
System Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 43. Array and queue functions (Continued)
Function TC SIL Description
Queues
CreateQueue N N
PutFirstQueue N N
Creates a queue of elements of the same type as QueueElement.
Puts the contents of QueueElement into the first element of the queue.
GetFirstQueue
PutLastQueue
N
N
N
N
Puts the contents of the first element from the queue into QueueElement.
Puts the contents of QueueElement into the last record element of the queue.
GetLastQueue N N
ReadQueue
ClearQueue
CurrentQueueSize
N
N
N
N
N
N
Puts the contents of the last element from the queue into QueueElement.
Reads the contents of the specified element number from the queue and puts them into
QueueElement.
This procedure clears the queue Queue.
This integer function returns the current number of elements in the queue.
DeleteQueue N N This procedure deletes the queue.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview System
Task Control Functions
Table 44. Task control functions
Function
FirstScanAfter
ApplicationStart
TC SIL Description
Y 1-2 The FirstScanAfterApplicationStart function checks if the current scan/execution is the first one performed by the current task.
FirstScanAfterPowerUp Y
GetPriority Y
1-2 The FirstScanAfterPowerUp function checks if the controller has been warm started.
N Use the GetPriority function to obtain the priority of the current task.
SetPriority N
GetIntervalTime Y
GetActualIntervalTime Y
N Use the SetPriority function to set the priority of the current task.
Note that even if SetPriority exists for
IEC 61131 code in High Integrity controller, it does not have any affect.
1-2 Use the GetIntervalTime function to get the requested interval time of the current task.
1-2 Use the GetActualIntervalTime function to get the actual interval time of the current task.
SetIntervalTime Y N Use the SetIntervalTime function to set the requested interval time of the current task.
3BSE041488R101 335
336
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Basic Library
The BasicLib is the basic library for the Control Builder M software. It contains data types, function block types and control module types with extended functionality designed by ABB.
IEC 61131-3 Function Block Types
Table 45. IEC 61131-3 function block types
TP
TON
TOF
RTC
CTD
CTUD
R_TRIG
F_TRIG
CTU
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SR
RS
Standard bistable function block types
Y 1-2 Bistable function block (set dominant)
Y 1-2 Bistable function block (reset dominant)
Standard edge detection function block types
Y 1-2 Rising edge detector
Y 1-2 Falling edge detector
Standard counter function block types
Y 1-2 Up-counter
SEMA
Y
Y
1-2 Down-counter
1-2 Up-down counter
Standard timer function blocks type
Y 1-2 Pulse timer
Y
Y
Y
Y
1-2
1-2
N
N
On-delay timer
Off-delay timer
The RTC (Real-Time-Clock) function block performs display and date and time setting.
SEMA, the semaphore function block, is designed to allow competing tasks to share a particular resource.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Basic Library
Process Object Function Block Types
Use the ACOF (Automatic Check Of Feedback) functions primarily for supervision of process objects. ACOF function blocks can monitor up to three output signals and up to three feedback signals.
Use ACOF when a feedback signal is expected within a certain time after an output to the process object has been activated or deactivated. If the feedback signal is not detected, an alarm signal is given.
Table 46. Process object function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
ACOFAct N 1-2 Object control with two limit switches and automatic return. This object has one stable position.
ACOFActDeact N
ACOFAct 3P N
1-2 Object control with two limit switches. This object has two stable positions.
1-2 Object control with three limit switches and automatic return. This object has one stable position.
1-2 Object control with three limit switches. This object has three stable positions.
ACOFActDeact 3P N
Other Function Block Types
Table 47. Other function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Conversion function block types
BcToDint Y N BcToDint converts data from an optional number of binary coded bool inputs and a sign input into a dint.
3BSE041488R101 337
338
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
DintToBc Y N DintToBc converts data from dint to an optional number of bool outputs, using binary coded conversion, and a sign output.
DintToFirstOfN Y N
DintToNBcd Y N
DintToFirstOfN converts data from dint to an optional number of bool outputs using 1of-N conversion, and a sign output.
DintToBcd converts from dint to an optional number of bool (in groups of four coded as
BCD) and a sign output.
FirstOfNToDint Y
GrayToDint
IntegerToRealIO
NBcdToDint
Y
Y
Y N
N
N
N
FirstOfNToDint converts data from 1-of-N format with an optional number of bool inputs and a sign input into a dint.
GrayToDint converts data from gray code with an optional number of bool inputs and a sign input into a dint.
IntegerToRealIO converts a raw integer value to a scaled RealIO value with a measuring range, units and decimals. It can be treated as a physical RealIO value in the application.
NBcdToDint converts data from an optional number of bool inputs (in groups of four coded as BCD) and a sign input into a dint.
RealIOToInteger Y N The RealIOToInteger function block converts a scaled RealIO value to a raw integer value.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Basic Library
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Diagnostics function block types
PowerFailureInfos
SystemDiagnostics
N N PowerFailureInfos provides information on power failure status, such as number and duration. In addition, the total number of power failures since the last reset and the duration of these can also be presented.
N N SystemDiagnostics can be used to measure and display the following:
1. Stop time and memory usage during a controller download
2. Current memory in use
3. Maximum memory used since the last cold start
4. Alarm and Event statistics
5. Ethernet statistics
System time function block types
GetDT N N GetDT retrieves the system time from the controller at which the current task was started. The function block converts the system time to local time so that both are available as parameters.
GetTimeZoneInfo retrieves the currently used time-zone settings.
GetTimeZoneInfo N N
3BSE041488R101 339
340
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SetDT N N SetDT sets the system time on the controller. It is possible to set the time directly as system time or indirectly as local time and the function block will perform the conversion to system time. The time can be set as relative or as absolute time. This functionality is available through parameters and an Interaction window. The
Interaction window also shows the current system time and local time.
SetTimeZoneInfo N N SetTimeZoneInfo sets the time-zone information. StandardDT and DaylightDT can be specified with the absolute or the day-in-month format. This functionality is available through parameters and an
Interaction window.
This function overwrites the time-zone information downloaded by the ACB.
TimerD
TimerOffHold
TimerOnHold
TimerOnOffHold
Y
Timer function block types
1-2 TimerD measures the elapsed time in the negative direction and indicates when a specified level has been exceeded.
Y
Y
1-2 TimerOffHold is an Off-delay timer function block with a hold input function.
1-2 TimerOnHold is an On-delay timer function, with a hold input function.
Y
Y
1-2 TimerOnOffHold is an On-delay and Offdelay timer function block type with a hold input function.
1-2 TimerPulseHold is a pulse timer with a hold function.
TimerPulseHold
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Basic Library
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
TimerPulseHoldDel Y 1-2 TimerPulseHoldDel is a pulse timer with a hold input function and a delayed start to generate Q output pulses.
TimerU Y 1-2 TimerU measures the elapsed time in positive direction and gives indication when a specified level is past.
Level detector function block types
LevelHigh Y N LevelHigh is used to compare a real value with an optional number of high limits with the possibility of specifying hysteresis.
A high-level detector is a trip for supervising an analog signal. A high-level trip indicates when the input signal exceeds the selected high-detect level. The detector has hysteresis on the input signal, which prevents the level detector output signal from repeatedly changing state when the supervised input signal varies near the detection level.
LevelLow Y N LevelLow is used to compare a real value with an optional number of low limits with the possibility of specifying hysteresis.
A low-level detector is a trip for supervising an analog signal. A low-level trip indicates when the input signal drops below the preset low-detect level. The detector has a hysteresis on the input signal, which prevents the level detector output signal from repeatedly changing state when the supervised input signal varies near the detection level.
3BSE041488R101 341
342
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Max
Min
RSD
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Threshold Y N Threshold is used to determine when more than, or equal to, a given number of
Boolean values are true.
Median
MajorityReal
Calculator function block types
Y N Median is used to calculate the median value of an optional number of input values.
The function block supports real and dint:
MedianReal and MedianDint.
Y N Used to calculate the mean value of a number of real numbers.
DeMux
Y
Y
Selector function block types
Y N DeMux can handle the data types real, dint and bool: DeMuxReal, DeMuxDint and
DeMuxBool.
N Max is used to select the largest value of an optional number of inputs. The Max function block exists for real and dint:
MaxReal and MaxDint.
N Min is used to select the lowest value of an optional number of inputs. The function block exists for real and dint: MinReal and
MinDint.
Bistable function block types
Y N RSD is used as a memory for bool variables. Besides the RS function, it can also override this function with a write function.
Generator function block types
Y 1-2 PulseGenerator is a pulse generator used to create a continual pulse signal.
PulseGenerator
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Basic Library
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
PulseGeneratorAcc Y N PulseGeneratorAcc is a pulse generator used to create a continual pulse signal with high long term accuracy.
SinGen Y N
SqGen Y N
SinGen is used to generate a sinus signal.
The frequency and amplitude are controlled by inputs.
SqGen is used to generate a square wave with an optional number of amplitudes.
Each amplitude is determined by an input and for each amplitude the time during which it is to be maintained is specified.
TimePulses
Fifo
FifoRW N
N
Y N The pulse generator creates a pulse on the outputs every hour on the Hour output and every new day on the Day output, synchronized to the real-time clock.
Register function block types
N Fifo is a queue register of First-In-First-Out type. Fifo can handle the data types real, dint and bool: FifoReal, FifoDint and
FifoBool
N FifoRW is a queue register of First-In-First-
Out type. In addition, data can be changed and deleted at any position in the queue.
FifoRW can handle the data types real, dint and bool: FifoRWReal, FifoRWDint and
FifoRWBool.
Register Y N Register is used as a memory function block with an optional number of positions.
The function block exists for data types real,
dint and bool: RegisterReal, RegisterDint and RegisterBool.
3BSE041488R101 343
344
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Shift N N Shift is used as a shift register of optional length. The function block exists for data types real, dint and bool: ShiftReal,
ShiftDint and ShiftBool.
ShiftL Y N ShiftL is used as a shift register of optional length. All positions can be written and read. The function block exists for data types real, dint and bool: ShiftLReal,
ShiftLDint and ShiftLBool.
Controller interaction function block types
SaveColdRetain N
ErrorHandler Y
N This function block copies cold-retain variables from RAM to backup media. This is done in order to make the cold-retain values survive a restart of the controller.
The function block processes all the applications that are executing in the controller.
1-2 This function block is used to report detected errors from the application code to the system internal error handler.
ForcedSignals
ApplicationInfo
EvalRestartInhibit
Y 1-2 This function block is used to supervise and reset forced I/O signals in SIL applications, running in a High Integrity controller.
Various function block types
N N
N N
ApplicationInfo gives information about the application where it executes in e.g. name and state.
EvalRestartInhibit may inhibit restart of application in evaluation mode.
N N PrintLines prints text lines on a printer.
PrintLines
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Basic Library
Table 47. Other function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
RedundantIn Y N When the system switches from ordinary to redundant I/O there may be a jump in the signal which may not be good for the algorithms used. This function block type prevents this by ramping the signal using a real value as the change of the signal per second.
SampleTime Y 1-2 SampleTime is a function block to measure the sampling period and to acquire the requested sampling period.
Trigger
Control Module Type
Y 1-2 Trigger provides a combined time and event trigger functionality.
Table 48. Control Module Types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
ErrorHandlerM
ForcedSignalsM
Y
Y
1-2 This control module is used to report detected errors from the application code to the system internal error handler. This is the control module equivalent of the function block type ErrorHandler, described above.
1-2 This control module is used to supervise and reset forced I/O signals in SIL applications, running in a High Integrity controller. This is the control module equivalent of the function block type
ForcedSignals, described above.
3BSE041488R101 345
346
Basic Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 48. Control Module Types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
GroupStartObjectConn N 1-2 This is the connection module between a group start sequence and object to be started or stopped in the sequence.
CCInputGate Y
CCOutputGate Y
CCInputGateExtended N
CCOutputGateExtended N
1-2 The CCInputGate makes sure that the
ControlConnection specification if fulfilled on the input otherwise ParError will be true.
This module should be used inside of a control module together with the
CCOutputGate control module.
N
N
1-2 The CCOutputGate makes sure that the
ControlConnection specification if fulfilled on the output otherwise ParError will be true. This module should be used inside of a control module together with the
CCInputGate control module.
Same as the CCInputGate control module but with additional functionality. This module should be used inside of a control module together with either the
CCOutputGateExtended or CCOutputGate.
Same as the CCOutputGate control module but with additional functionality. This module should be used inside of a control module together with either the
CCInputGateExtended or CCInputGate.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Communication Libraries
Communication Libraries
The libraries MMSCommLib, ModemCommLib, COMLICommLib,
ModBusCommLib, MB300CommLib, S3964RCommlib, SattBusCommLib,
SerialCommLib, InsumComLib, FFHSECommLib and FFH1CommLib contain a number function block types and control modules that provide external variable communication with protocols such as MMS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus, SattBus,
COMLI, Siemens 3964R MasterBus 300 and INSUM devices. There are also function blocks for modem connection.
MMSCommLib
The library MMSCommLib uses the MMS function block types and control modules to establish communication with a system supporting the MMS protocol.
When transferring variables it is important to use data types with the same range on the client as on the server. It is, however, possible to connect variables with different ranges, such as a dint variable on the server and an Int variable on the client. This will only work as long as the variable values are within the range of the Int variable.
Table 49. MMS function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MMSConnect N
MMSRead
MMSReadCyc
MMSWrite
MMSWriteDT
MMSDefAccVar
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1-2 Initiates a communication channel and establishes a connection with a remote system.
N Reads one or several variables.
Reads one or several variables cyclically.
Writes to one or several variables.
Transmits date and time.
This function block is used to create an access variable, which is connected to a defined variable in the executing system.
The defined variable is then accessible for both reading and writing from a remote system and also within its own system.
3BSE041488R101 347
348
MMSCommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 49. MMS function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MMSDef4Bool N 1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4Bool operates in a pair with MMSRead4Bool, and is used to transfer the values of four different Boolean variables. MMSDef4Bool is used in the server application, while
MMSRead4Bool is used in the client application.
MMSDef4BoolIO N
MMSDef4Dint N
1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4BoolIO operates in a pair with MMSRead4BoolIO, and is used to transfer the values of four different Boolean IO variables.
MMSDef4BoolIO is used in the server application, while MMSRead4BoolIO is used in the client application.
1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4Dint operates in a pair with MMSRead4Dint, and is used to transfer the values of four different Double Integer variables.
MMSDef4Dint is used in the server application, while MMSRead4Dint is used in the client application.
MMSDef4DintIO N 1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4DintIO operates in a pair with MMSRead4DintIO, and is used to transfer the values of four different Double Integer IO variables.
MMSDef4DintIO is used in the server application, while MMSRead4DintIO is used in the client application.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview MMSCommLib
Table 49. MMS function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MMSDef4Real N 1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4Real operates in a pair with MMSRead4Real, and is used to transfer the values of four different Real variables. MMSDef4Real is used in the server application, while
MMSRead4Real is used in the client application.
MMSDef4RealIO N
MMSRead4Bool N
1-2 Used for safe communication of data between SIL applications. MMSDef4RealIO operates in a pair with MMSRead4RealIO, and is used to transfer the values of four different Real IO variables.
MMSDef4RealIO is used in the server application, while MMSRead4RealIO is used in the client application.
1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4Bool. See the above description of MMSDef4Bool.
MMSRead4BoolIO N
MMSRead4Dint
MMSRead4DintIO
N
N
1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4BoolIO. See the above description of MMSDef4BoolIO.
1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4Dint. See the above description of MMSDef4Dint.
1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4DintIO. See the above description of MMSDef4DintIO.
3BSE041488R101 349
350
MMSCommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 49. MMS function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MMSRead4Real N 1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4Real. See the above description of MMSDef4Real.
MMSRead4RealIO N 1-2 Forms a pair for safe communication of data between SIL applications, together with MMSDef4RealIO. See the above description of MMSDef4RealIO.
Table 50. MMS control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
MMSToCC N N The communication protocol is MMS. The forward and the backward structure of
ControlConnection is handled separately in
MMS variable groups.
CCToMMS N N CCToMMS is used together with
MMSToCC. The communication protocol is
MMS. The forward and the backward structures of ControlConnection are handled separately in MMS variable groups.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ModemCommLib
ModemCommLib
The library ModemCommLib library contains function block types used to establish communication with a modem.
Table 51. Modem function blocks
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
ModemConnStat
ModemDialUp
N
N
N
N
ModemConnStat is used to obtain the current status of a modem connected to a selected channel. The current status is given by the Status parameter.
ModemDialUp is used to connect a modem via a defined communication channel.
ModemHangUp N N ModemHangUp is used to disconnect a channel.
modem via a defined communication
3BSE041488R101 351
352
COMLICommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
COMLICommLib
The library COMLICommLib contains the function block types to establish communication with a system supporting the COMLI protocol.
Function block types with the COMLI prefix support both the address-oriented
COMLI and SattBus protocols. When a SattBus channel is used, the COMLI messages are packed within SattBus messages. The protocol to be used (COMLI or
SattBus) is defined by the Channel parameter of the COMLIConnect function block.
Communication via a TCP/IP network is also supported.
Table 52. COMLI function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
COMLIConnect N
COMLIRead
COMLIReadCyc
N
N
N
N
N
N
Connects to a defined communication channel.
Reads one or several variables.
Reads variable data cyclically.
Requests physical values from a
SattConXX system.
COMLIReadPhys N
COMLIWrite N N Writes to one or several variables.
COMLIWriteDT N N Transmits date and time of master to the slave.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ModBusCommLib
ModBusCommLib
The library ModBusCommLib contains the function block types to establish communication with a system supporting the MODBUS protocol.
Table 53. MODBUS functions
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MBConnect
MBRead
N
N
N
N
Initiates a communication channel and establishes a connection with a remote system.
Reads one or several variables.
MBWrite
MBException
N
N
N
N
Writes to one or several variables.
Reads the ModBus exception coils.
MB300CommLib
The library MB300CommLib contains objects that can be used for set up communication with MasterBus 300 (MB300). MB300 can be used with AC 400 and AC 800M. A CI855 communication unit for AC 800M provides connectivity to
AC 400 via MB300. Refer to the relevant manuals regarding the process interface that can be used with legacy controller AC 400.
Table 54. MB300 function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MB300Connect N N MB300Connect is used to establish connection between the calling communication partner and the remote communication partner.
MB300DSSend N N
MB300DSReceive N N
The MB300Send function block is used to send a DataSet to a node on MB300.
The MB300Receive function block is used for reception of a DataSet sent by a node on MB300.
3BSE041488R101 353
354
S3964RCommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
S3964RCommLib
The library S3964RCommlib contains the function block types to establish communication with a system supporting the Siemens 3964R protocol.
Table 55. Siemens 3964R function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
S3964RConnect
S3964RRead
N
N
N
N
Connects to a defined communication channel.
Reads one or several variables.
S3964RReadCyc
S3964RWrite
N
N
N
N
Reads variable data cyclically.
Writes to one or several variables.
SattBusCommLib
The library SattBusCommlib contains the function block types supporting SattBus.
They are used to communicate through a SattBus channel using the SattBus nameoriented model. To communicate through a SattBus channel using the addressoriented model, COMLI function block types are used. Communication via a
TCP/IP network is also supported.
Table 56. SattBus function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SBConnect N N Connects to a defined communication channel.
SBRead
SBReadCyc
N
N
N
N
Reads one variable value.
Reads variable data cyclically.
SBWrite
ComliSB
N N Writes one variable value.
These following (ComliSB) Function Blocks
ONLY support communication over a
TCP/IP network, thus cannot work when
running on a physical COMLI- port.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview SattBusCommLib
Table 56. SattBus function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
ComliSBConnect N N Use the ComliSBConnect function block type to initiate a communication channel and establish a connection to a slave system with a unique node/slave address on a TCP/IP network.
ComliSBRead N N The ComliSBRead function block supports the address- oriented transfer model.
Use it to request variable data from a remote system on a TCP/IP network.
ComliSBReadCyc N
ComliSBReadPhys N
N
N
The ComliSBReadCyc function block supports the address-oriented transfer model.
Use it to cyclically read one or several variables from a slave system on a TCP/IP network.
Use the ComliSBReadPhys function block to request physical measuring ranges
(that is, scaling factors) of registers or analog signals from a slave system on a
TCP/IP network.
ComliSBWrite
ComliSBWriteDT
N
N
N
N
The ComliSBWrite function block supports the address-oriented transfer model.
Use it to write to one or several variables in a slave system on a TCP/IP network.
Use the COMLIWriteDT function block to transmit date and time from the local system to a remote SattCon system on a
TCP/IP network. (Or a system supporting
COMLI) and to update the system time.
The function block uses the local time.
3BSE041488R101 355
356
SerialCommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
SerialCommLib
The library SerialCommLib library contains function block types for communication with external devices via serial channels with user-defined protocols; for example, printers, terminals, scanner pens, etc.
Table 57. Serial channel function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SerialConnect N N Opens and closes a defined serial communication channel.
SerialSetup
SerialWriteWait
N
N
N
N
Changes serial communication settings.
Writes a string and waits for a reply.
SerialListenReply
SerialWrite
SerialListen
N
N
N
N Listens for a string and sends a reply.
N
N
Writes a string.
Listens for a string.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview INSUMCommLib
INSUMCommLib
The library InsumCommLib library contains function block types for communication with INSUM devices. INSUM (Integrated System for Useroptimized Motor control) is a system for protection and control of motors and switch gear. The communication interface CI857 provides communication for the
AC 800M controller with the INSUM system via TCP/IP.
The INSUM system consists of devices that are connected via a LonWorks network.
Table 58. INSUM function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
INSUMConnect N
INSUMReceive N N
N The INSUMConnect function block establishes a connection to an INSUM
TCP/IP Gateway. INSUMConnect is needed by the other IEC 61131 function blocks in order to access Network Variables in devices connected via the selected
INSUM Gateway. INSUMConnect must be used with a Hardware Unit that represents an INSUM Gateway. INSUMConnect provides status information about the connected Gateway, which can be used for supervision of the Gateway in an IEC
61131 application.
Subscribes to measurement or status information updates from a Network
Variable in an INSUM device.
INSUMWrite N N Writes to a Network Variable in an INSUM device.
3BSE041488R101 357
358
FFH1CommLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
FFH1CommLib
The library FFH1CommLib library contains function block types and control module types for communication with FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 devices. These function blocks are used to access data belonging to function blocks in FF device(s) on the (FF) H1 bus (including the custom function blocks on the FF communication interface). All function block types, except those with the extension Cyc, follow the
IEC 61131-5 standard. Some control module types are also supplied for accessing
FF devices.
Table 59. FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
FFConnect N N Connects to a defined FF H1 device.
FFRead N
FFWrite
FFReadCyc
N
N
N
N
N
N
Reads one parameter from an FF H1 function block.
Writes one parameter to an FF H1 function block.
Reads one parameter from an FF H1 function block, cyclically.
Writes one parameter to an FF H1 function block, cyclically.
FFWriteCyc N
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview FFH1CommLib
Table 60. FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
FFToCC N N This control module is intended to be used when continuously reading an FF value of a floating point structure; that is, value and status (the scaling is not included in the read operation). The read value is converted to an OUT parameter of the data type ControlConnection.
CCToFF N N This control module is intended to be used when converting an IN parameter of the data type ControlConnection to a value of a floating point structure and continuously writing it to an FF device.
3BSE041488R101 359
360
Alarm and Event Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Alarm and Event Library
The library AlarmEventLib contains function block types and control module types for alarm and event handling, which include detection and notification. Alarm state handling and alarm acknowledgement are also included.
An alarm data model based on OPC Alarms and Events is used.
Table 61. Function block types in AlarmEventLib
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
AlarmCondBasic Y
AlarmCond Y
1-2 This function block should be used to monitor a boolean signal for which changes need to be acknowledged to ensure that attention is paid to a problem. The function block support only internal conditions and it is not possible to invert the signal.
1-2 Defines an alarm condition that follows a condition state diagram.
It monitors the changes in an input parameter (boolean type) to detect an abnormal condition. Other inputs include acknowledge, disable and enable. A condition state output parameter presents the state of the alarm. The parameter
AckRule (integer) defines the properties for acknowledgement handling. The source name SrcName identifies the name of the object in which the alarm occurred. Class and Severity are inputs that can be used to categorize the event that occurs when the alarm changes state.
It is possible to monitor a signal on an I/O device which reads the time stamp of the
I/O changes on the device.
AttachSystemAlarm Y N Makes it possible to present the current condition state of a specified system alarm.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Alarm and Event Library
Table 61. Function block types in AlarmEventLib (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
PrintAlarms N N Prints alarm conditions.
On request, this function block prints a list of the alarms currently defined in the control system where the block executes.
The printer should be connected directly to a serial port, on the control system, corresponding to the Channel parameter, and should support the 8-bit character set.
PrintEvents N N Prints events continuously.
This function block prints both simple events and condition-related events to a printer connected locally to the control system. This means that as soon as an
AlarmCond changes state (for example, from inactive to active) this information can be sent to the printer. However, only events generated in the system to which the printer is connected can be printed.
The printer should be connected to the port corresponding to the Channel parameter, and should support the 8-bit character set.
3BSE041488R101 361
362
Alarm and Event Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 61. Function block types in AlarmEventLib (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SimpleEventDetector Y
DataToSimpleEvent N N
1-2 Generates a simple event on a Boolean type condition.
This function block supervises a Boolean type signal. When the signal changes value, a simple event is generated. You can use this function block to detect, for example, the start and stop of process objects. There is no acknowledgement handling; otherwise the function block resembles AlarmCond.
Severity and Class are inputs that can be used for sorting the events.
It is possible to monitor a signal on an I/O device which reads the time stamp of the
I/O changes on the device.
This function block type generates a simple event with additional data that is userdefined. It is possible to subscribe to simple events using OPC Alarm and Event. You can also print out the simple events on a locally connected printer, but the userdefined data is not printed out.
If the function block is used in a Batch object, its recipe parameters can be logged together with user-defined data.
SystemAlarmCond Y 1-2 Internal monitored Signal.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Control Libraries
Table 62. Control module types in AlarmEventLib
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
AlarmCondBasicM Y 1-2 Defines an alarm condition and detects condition state changes.
AlarmCondBasicM has reduced functionality compared to AlarmCondM. In return, it consumes less memory.
This is the control module equivalent of the function block type AlarmCondBasic, described above.
AlarmCondM Y 1-2 Defines an alarm condition that follows a condition state diagram.
This is the control module equivalent of the function block type AlarmCond, described above.
Control Libraries
The libraries ControlBasicLib, ControlSimpleLib, ControlStandardLib,
ControlObjectLib, ControlExtendedLib, ControlAdvancedLib and ControlFuzzyLib contain predefined function block types and control module types. The library
ControlSupportLib contains invisible objects and is used by the objects in other
Control libraries.
ControlBasicLib
The library ControlBasicLib contains predefined function block types. These are complete working modules that can be used as-is. Therefore, you should not use these modules to create new ones. The PID functions have feedforward, Tracking,
3-position output and Autotuner control functions. Function blocks have been used to construct this library.
3BSE041488R101 363
364
ControlBasicLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
PID type Function Blocks
Table 63. PID type function blocks
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
PidLoop N
PidLoop3P Y
N
N
This function block type defines a simple control loop with a PID controller and a filter. The function block is to be connected directly to I/O via structured variables of the predefined data type RealIO.
The PID controller of the control loop has feedforward and Tracking functions and an
Autotuner. The Autotuner calculates the controller gain, integration time and derivation time based on a simple relay experiment.
The PID controller has integrator wind-up prevention and bumpless transfer between modes. It also has built-in deviation alarm limits.
This function block type defines a simple control loop with a three-position controller.
It is identical to PidLoop except that the analog output has been replaced by two binary outputs, to increase or decrease the actuator position, or to keep it constant.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlBasicLib
Table 63. PID type function blocks (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
PidCascadeLoop N N This function block type defines a cascade control loop with two PID controllers. The function block is to be connected directly to
I/O via structured variables of the predefined data type RealIO.
The PID controller is identical to that in
PidLoop. The integrator wind-up prevention is extended to also prevent wind-up in the master controller when the output of the slave controller is limited.
PidCascadeLoop3P Y N This function block type defines a cascade control loop with a three-position controller as a slave controller. It is identical to
PidCascadeLoop except that the analog output from the slave controller has been replaced by two binary outputs, to increase or decrease the actuator position, or to keep it constant.
3BSE041488R101 365
366
ControlSimpleLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
ControlSimpleLib
The library ControlSimpleLib contains a number of function blocks that are intended to be used for designing simple control loops. All function blocks in this library can be used in time-critical tasks
.
Table 64. Simple Control function blocks
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
PidSimpleReal Y
LeadLagReal Y
N
N
This function block is a simple PID controller with less functionality than the
PidLoop function blocks and the PidCC module. PidSimpleReal is, however, less time and memory consuming. This controller supports backtracking, tracking, manual control and output limiting. All transitions from limiting, tracking and manual mode are bumpless. Interactive graphics facilitate set-up and maintenance of the controller.
This function block is used either as a Lead or Lag function; that is, as a derivative or integrating limiter. The actual function
(Lead/Lag) is determined by the relation between the two input time constants,
LeadT and LagT. The function block can be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless.
FilterReal Y N This function block is a single-pole, lowpass filter. The functionality obtained is mainly the same as with the control module
FilterCC. The output can be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless. This function block can be used in a time-critical task.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlSimpleLib
Table 64. Simple Control function blocks (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Filter2PReal Y N This function block is a low-pass filter with one zero and two complex poles. The output can be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless.
PiecewiseLinearReal Y
PiecewiseLinear2DReal N N
N This function block is a look-up table with a number of predefined input-output pairs.
Values between these pairs are calculated by linear interpolation. The function block can be used to define a non-linear function y = f(x). The maximum number of data points is 21 and an Interaction window facilitates data input. The only restriction on the data points is that the x-values must be increasing. It is also possible to calculate the pseudo-inverse of the defined function for a given input, InInverse. The functionality of this function block is the same as that of the Control module
PiecewiseLinearCC.
This function block is an extension of the
PiecewiseLinearReal function block. It accepts two inputs, which means that a non-linear surface, z = f(x,y) can be specified. The restriction on the x-, and the y-values is that they must be increasing. A maximum of 21 x-values and 11 y-values can be specified; that is, as 231 data points.
An Interaction window can be used to edit the data.
VelocityLimiterReal Y N This function block is a ramp function used to limit the velocity of the change of a signal. The output can be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless.
3BSE041488R101 367
368
ControlSimpleLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 64. Simple Control function blocks (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
AccelerationLimReal Y N This function block is a ramp function used to limit the velocity of the change of a signal. The output can be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless. It limits both the velocity and acceleration.
IntegratorReal Y
DerivativeReal Y
N
N
This function block is a regular integrator with the same functionality as the control module IntegratorCC. The output is limited and may be forced to track an external signal. All transitions from tracking and limiting are bumpless.
This function block is a combined first-order low-pass filter and a differentiator. The filter is used to smooth the derivative action. The functionality is similar to the existing control module DerivativeCC. The output may be forced to track an external signal. Transition from tracking is bumpless.
ThreePosReal Y N This function block is a three-position converter from a real input to two Boolean outputs (increase/decrease). It can be used with or without feedback from the actuator.
It is similar to the existing control module
ThreePosCC.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlStandardLib
ControlStandardLib
The library ControlStandardLib contains control module types that can be used when designing your own standard control loops. They are used for continuous control; for example, PID loops. They can be used for stand-alone or cascade control in master/slave configurations. The PID functions have Feedforward,
Tracking, Backtracking, Three-position output, Hand/Auto and Autotuner control functions. Control modules have been used to create this library, and they have associated engineering and operator graphics.
The control modules can be connected to other control modules in
ControlExtendedLib, ControlAdvancedLib, or ControlFuzzyLib, in order to construct more advanced control loops. The control modules are connected using graphical connections. Information is sent forwards as well as backwards in the control loop. The automatic code sorting is used to obtain good performance related to bumpless transfer and integrator wind-up in the entire control loop.
3BSE041488R101 369
370
ControlStandardLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
PID Control Modules
Table 65. PID control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
PidCC N
PidSimpleCC Y
N
N
This is a standard PID controller. It has all the functions of the PID controllers of the function blocks described above. But since it is a control module, it can be connected to other control modules in order to create more advanced control loops than those that can be obtained with the function blocks described above.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
Signal and Vote Loop Concept on page 305.
This control module is a low-functionality
PID-controller compared to the alreadyexisting PID modules, PidCC and
PidAdvancedCC. The PidSimpleCC module, however, consumes less time and memory. Interactive graphics facilitate setup and maintenance of the controller. The main inputs and the output are of
ControlConnection type, which means that backtracking and limiting are handled automatically.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlStandardLib
Process I/O Control Modules
Most of the process I/O modules used for continuous control operate with the data type Control Connection (“CC”).
Table 66. Process I/O control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
AnalogInCC Y N Analog Input
AnalogOutCC
ThreePosCC
N
Y
PulseWidthCC N
N Analog Output
N
N
This control module is used as the end of a three-point control loop with digital outputs.
The control module input is an analog signal that is compared with a feedback signal from the valve position, or is generated internally.
This control module is used as the graphical end of a control loop with pulsemodulated digital output. The control module input is an analog signal that generates the duty cycle of the output signal. The cycle time is defined via the parameter interface.
3BSE041488R101 371
372
ControlStandardLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Manual Control Modules
Table 67. Manual control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
ManualAutoCC N N With this control module it is possible to enter values into a control loop manually, and supervise the control values graphically in histograms.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
Conversion Control Modules
Table 68. Conversion control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
RealToCC Y N This control module is designed to collect each component to form a data type
ControlConnection.
CCToReal Y N
CCToInteger Y N
This control module functions as an adapter from a signal of data type
ControlConnection. It divides the
ControlConnection into its components to give a signal of data type real.
This control module functions as an adapter from a signal of data type
ControlConnection. It divides up
ControlConnection into its components, to give a signal of data type integer.
The real value of the parameter In is converted to the integer parameter Out. At conversion the hysteresis specified by the parameter Hysteresis is used.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlStandardLib
Branch Control Modules
Table 69. Branch control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
BranchCC Y N This control module divides the control loop connection structure into two equal branches.
Branch4CC Y N
SplitRangeCC Y N
This control module divides the control loop connection structure into four equal branches.
This control module divides the control loop connection structure into two branches in relation to their ranges.
MidRangeCC Y
CommonRangeCC Y N
N This control module is a ControlConnection with two branches, one fast and one slower branch. The fast branch acts more equal to changes in the signal, and then it is forced to work around the mid-point of its operating range, as the slower branch takes over control. This control module can be used in cases where, for example, two valves are acting on the same flow. One of the valves is a smaller, but faster valve, used to control small disturbances in the flow. The other valve is a larger valve that cannot work quickly, but has a wider operating range.
This control module divides the control loop connection structure into two branches with a specified ratio between the signal levels.
3BSE041488R101 373
374
ControlStandardLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 69. Branch control modules (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
TapCC Y N This control module divides the control loop connection structure into two branches, one in which backtracking is possible, and the other in which it is not.
TapRealCC Y N This control module extracts the value component from the control loop connection structure to produce a real value.
Supervisory Control Modules
Table 70. Supervisory control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
Level2CC N N This control module type is for level detection and alarm purposes and has two detection levels, H (High), and L (Low).
Supervision may be absolute or relative to a reference signal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending object). See also
Level4CC N N This control module type is for level detection and alarm purposes and has four detection levels, H (High), HH, and L (Low),
LL,. Supervision may be absolute or relative to a reference signal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending object). See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlStandardLib
Table 70. Supervisory control modules (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
Level6CC N N This control module is used for level detection purposes. It has six detection levels (LLL, LL, L, H, HH, HHH). L = Low, H
= High
This object is a member of the voting logic
concept (a sending object). See also Signal and Vote Loop Concept
SignalSupervisionCC N N This control module is used to manage erroneous signal status collected from the transmitters or from the interface system.
Three different modes are available: allow the signal to pass through without any interference, freeze the output, or switch over linearly to a predetermined value. The latter two cause an alarm condition to be sent, if configured.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
3BSE041488R101 375
376
ControlStandardLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Selector Control Modules
Table 71. Selector control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
SelectorCC Y N This control module selects one of two inputs of data type ControlConnection.
Selection is made based on a Boolean signal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
Selector4CC Y
SelectGoodCC Y
N
N
This control module selects one out of four inputs of data type ControlConnection.
Selection is based on an integer signal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
The first detected valid signal of type
ControlConnection is selected. If no valid signal is detected, Out is a copy of In1 structure.
SelectGood4CC Y N
MaxCC
Max4CC
Y
Y
N
N
The first detected valid signal of type
ControlConnection is selected. If no valid signal is detected, Out is a copy of In1 structure.
The control module MaxCC computes the larger (maximum) value of two input signals of data type ControlConnection and writes it to the output signal.
The control module Max4CC computes the largest (maximum) value of four input signals of data type ControlConnection and writes it to the output signal.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlStandardLib
Table 71. Selector control modules (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
MinCC Y N The control module MinCC computes the smaller (minimum) value of two input signals of data type ControlConnection and writes it to the output signal.
Min4CC Y N The control module Min4CC computes the smallest (minimum) value of four input signals of data type ControlConnection and writes it to the output signal.
3BSE041488R101 377
378
ControlStandardLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Limiter Control Modules
Table 72. Limiter control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
LimiterCC Y N LimiterCC limits the signal so that it does not increase above the upper limit, or decrease below the lower limit.
LimiterHighCC Y N
LimiterLowCC Y N
LimiterHighCC limits the signal so that it does not increase above the upper limit.
LimiterLowCC limits the signal so that it does not decrease below the lower limit.
VelocityLimiterCC N
AccelerationLimCC Y
N
N
VelocityLimiterCC limits the velocity of the signal. It can be used, for example, to create a linear movement function between a starting point and a target. This will slow down changes in the output signal to avoid rapid steps.
AccelerationLimCC limits the velocity of the signal. It can be used, for example, to create a linear movement function between a starting point and a target. This will slow down changes in the output signal to avoid rapid steps. It limits both the velocity and acceleration.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlObjectLib
l
ControlObjectLib
The Control Object Library (ControlObjectLib) provides function blocks and control modules to define the following three control modules Mimo22CC,
Mimo41CC and Mimo44CC (MimoXYCC).
All the control modules inside the ControlObjectLib should work as templates. The
MimoXYCC handle multiple inputs and multiple outputs in both forward and backward communication direction.
Control Object Function Blocks
Table 73. Control Object Function Blocks
Function Block Type
AddRangeWithGain
AssignBTInputs2
AssignBTInputs4
CalcBackValue
Y
Y
Y
Y
TC SIL Description
Y N This function is used when the user wishes to calculate the output-range if the inputs added are affected by gains, i.e.
Out = a*In1 + b*In2, in this case the Out-
Range is:
OutMax = a*In1Max + b*In2Max and
OutMin = a*In1Min + b*In2Min
N
N
N
This function checks if the input is backtracking or not recursively.
This function block assigns which input is backtracking.
The Relative value of the backtracked value is passed to this function block to calculate the backward value of the input. If the input is used for backtracking then InUsedForBT is set to 'true'.
Produces a warning if Output reaches a certain High or Low value.
N LevelHL
3BSE041488R101 379
380
ControlObjectLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 73. Control Object Function Blocks (Continued)
Function Block Type
Out21BackwardFunction
Out21Function
Out41BackwardFunction
Out41Function
OutVotedBackwardFunction Y
Y
TC SIL Description
Y N For every user defined function block in the forward direction a corresponding function block in the backward direction is needed.
In this case Out21BackwardFunction is the corresponding function block for
Out21Function.
Y N This is an example of a user defined function. In this example the function is linear.
Out1 := a1*In1 + b1*In2
Y N
N
For every user defined function block in the forward direction a corresponding function block in the backward direction is needed.
In this case Out41BackwardFunction is the corresponding function block for
Out41Function.
This is an example of a user defined function. In this example the function is linear.
Out1 := a1*In1 + b1*In2 + c1*In3 + d*In4
N The corresponding backward function block to OutVotedFunction.
OutVotedFunction Y N This user defined function block is executed if Voted.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlObjectLib
Table 73. Control Object Function Blocks (Continued)
Function Block Type
PrepareBacktrack
VotedCmdHandler
TC SIL Description
Y N The equation in backward direction is adjusted. All the inputs which cannot be used for backtracking will affect the backtracked value for the remaining Inputs.
Out := a*In1 + b*In2, If In2 cannot be used then the new Out := Out - b*In2; so that the remaining system is Out := a*In1;
Y N This function block shall take care of the voted actions.
3BSE041488R101 381
382
ControlObjectLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Control Object Control Modules
Table 74. Object control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
Mimo22CC N N The Mimo22CC control module is a module that can handle 2 inputs and 2 outputs in both forward direction and partially in backward direction. The Mimo22CC control module can be run under time critical condition.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
Mimo41CC N N The Mimo41CC control module is a module that can handle 4 inputs and 1 output in both forward direction and in backward direction. The Mimo41CC control module can be run under time critical condition.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
Mimo44CC N N The Mimo44CC control module is a module that can handle 4 inputs and 4 outputs in both forward direction and partially in backward direction. The Mimo44CC control module can be run under time critical condition.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlSolutionLib
l
ControlSolutionLib
All the control module types in Control Solution library (ControlSolutionLib) provide a complete control solution, intended to be used directly in an application.
The user requires only to connect the control module to I/Os and in some cases set some configuration parameters.
The control module types are ready-to-use solutions for frequently occurring control processes found at customers. They consists of a control solution with basic control module types, alarm handling, process graphics, preconfigured trend displays with logging, group displays, and an overview display.
The users may use the solutions directly as they are, or create own types by making copies and change these to fit an intended usage, which may be level control, flow control, etc. These new types can then be preconfigured with specific default values for controller tuning, alarm limits, data collection settings etc.
Table 75. Control Solution control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
CascadeLoop N N This control module provides a complete cascade loop control solution for connection to I/O. The control module provides master and slave PID control with signal supervision, velocity limiter, alarm handling, trending, and operator graphics.
FeedforwardLoop N N This control module provides a complete feedforward loop control solution for connection to I/O. The control module provides PID feedback control and dynamical feedforward control. The loop comes with signal supervision, velocity limiter, alarm handling, trending, and operator graphics.
3BSE041488R101 383
384
ControlSolutionLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 75. Control Solution control module types
Control Module Type
MidrangeLoop
OverrideLoop
SingleLoop N
TC SIL Description
N N This control module provides a complete midrange loop control solution for connection to I/O. The control module provides single PID control of two outputs in parallel.
The loop comes with signal supervision, velocity limiter, stiction compensation, alarm handling, trending, and operator graphics.
N N
N
This control module provides a complete override loop control solution for connection to I/O. The control module provides a minimum selector with four controllers; one master PID controller and three override controllers. The loop comes with signal supervision, velocity limiter, alarm handling, trending, and operator graphics.
This control module provides a complete single loop control solution for connection to I/O. The control module provides PID control with signal supervision, velocity limiter, stiction compensation, alarm handling, trending, and operator graphics.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlExtendedLib
ControlExtendedLib
The library ControlExtendedLib contains control modules for arithmetic and signal processing for continuous control; for example, PID loops. The control functions are available as control modules, and they also have associated engineering and operator graphics.
The control modules can be connected to other control modules in
ControlStandardLib, ControlAdvancedLib or ControlFuzzyLib in order to construct more advanced control loops. The control modules are connected via graphical connections. Information is sent forward as well as backward in the control loop.
The automatic code sorting is used to obtain good performance related to bumpless transfer and integrator wind-up in the entire control loop.
Using the control modules in ControlExtendedLib together with those in
ControlStandardLib and ControlAdvancedLib, it is possible to construct control loops with high functionality. Arithmetic operations can be performed on the example, filtered or integrated.
control signals. The control signals can also be processed in several ways; for
Arithmetic Control Modules
Table 76. Arithmetic control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
AddCC Y N Addition, two inputs
SubCC
MultCC
Y
N
N
N
Subtraction, two inputs
Multiplication, two inputs
DivCC
BiasCC
RatioCC
SqrtCC
XRaisedToYCC
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Division, two inputs
Addition, two inputs
Multiplication, two inputs
Square root, one input
Calculates the value In1 raised to In2.
3BSE041488R101 385
386
ControlExtendedLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Signal Handling Control Modules
Table 77. Signal handling control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
DerivativeCC Y N Derivation.
IntegratorCC
FlowCC
Y
Y
N
N
Integration with reset and hold function.
This control module calculates the mass flow from a differential pressure (orifice plate) compensated by actual temperature and pressure.
Mean4ExcludeBadCC Y
Mean8ExcludeBadCC Y
Mean12ExcludeBadCC Y
N
N
N
N
This control module calculates the mean value of the inputs where extreme values are excluded.
This control module has the same functionality as Mean4ExcludeBadCC above. The only difference is the number of inputs.
This control module has the same functionality as Mean4ExcludeBadCC above. The only difference is the number of inputs.
This is a first-order, low-pass filter.
FilterCC
Filter2PCC
Y
Y
LeadLagCC Y
N
N
This control module is a low-pass filter with one zero and two complex poles.
This control module is used either as a
Lead or Lag function; that is, as a derivative or integrating limiter. The actual function
(Lead/Lag) is determined by the relation between two input time constants.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlExtendedLib
Table 77. Signal handling control modules (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
DelayCC N N This is a delay control module for the
ControlConnection structure.
StateCC Y N This control module delays the forward and backward components by one cycle to avoid program loops.
Signal Conditioning Control Module
Table 78. Signal conditioning control module
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
PiecewiseLinearCC Y
PiecewiseLinear2DCC N
N
N
Piece-wise linear transformation of the input signal.
This control module is a look-up table with a number of predefined input-output data pairs. It takes two inputs, which means that a nonlinear surface, z = f(x,y) can be specified. A maximum of 21 x-values and
11 y-values can be specified; that is, 231 data points. An Interaction window can be used to edit the data.
PiecewiseLinear-
Extension
Y N This control module is used as an add-in module to the PiecewiseLinearCC module.
The latter is only able to handle 21 data points. This control module makes it possible to add another 20 data points. It is also possible to connect a control module to an existing control module of the same type. Thus, the number of points is unlimited.
3BSE041488R101 387
388
ControlAdvancedLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
ControlAdvancedLib
The library ControlAdvancedLib contains control module types for advanced, continuous control; for example, PID loops. The control functions are available as control modules, and they also have associated engineering and operator graphics.
The control modules can be connected to other control modules in
ControlStandardLib, ControlExtendedLib or ControlFuzzyLib in order to construct more advanced control loops. The control modules are connected via graphical connections. Information is sent forward as well as backward in the control loop.
The automatic code sorting is used to obtain good performance related to bumpless transfer and integrator wind-up in the entire control loop.
The advanced PID controller has all the functionality of the previously described
PID controllers. In addition, it can be configured for continuous adaptation of the controller parameters. It can also be configured as a predictive PI; that is, as a PPI, controller and it has a gain scheduler (also called a parameter scheduler).
PID Control Modules
Table 79. PID control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
PidAdvancedCC N N In addition to the standard functions, this control module type contains a gain scheduler and an adaptive controller. It has a PPI (predictive PI) controller for processes with long dead times. The loop assessment tools can detect oscillatory or sluggish behavior of the control loop. The
Autotuner is more advanced than that in the other PID controllers.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlFuzzyLib
Additional Control Modules
Table 80. Additional control modules
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
StictionCompensator Y N An optional extension to the AnalogOutCC control module to add pulses to the output of the AO to avoid the effects of sticky pneumatic valves.
Add-on to the AnalogOnCC. The faceplate
(OD) for StictionCompensator is found under the tabs in the extended faceplate of
AnalogOutCC.
DecoupleFilterCC N N A filter introduced to decouple the process dynamics so that the total system behaves
ControlFuzzyLib
as two independent systems.
The library ControlFuzzyLib contains control module types, which are building blocks for fuzzy controllers. A fuzzy controller is constructed by connecting control modules from ControlFuzzyLib. No programming is necessary. ControlFuzzyLib also has three templates (not protected), which consist of three different fuzzy controllers. The control module types can be copied to your own library and then modified.
Table 81. Control module types in ControlFuzzyLib
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
FuzzyController1CC
FuzzyController2CC
N
N
N
N
This control module contains a very small configuration of a fuzzy controller.
This control module has the same structure as that of FuzzyController1CC, but contains a much larger configuration.
FuzzyController3CC N N This control module is the same as
FuzzyController1CC, but with no setpoint.
3BSE041488R101 389
390
ControlFuzzyLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 81. Control module types in ControlFuzzyLib (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
FuzzySpPvIn N
FuzzyPvIn N
N
N
This control module computes the control deviation EOut (Setpoint Process value) and its first and second derivatives. These signals are inputs to the InputMembership control modules.
This control module can switch between an external and an internal setpoint. The process value can be filtered in a low-pass filter. Three Pv alarm levels and one deviation alarm can be displayed in the history and bar graphs. The control module also has an optional facility for Process value tracking.
The outputs from the control module, the control deviation and its two first derivatives can be simulated by the operator. This facility can be used to test the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
This control module makes the process value and its derivative available to the
InputMembership control modules.
The process value can be filtered in a lowpass filter. Three absolute alarm levels can be displayed in the history and bar graphs.
The outputs from the control module, the process value, and its derivative, can be simulated by the operator. This facility can be used to test the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlFuzzyLib
Table 81. Control module types in ControlFuzzyLib (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
FuzzyOut N N This control module takes a defuzzyfied output from the fuzzy logic part of the controller and computes the output to the process.
The signal can be integrated or not. It can also be set in Manual or Automatic mode or it can track an external value. A feedforward signal can be added, and an anti-reset wind-up function is provided.
InputMembership N
OutputMembership N
N
N
This control module defines an input membership function for the fuzzy logic part of the controller. For every value of the input it computes the degree of membership to the corresponding fuzzy set.
The control module is also used, together with the FuzzyCondition control module, to define the fuzzy conditions.
This control module defines an output membership function for a fuzzy rule. It computes the current membership function, which is equal to the defined membership function, multiplied by the degree of satisfaction of the rule.
The current membership functions for a number of rules can then be combined into a membership function for the output of the controller. This is done by computing the envelope; that is, the maximum of all the current membership functions at every point. This is done in the Defuzzyfication control module.
3BSE041488R101 391
392
ControlFuzzyLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 81. Control module types in ControlFuzzyLib (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
Defuzzyfication N N This control module computes the envelope of all the connected output membership functions. It also computes the center of gravity of the envelope curve. The center of gravity is regarded as the defuzzyfied output from the fuzzy logic part of the controller.
FuzzyCondition6, -12 and -18
N N The control modules FuzzyCondition6,
FuzzyCondition12 and FuzzyCondition18 define and evaluate a fuzzy condition. The condition is defined as a fuzzy AND condition between a number of selected input membership functions. The input membership functions may, or may not, be inverted before the condition is formed.
Together with other fuzzy conditions, the defined fuzzy condition is used in one or more fuzzy rules.
The fuzzy AND condition is defined as the minimum value of the fuzzy variables included.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ControlFuzzyLib
Table 81. Control module types in ControlFuzzyLib (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
FuzzyRule5, -10, -15, -
20, -25 and -30
N
FuzzyProgramControl N
N
N
The control modules FuzzyRule5,
FuzzyRule10, FuzzyRule15, FuzzyRule20,
FuzzyRule25, and FuzzyRule30 define and evaluate a fuzzy rule. The condition of the rule is defined as a fuzzy OR expression between a number of fuzzy conditions defined in FuzzyCondition control modules.
The conditions from the FuzzyCondition control modules may, or may not, be inverted before the condition of the
FuzzyRule control module is formed.
The result of the rule is the degree of satisfaction of the rule. The degree of satisfaction is used to compute the output membership function for the rule. The fuzzy
OR condition is defined as the maximum value of the fuzzy variables included.
This control module is used to toggle the
Edit mode of the fuzzy logic part of the controller on and off. The fuzzy controller is fully operational in both modes.
FuzzyPres N N
FuzzyControlIcon N N
This control module is an icon for the controller. It is intended to be built into the controller and displayed in the Control
Module diagram via a control module selector.
This control module type is the symbol for a controller that contains fuzzy logics.
This control module type is the symbol for fuzzy logics.
FuzzyIcon N N
3BSE041488R101 393
394
Batch Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Batch Library
The library BatchLib contains control module types for batch control and for control of other discontinuous processes. It can be used together with any batch system which communicates via OPC Data Access and which supports the S88 state model for procedural elements.
The control modules described here are used for the interaction between the control application for an Equipment Procedure Element (for example, a phase or an operation) and the Batch Manager.
Table 82. Equipment procedure element control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
EquipProcedure
Template
N
EquipProcedureCore N
N
N
A template control module for designing
Equipment Procedure Elements; that is, the control logic for phases, operations, and so on. It handles the interaction with the Batch
Manager.
Handles the standard ISA/S88-based states and modes of an Equipment
Procedure Element.
EquipProcedureIcon
InfoEquipProcedure
Template
N
N
N
N
This control module type is an icon for
EquipProcedureTemplate and
EquipProcedureCore.
This control module type defines the popup interaction window for the procedural element.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Process Object Libraries
Process Object Libraries
The libraries ProcessObjBasicLib, ProcessObjExtLib, ProcessObjDriveLib and
ProcessObjInsumLib contain function block types and control module types for controlling motors, valves, ABB Drives and Insum Devices in a process application.
The types in these libraries are not protected, which means that you can copy any type to your library, and then modify the unprotected code in the type and use it.
Function block or control module
Core function
Protected code
Added function
Unprotected code
Unprotected function block or control module
unprotected; that is, they can be used and modified in your own library.
Figure 123. The function blocks and the control modules in this library are
3BSE041488R101 395
396
ProcessObjBasicLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
ProcessObjBasicLib
The library ProcessObjBasicLib contains basic core function block types for valve and motor control functions. They are to be used when designing your own function block types. The core function block types should be encapsulated in your own function block type. These core function block types are protected and cannot be changed.
Table 83. ProcessObjBasicLib function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
UniCore N 1-2 Uni-directional object:
Basic function block with one or two outputs and 0, 1, or 2 feedback signals. This function block can be used to represent a valve, for example.
Parameters are available for the connection of an external panel for manual operation of the object, and interlock and force signals for connection of different safety interlocking. It is also possible to connect an external fault signal.
BiCore N 1-2 Bi-directional object:
Basic function block with two or three outputs and 0, 2 or 3 feedback signals. This function block can be used to represent a two-speed motor or a forward-backward motor, for example.
Parameters are available for the connection of an external panel for manual operation of the object, and interlock and force signals for connection of different safety interlocking. It is also possible to connect an external fault signal.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjBasicLib
Table 83. ProcessObjBasicLib function block types (Continued)
DetectOverrideVoteUni Y
Jog
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
UniSimple N 1-2 This function block type is suitable for graphical control and supervision of a unidirectional (one activated and one deactivated position) process object. An extension to the basic UniCore type is the graphics functionality.
BiSimple N
DetectOverrideBi
DetectOverrideUni
Y
Y
1-2 This function block type is suitable for graphical control and supervision of a bidirectional (two activated and one deactivated position) process object. For greater flexibility, graphics functionality is given to the extensions to the basic BiCore
1-2 Detects override commands like Priority type.
and Ilock.
1-2 Detects override commands like Priority and Ilock.
1-2 Detects override commands like Priority and Ilock.
DetectOverrideVoteBi Y
Y
1-2 Detects override commands like Priority and Ilock.
1-2 This function block handles the Jog functionality implemented in motor objects.
Jog is a functionality that starts the motor object in a specified direction during a specified period of time. The Jog function only is applicable in manual mode of the motor object.
3BSE041488R101 397
398
ProcessObjBasicLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 83. ProcessObjBasicLib function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
UniDelayOfCmd Y 1-2 This function block type is used to avoid spurious commands in auto mode. For example, if a level detector causes the object to start, a disturbance pulse will not be able to start the object.
BiDelayOfCmd Y
PrioritySup Y
1-2 This function block type is used to avoid spurious commands in auto mode. For example, if a level detector causes the object to start, a disturbance pulse will not be able to start the object.
1-2 This function block type supervises the priority commands and sets the mode to
PriorityMode if any of the inputs are active.
Alarm situations are also supervised and, if active, an automatic priority to zero is performed.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjBasicLib
Table 83. ProcessObjBasicLib function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
DriveCommandSend N N This function block type sends command data to the connected drive. It can be used as a base for control of ABB Drives
ACS800, ACS600 and ACS400 and their corresponding DC drives. The function block can easily be used together with other function blocks to create more complex objects that handle functionality such as modes and HSI. See also the UniCore and
BiCore function block descriptions.
DriveStatusReceive N N This function block type can be used as a base for control of ABB Drives ACS600 and
ACS400, and their corresponding DC drives. The function block can easily be used together with other function blocks to create more complex objects that handle functionality such as modes and HSI.
This function block provides the user with the ability to start and stop a drive with a chosen setpoint according to the local state matching in the drive.
3BSE041488R101 399
400
ProcessObjBasicLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 84. ProcessObjBasicLib control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
UniSimpleM N 1-2 This control module type is suitable for graphical control and supervision of a unidirectional (one activated position and one deactivated position) process object.
The extensions to the basic UniCore type include control module graphics and
Interaction windows.
BiSimpleM N 1-2 This control module type is suitable for graphical control and supervision of a bidirectional (two activated positions and one deactivated position) process object.
The extensions to the basic BiCore type include control module graphics and
Interaction windows.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjExtendedLib
ProcessObjExtendedLib
The library ProcessObjExtLib contains types that are based on the protected core functions available in the ProcessObjBasicLib. Unprotected code is then added to the core.
Table 85. ProcessObjExtLib function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
Uni N 1-2 Uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This function block type is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
Bi N
ValveUni N
1-2 Bi-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This function block type is based on the
BiCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
1-2 Valve uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This function block type is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
Some parameters from the UniCore object are not used, and this block serves as a more basic example for a normal valve.
MotorUni N 1-2 Motor uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This function block type is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This function block has additional interlocks, safety commands, and output delay timers.
3BSE041488R101 401
402
ProcessObjExtendedLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 85. ProcessObjExtLib function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
MotorBi N 1-2 Motor bi-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This function block type is based on the
BiCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This function block has additional interlocks, safety commands, and output delay timers.
LevelDetection N
OETextBi
OETextUni
OETextValveUni
Y
Y
Y
1-2 Supervises the level of an input signal to an object.
1-2 This function block concatenates text strings for the alarm printouts for Bi type objects.
1-2 This function block generates error-text strings. Calls of the respective types are included in the open code of the corresponding extended process objects.
1-2 This function block concatenates text strings for the alarm printouts for ValveUni type objects.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjExtendedLib
Table 86. ProcessObjExtLib control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
UniM N 1-2 Uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This control module type is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
BiM N
ValveUniM N
1-2 Bi-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This control module type is based on the
BiCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
1-2 Valve uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This control module type is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101 403
404
ProcessObjExtendedLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 86. ProcessObjExtLib control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
MotorUniM N
MotorBiM N
1-2 Motor uni-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This control module is based on the
UniCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This control module has additional interlocks, safety commands, and output delay timers.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
1-2 Motor bi-directional object with alarm and graphics:
This control module is based on the BiCore object. Extensions include alarm handling and a faceplate.
This control module has additional interlocks, safety commands, and output delay timers.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjDriveLib
ProcessObjDriveLib
The library ProcessObjDriveLib contains function block types and control module types which can be used to control and supervise ABB Standard and Engineered
Drives.
Table 87. ProcessObjDriveLib function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
ACStdDrive N N This function block type can be used to control and supervise ABB Standard AC
Drives. This function block type includes
Interaction windows implemented in Control
Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process Portal.
DCStdDrive N
EngDrive N
N
N
This function block type can be used to control and supervise ABB Standard DC
Drives. This function block type includes
Interaction windows implemented in Control
Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process Portal.
This function block type can be used to control and supervise ABB Engineered AC and DC Drives. This function block type includes Interaction windows implemented in Control Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process
Portal.
3BSE041488R101 405
406
ProcessObjDriveLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 88. ProcessObjDriveLib control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
ACStdDriveM N N This control module type can be used to control and supervise ABB Standard AC
Drives. This control module type includes
Interaction windows implemented in Control
Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process Portal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
DCStdDriveM N N This control module type can be used to control and supervise ABB Standard DC
Drives. This control module type includes
Interaction windows implemented in Control
Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process Portal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
EngDriveM N N This control module type can be used to control and supervise ABB Engineered AC and DC Drives. This control module type includes Interaction windows implemented in Control Builder M, and faceplates and display elements implemented in Process
Portal.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjInsumLib
ProcessObjInsumLib
The library ProcessObjInsumLib library contains function block types and control module types to control and supervise the standard INSUM (INtegrated System for
User optimized Motor management) devices MCU (Motor Control Unit) and trip unit for Circuit Breakers. The INSUM devices are connected via an INSUM
Gateway and a CI857 Interface module to the AC800M.
Table 89. ProcessObjInsumLib function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
InsumBreaker N N This function block type is used to control and supervise an INSUM trip unit for circuit breakers. It is based on the UniCore object for process logic, and INSUMRead and
INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device. Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
3BSE041488R101 407
408
ProcessObjInsumLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 89. ProcessObjInsumLib function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
McuBasic N N This function block type is used to control and supervise an INSUM MCU. It is based on the BiCore object for process logic, and
INSUMRead and INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device.
Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
McuExtended N N This function block type is used to control and supervise an INSUM MCU. It is based on the BiCore object for process logic, and
INSUMRead and INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device.
Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview ProcessObjInsumLib
Table 90. ProcessObjInsumLib control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
InsumBreakerM N N This control module type is used to control and supervise an INSUM trip unit for circuit breakers. It is based on the UniCore object for process logic, and INSUMRead and
INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device. Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101 409
410
ProcessObjInsumLib Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 90. ProcessObjInsumLib control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
McuBasicM N
McuExtendedM N
N
N
This control module type is used to control and supervise an INSUM MCU. It is based on the BiCore object for process logic, and
INSUMRead and INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device.
Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
This control module type is used to control and supervise an INSUM MCU. It is based on the BiCore object for process logic, and
INSUMRead and INSUMWrite blocks for the communication with the device.
Function blocks for alarm handling are also included for the display of trips, warnings and other errors; that is, communication errors and feedback errors from the device.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending and receiving object).
See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Signal Library
Signal Library
The library SignalLib contains function block types for analog and digital inputs and outputs. They extend the functionality of I/O signals and application variables with alarm and event handling. The function blocks also provide filtering and error handling. In the faceplates it is possible to force the objects, view trim curves, configure and enable/disable alarms and events, and view/modify parameters.
Table 91. SignalLib function block types
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SignalInReal Y
SignalOutReal
SignalReal
SignalInBool
Y
Y
Y
1-2 SignalInReal extends the functionality of an analog input signal of data type RealIO with alarm/event handling for three high levels, three low levels and error handling.
N SignalOutReal extends the functionality of an analog output signal of data type RealIO with alarm/event handling for three high levels, three low levels and error handling.
1-2 SignalReal is used to achieve alarm/event handling for an application variable of data type real with up to three high and three low levels.
1-2 SignalInBool extends the functionality for a
Digital Input signal of data type BoolIO with alarm/event handling, when the input value is different from Normal value.
In corresponding faceplates it is possible to force the object, view trim curves, and configure and enable/disable alarms and events.
3BSE041488R101 411
412
Signal Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 91. SignalLib function block types (Continued)
Function Block Type TC SIL Description
SignalOutBool Y 1-2 SignalOutBool extends the functionality of a digital output signal of data type BoolIO with alarm/event handling when the input value is different from Normal value.
In corresponding faceplates it is possible to force the object, view trim curves, and configure and enable/disable alarms and events.
SignalBool Y
SignalSimpleInReal N
1-2 SignalBool extends the functionality of an application variable of data type bool with alarm/event handling when the input value is different from Normal value.
In corresponding faceplates it is possible to force the object, view trim curves, and configure and enable/disable alarms and events.
1-2 An analog input signal, of RealIO data type, extended with alarm and event handling for errors. Filtering and error handling is also provided.
SignalSimpleOutReal Y N An analog output signal, of RealIO data type, extended with alarm and event handling for errors.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Signal Library
Table 92. SignalLib control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
SignalBoolCalcInM Y 1-2 Monitors an application variable, of bool data type. To be used when it requires connections to a Vote control module type.
This object is a member of the voting logic
concept (a sending object). See also Signal and Vote Loop Concept
SignalBoolCalcOutM Y
SignalInBoolM Y
1-2 Monitors an application variable, of bool data type. To be used when it requires input connections from a Vote control module type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
1-2 Monitors a digital input signal, of BoolIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic
concept (a sending object). See also Signal and Vote Loop Concept
SignalInRealM
SignalOutBoolM
Y
Y
1-2 Monitors up to three high levels and up to three low levels and errors for an analog input signal, of RealIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic
concept (a sending object). See also Signal and Vote Loop Concept
1-2 Monitors a digital output signal, of BoolIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
3BSE041488R101 413
414
Signal Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 92. SignalLib control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
SignalOutRealM Y N Monitors up to three high levels and up to three low levels and errors for an analog output signal, of RealIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
SignalRealCalcInM Y
SignalRealCalcOutM Y
1-2 Monitors up to three high levels and up to three low levels and errors for an application variable, of real data type. To be used when it requires connections to a Vote control module type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a sending object). See also
1-2 Monitors up to three high levels and up to three low levels and errors for an application variable, of real data type. To be used when it requires input connections from a Vote control module type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Signal Library
Table 92. SignalLib control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
SignalSimpleInRealM Y 1-2 Monitors an analog input signal, of RealIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic
concept (a sending object). See also Signal and Vote Loop Concept
SignalSimpleOutRealM Y N Monitors an analog output signal, of RealIO data type.
This object is a member of the voting logic concept (a receiving object). See also
3BSE041488R101 415
416
Signal Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Table 93. SignalLib Vote control module types
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
Vote1oo1Q Y 1-2 The Vote1oo1Q Control Module performs voting of one input signal, where the signal quality is considered together with the activation signal from the input module, e.g.
SignalInRealM. The Vote Output is set if the input signal if either activated or have bad quality. The signal quality is considered according to the QualityConfig parameter.
VoteXoo2D Y
VoteXoo3Q Y
1-2 The VoteXoo2D Control Module performs voting of up to two input signals, where the signal quality is diagnosed together with the activation signal from the input modules, e.g. SignalInRealM. If X parameter =1; the
Vote Output is set if any input signal is activated and quality is good, or if all connected signals have bad quality. If X parameter =2; the Vote Output is set if both input signals are activated and quality is good, or if one input signal is activated and quality is good and the other input signal have bad quality, or if all connected signals have bad quality. The signal quality is considered according to the QualityConfig parameter.
1-2 The VoteXoo3Q Control Module performs voting of up to three input signals, where the signal quality is considered together with the activation signal from the input modules, e.g. SignalInRealM. The Vote
Output is set if X (X parameter) number of input signals are either activated or have bad quality. The signal quality is considered according to the QualityConfig parameter.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Signal Library
Table 93. SignalLib Vote control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC SIL Description
VoteXoo8 Y 1-2 The VoteXoo8 Control Module performs voting of up to eight input signals from input modules, e.g. SignalInRealM. The Vote
Output is set if X (X parameter) number of input signals are activated. The signal quality is not considered.
VoteBranch4 Y
VotedBranch4
VotedAnd4
VotedOr4
Y
Y
Y
1-2 This control module branches a signal of
VoteConnection that contains the output from a signal object control module into four signals of the same data type.
1-2 This control module branches a signal of
VotedConnection that contains a result from a vote control module into four signals of the same data type.
1-2 This control module makes an AND function between four signals of Voted
Connection that contains a result from a vote control module.
1-2 This control module makes an OR function between four signals of Voted Connection that contains a result from a vote control module.
3BSE041488R101 417
418
Group Start Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
Group Start Library
The GroupStartLib contains control module types used to the control and supervise of process objects in a controller.
Table 94. GroupStartLib control module types
Control Module Type
GroupStartAnd
GroupStartHead
GroupStartObject
Template
GroupStartOr
GroupStartStep
GroupStartTestObject
N
N
N
N
TC SIL Description
N N This control module type executes a logical
AND between the connected input signals of type GroupStartStepConnection
N N
N
This control module type supervises the entire group, keeps track of the alarms generated in the group and detects the connected objects not ready for start in group start mode. The behavior of the group at alarms is also a task for this control module. A process object may be connected to the bottom output node.
This control module type encapsulates a standard control loop to be connected into the group start environment and is equipped with simulated feedback signals.
N
N
N
This control module type executes a logical
OR between the connected input signals of type GroupStartStepConnection.
This control module type has four in- and four output nodes to configure the group start preferably by using graphical connections. A process object may be connected to the bottom output node.
This control module type is used to connect in the group start to test the start up configuration and to simulate alarm situations.
3BSE041488R101
Appendix B Library Objects Overview Group Start Library
Table 94. GroupStartLib control module types (Continued)
Control Module Type TC
GroupStartStandby4, 8, 12 Y
SIL
N
Description
This control module shall be used for standby purposes and to be able to activate a desired number (maximum the number of connected objects on the output terminals) of objects all working together in the process.
InfoParGroupStart
ObjectTemplate
N N This control module type contains the graphics of the interaction window of the
GroupStartObjectTemplate control module type.
3BSE041488R101 419
420
Group Start Library Appendix B Library Objects Overview
3BSE041488R101
A
ABB Drives
access
adaptation 140 adaptive control 140
adaptive controller
afw file
alarms
arithmetic control modules, see control modules
arithmetic functions (extensible), see functions
arithmetic functions (non-extensible), see functions
array and queue functions 333 array and queue functions, see functions arrays 333
INDEX
Autotuner
B
backtracking 69, 72 calculation 69
bi-stable function blocks (standard), see function
blocks
bit shift functions (standard), see functions bit-wise Boolean functions (standard), see functions
build
3BSE041488R101 421
C
calculation
control module types 166 function block types 166
calculations
cascade loop
character string functions (standard), see functions
code blocks
commands
communication libraries
library 347, 351 to 354, 356 to 358
comparison functions (standard), see functions
complex types
connections
context-sensitive help 320 context-sensitive linking 320
control deviation 77, 80, 85, 131, 136
control library 363, 366, 369, 385, 388 to 389
control loops
control module types
control module types
control modules
3BSE041488R101 control modules
control word
controllers
conversion control modules 372
copy
423
Index
Core
operation 221 operation parameters 221
counter function blocks (standard), see function
blocks
D
data types
design
limit 131 deviation alarms 131
DriveCore
effective feedback
E
emergency stop
examples
execution
complex types 55 formal instances 55 sub-objects 55
F
F1
feedback error
feedback signals
filter
forced action
formal instances
friction
function block types
3BSE041488R101 function block types
Index
425
function blocks
bi-stable (standard) 336 counter (standard) 336 timer (standard) 336
function blocks vs control modules 239
functions
arithmetic (non-extensible) 326
bit shift (standard) 326 bit-wise Boolean (standard) 326
character string (standard) 328
sluggish control detection 153
fuzzy logic
linear part 85 logic part 85 to 86
output membership 86 rules 86 to 87
Group Start
Group Start mode
G
H
help
access from Control Builder 318
help files
I
IEC 61131-3
Ilock
import
index
industrial controller types 104
inhibit
InsumBreaker
interaction windows
interlock
interlocking
K
keywords
L
Index
427 3BSE041488R101
Local mode
logarithmic functions, see functions
M
manage
McuBasic
McuExtended
modes
noise
N
O
online help
context-sensitive 320 context-sensitive linking 320
open
operation
operation parameters
Out of Service mode
output
output IOLevel
output settings
3BSE041488R101
Panel mode
parameter keywords
parameters
PD controller
PI controller
PID controller
prevent
priority commands
Priority mode
P
429
Index
process gain
process I/O control modules 371
process object
Process object Function Block types 337, 345
process objects
library 396, 401, 405, 407, 411, 418
processes
no dead time 96 short dead time 96
Q
reduce
R
requirements
reserved names
reshape
S
scale
select
selection functions (standard), see functions
setpoint changes 81 setpoint weight 79, 81
signal conditioning control module 387
signal handling control modules 386
signals
sluggish control detection 153
Soft Local mode
3BSE041488R101 states
supervision
control module types 162 function block types 162
supervisory control modules 374
T
task control functions, see functions
timer function blocks (standard), see function
blocks tracking
trigonometric functions, see functions
Index
431
type conversion functions, see functions
types
U
V
X
3BSE041488R101 432
Index
3BSE041488R101. Printed in Sweden June 2006
Copyright © 2003-2006 by ABB. All Rights Reserved
® Registered Trademark of ABB.
™ Trademark of ABB http://www.abb.com
Automation Technologies
Wickliffe, Ohio, USA www.abb.com/controlsystems
Automation Technologies
Västerås, Sweden www.abb.com/controlsystems
Automation Technologies
Mannheim, Germany www.abb.de/controlsystems
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Extended control software
Binary and analog handling
Re-usable automation solutions
Control loops
Analog control functions
Control libraries
Frequently asked questions
Compact Control Builder AC 800M Version 5.0 is a software suite for ABB's AC800M control system. It provides extended control software, including binary and analog handling.
The software allows for the creation of re-usable automation solutions, such as control loops and other analog control functions using Control libraries.
The software includes extended control software, binary and analog handling, and allows for the creation of re-usable automation solutions, including control loops and other analog control functions using Control libraries.
User questions
